From a9322f6488b432ddc1e89be88242c827c633fb63 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stefan Assmann Date: Wed, 11 Jun 2008 16:35:14 +0200 Subject: x86, pci: introduce pci=noioapicquirk kernel cmdline option Introduce pci=noioapicquirk kernel cmdline option to disable all boot interrupt quirks Signed-off-by: Stefan Assmann Signed-off-by: Olaf Dabrunz Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 795c487af8e..1aebe9dffba 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1518,6 +1518,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nomsi [MSI] If the PCI_MSI kernel config parameter is enabled, this kernel boot option can be used to disable the use of MSI interrupts system-wide. + noioapicquirk [APIC] Disable all boot interrupt quirks. + Safety option to keep boot IRQs enabled. This + should never be necessary. biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table. These calls are known to be buggy on several machines and they hang the machine -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9197979b518573999d52d9e85bce1680682ed85c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stefan Assmann Date: Wed, 11 Jun 2008 16:35:15 +0200 Subject: x86, pci: introduce pci=ioapicreroute kernel cmdline option Introduce pci=ioapicreroute kernel cmdline option to enable rerouting of boot interrupts to the primary io-apic. Signed-off-by: Stefan Assmann Signed-off-by: Olaf Dabrunz Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1aebe9dffba..df262b3c3d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1521,6 +1521,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file noioapicquirk [APIC] Disable all boot interrupt quirks. Safety option to keep boot IRQs enabled. This should never be necessary. + ioapicreroute [APIC] Enable rerouting of boot IRQs to the + primary IO-APIC for bridges that cannot disable + boot IRQs. This fixes a source of spurious IRQs + when the system masks IRQs. biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table. These calls are known to be buggy on several machines and they hang the machine -- cgit v1.2.3 From 41b9eb264c8407655db57b60b4457fe1b2ec9977 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stefan Assmann Date: Tue, 15 Jul 2008 13:48:55 +0200 Subject: x86, pci: introduce config option for pci reroute quirks (was: [PATCH 0/3] Boot IRQ quirks for Broadcom and AMD/ATI) This is against linux-2.6-tip, branch pci-ioapic-boot-irq-quirks. From: Stefan Assmann Subject: Introduce config option for pci reroute quirks The config option X86_REROUTE_FOR_BROKEN_BOOT_IRQS is introduced to enable (or disable) the redirection of the interrupt handler to the boot interrupt line by default. Depending on the existence of interrupt masking / threaded interrupt handling in the kernel (vanilla, rt, ...) and the maturity of the rerouting patch, users can enable or disable the redirection by default. This means that the reroute quirk can be applied to any kernel without changing it. Interrupt sharing could be increased if this option is enabled. However this option is vital for threaded interrupt handling, as done by the RT kernel. It should simplify the consolidation with the RT kernel. The option can be overridden by either pci=ioapicreroute or pci=noioapicreroute. Signed-off-by: Stefan Assmann Signed-off-by: Olaf Dabrunz Cc: Jesse Barnes Cc: Jon Masters Cc: Ihno Krumreich Cc: Sven Dietrich Cc: Daniel Gollub Cc: Felix Foerster Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index f5662b7a34d..62b6e8067a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1536,6 +1536,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file primary IO-APIC for bridges that cannot disable boot IRQs. This fixes a source of spurious IRQs when the system masks IRQs. + noioapicreroute [APIC] Disable workaround that uses the + boot IRQ equivalent of an IRQ that connects to + a chipset where boot IRQs cannot be disabled. + The opposite of ioapicreroute. biosirq [X86-32] Use PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table. These calls are known to be buggy on several machines and they hang the machine -- cgit v1.2.3 From cdad72207d164569cb4bf647eb824a7f93e8d388 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Peter Zijlstra Date: Wed, 3 Sep 2008 16:00:57 +0200 Subject: lockstat: documentation update Christoph noted that the documentation doesn't tell in what unit the lockstat times are reported, ammend this. Reported-by: Christoph Hellwig Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/lockstat.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt index 4ba4664ce5c..02f36f5c64f 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockstat.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt @@ -100,6 +100,7 @@ The first lock (05-10) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors, they have two: contentions and [] symbol. +The integer part of the time values is in us. View the top contending locks: -- cgit v1.2.3 From c7e78cff6b7518212247fb20b1dc6411540dc9af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Peter Zijlstra Date: Thu, 16 Oct 2008 23:17:09 +0200 Subject: lockstat: contend with points We currently only provide points that have to wait on contention, also lists the points we have to wait for. Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/lockstat.txt | 50 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/lockstat.txt b/Documentation/lockstat.txt index 02f36f5c64f..9cb9138f7a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/lockstat.txt +++ b/Documentation/lockstat.txt @@ -71,34 +71,48 @@ Look at the current lock statistics: # less /proc/lock_stat -01 lock_stat version 0.2 +01 lock_stat version 0.3 02 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 03 class name con-bounces contentions waittime-min waittime-max waittime-total acq-bounces acquisitions holdtime-min holdtime-max holdtime-total 04 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05 -06 &inode->i_data.tree_lock-W: 15 21657 0.18 1093295.30 11547131054.85 58 10415 0.16 87.51 6387.60 -07 &inode->i_data.tree_lock-R: 0 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 23302 231198 0.25 8.45 98023.38 -08 -------------------------- -09 &inode->i_data.tree_lock 0 [] add_to_page_cache+0x5f/0x190 -10 -11 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... -12 -13 dcache_lock: 1037 1161 0.38 45.32 774.51 6611 243371 0.15 306.48 77387.24 -14 ----------- -15 dcache_lock 180 [] sys_getcwd+0x11e/0x230 -16 dcache_lock 165 [] d_alloc+0x15a/0x210 -17 dcache_lock 33 [] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x4d/0x70 -18 dcache_lock 1 [] shrink_dcache_parent+0x18/0x130 +06 &mm->mmap_sem-W: 233 538 18446744073708 22924.27 607243.51 1342 45806 1.71 8595.89 1180582.34 +07 &mm->mmap_sem-R: 205 587 18446744073708 28403.36 731975.00 1940 412426 0.58 187825.45 6307502.88 +08 --------------- +09 &mm->mmap_sem 487 [] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928 +10 &mm->mmap_sem 179 [] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d +11 &mm->mmap_sem 279 [] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce +12 &mm->mmap_sem 76 [] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59 +13 --------------- +14 &mm->mmap_sem 270 [] sys_mmap+0x75/0xce +15 &mm->mmap_sem 431 [] do_page_fault+0x466/0x928 +16 &mm->mmap_sem 138 [] sys_munmap+0x32/0x59 +17 &mm->mmap_sem 145 [] sys_mprotect+0xcd/0x21d +18 +19 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... +20 +21 dcache_lock: 621 623 0.52 118.26 1053.02 6745 91930 0.29 316.29 118423.41 +22 ----------- +23 dcache_lock 179 [] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54 +24 dcache_lock 113 [] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb +25 dcache_lock 99 [] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44 +26 dcache_lock 104 [] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a +27 ----------- +28 dcache_lock 192 [] _atomic_dec_and_lock+0x34/0x54 +29 dcache_lock 98 [] d_rehash+0x1b/0x44 +30 dcache_lock 72 [] d_alloc+0x19a/0x1eb +31 dcache_lock 112 [] d_instantiate+0x36/0x8a This excerpt shows the first two lock class statistics. Line 01 shows the output version - each time the format changes this will be updated. Line 02-04 -show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-10 and 13-18 show the actual +show the header with column descriptions. Lines 05-18 and 20-31 show the actual statistics. These statistics come in two parts; the actual stats separated by a -short separator (line 08, 14) from the contention points. +short separator (line 08, 13) from the contention points. -The first lock (05-10) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the +The first lock (05-18) is a read/write lock, and shows two lines above the short separator. The contention points don't match the column descriptors, -they have two: contentions and [] symbol. +they have two: contentions and [] symbol. The second set of contention +points are the points we're contending with. The integer part of the time values is in us. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1080d709fb9d8cd4392f93476ee46a9d6ea05a5b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Neil Horman Date: Mon, 27 Oct 2008 12:28:25 -0700 Subject: net: implement emergency route cache rebulds when gc_elasticity is exceeded This is a patch to provide on demand route cache rebuilding. Currently, our route cache is rebulid periodically regardless of need. This introduced unneeded periodic latency. This patch offers a better approach. Using code provided by Eric Dumazet, we compute the standard deviation of the average hash bucket chain length while running rt_check_expire. Should any given chain length grow to larger that average plus 4 standard deviations, we trigger an emergency hash table rebuild for that net namespace. This allows for the common case in which chains are well behaved and do not grow unevenly to not incur any latency at all, while those systems (which may be being maliciously attacked), only rebuild when the attack is detected. This patch take 2 other factors into account: 1) chains with multiple entries that differ by attributes that do not affect the hash value are only counted once, so as not to unduly bias system to rebuilding if features like QOS are heavily used 2) if rebuilding crosses a certain threshold (which is adjustable via the added sysctl in this patch), route caching is disabled entirely for that net namespace, since constant rebuilding is less efficient that no caching at all Tested successfully by me. Signed-off-by: Neil Horman Signed-off-by: Eric Dumazet Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index d84932650fd..c7712787933 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -27,6 +27,12 @@ min_adv_mss - INTEGER The advertised MSS depends on the first hop route MTU, but will never be lower than this setting. +rt_cache_rebuild_count - INTEGER + The per net-namespace route cache emergency rebuild threshold. + Any net-namespace having its route cache rebuilt due to + a hash bucket chain being too long more than this many times + will have its route caching disabled + IP Fragmentation: ipfrag_high_thresh - INTEGER -- cgit v1.2.3 From f3f0d7b026ae34d6ed5ae67cd4dd5909f9cd70a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tim Shimmin Date: Thu, 30 Oct 2008 18:30:09 +1100 Subject: [XFS] remove restricted chown parameter from xfs linux On Linux all filesystems are supposed to be operating under Posix' restricted chown. Restricted chown means it restricts chown to the owner unless you have CAP_FOWNER. NOTE: that 2 files outside of fs/xfs have been modified too for this change. Reviewed-by: Dave Chinner SGI-PV: 988919 SGI-Modid: 2.6.x-xfs-melb:linux:32413b Signed-off-by: Tim Shimmin Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig Signed-off-by: David Chinner Signed-off-by: Lachlan McIlroy --- Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt index 0a1668ba260..9878f50d6ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs.txt @@ -229,10 +229,6 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem: ISGID bit is cleared if the irix_sgid_inherit compatibility sysctl is set. - fs.xfs.restrict_chown (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1) - Controls whether unprivileged users can use chown to "give away" - a file to another user. - fs.xfs.inherit_sync (Min: 0 Default: 1 Max: 1) Setting this to "1" will cause the "sync" flag set by the xfs_io(8) chattr command on a directory to be -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8a1c8eb75be492e20003966652c9cd5ff57a559d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Aristeu Rozanski Date: Thu, 30 Oct 2008 13:08:50 -0400 Subject: x86, nmi-watchdog: update procfs nmi_watchdog file documentation v2 Impact: improve documentation This patch updates the /proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog documentation. Updated: included Randy Dunlap's corrections. Signed-off-by: Aristeu Rozanski Acked-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 9 ++++++--- Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt | 5 +++++ 2 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index bcceb99b81d..86be879ed70 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1338,10 +1338,13 @@ nmi_watchdog Enables/Disables the NMI watchdog on x86 systems. When the value is non-zero the NMI watchdog is enabled and will continuously test all online cpus to -determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. +determine whether or not they are still functioning properly. Currently, +passing "nmi_watchdog=" parameter at boot time is required for this function +to work. -Because the NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile, by disabling the NMI -watchdog, oprofile may have more registers to utilize. +If LAPIC NMI watchdog method is in use (nmi_watchdog=2 kernel parameter), the +NMI watchdog shares registers with oprofile. By disabling the NMI watchdog, +oprofile may have more registers to utilize. msgmni ------ diff --git a/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt b/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt index 90aa4531cb6..bf9f80a9828 100644 --- a/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt +++ b/Documentation/nmi_watchdog.txt @@ -69,6 +69,11 @@ to the overall system performance. On x86 nmi_watchdog is disabled by default so you have to enable it with a boot time parameter. +It's possible to disable the NMI watchdog in run-time by writing "0" to +/proc/sys/kernel/nmi_watchdog. Writing "1" to the same file will re-enable +the NMI watchdog. Notice that you still need to use "nmi_watchdog=" parameter +at boot time. + NOTE: In kernels prior to 2.4.2-ac18 the NMI-oopser is enabled unconditionally on x86 SMP boxes. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6b1abbaefa31b84cc02bf4006ba8a63393de1136 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Adrian Bunk Date: Wed, 29 Oct 2008 14:22:15 -0700 Subject: The overdue eepro100 removal. Signed-off-by: Adrian Bunk Cc: Jeff Garzik Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 7 ------- 1 file changed, 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 05d71b4b943..6ecd4f0a24f 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -144,13 +144,6 @@ Who: Christoph Hellwig --------------------------- -What: eepro100 network driver -When: January 2007 -Why: replaced by the e100 driver -Who: Adrian Bunk - ---------------------------- - What: Unused EXPORT_SYMBOL/EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL exports (temporary transition config option provided until then) The transition config option will also be removed at the same time. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d003922dab6a66027344a787e9846ecf35a706a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Date: Thu, 9 Oct 2008 21:49:33 -0300 Subject: rfkill: add master_switch_mode and EPO lock to rfkill and rfkill-input Add of software-based sanity to rfkill and rfkill-input so that it can reproduce what hardware-based EPO switches do, blocking all transmitters and locking down any further attempts to unblock them until the switch is deactivated. rfkill-input is responsible for issuing the EPO control requests, like before. While an rfkill EPO is active, all transmitters are locked to one of the BLOCKED states and all attempts to change that through the rfkill API (userspace and kernel) will be either ignored or return -EPERM errors. The lock will be released upon receipt of EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL ON by rfkill-input, or should modular rfkill-input be unloaded. This makes rfkill and rfkill-input extend the operation of an existing wireless master kill switch to all wireless devices in the system, even those that are not under hardware or firmware control. Since the above is the expected operational behavior for the master rfkill switch, the EPO lock functionality is not optional. Also, extend rfkill-input to allow for three different behaviors when it receives an EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL ON input event. The user can set which behavior he wants through the master_switch_mode parameter: master_switch_mode = 0: EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL ON just unlocks rfkill controller state changes (so that the rfkill userspace and kernel APIs can now be used to change rfkill controller states again), but doesn't change any of their states (so they will all remain blocked). This is the safest mode of operation, as it requires explicit operator action to re-enable a transmitter. master_switch_mode = 1: EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL ON causes rfkill-input to attempt to restore the system to the state before the last EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL OFF event, or to the default global states if no EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL OFF ever happened. This is the recommended mode of operation for laptops. master_switch_mode = 2: tries to unblock all rfkill controllers (i.e. enable all transmitters) when an EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL ON event is received. This is the default mode of operation, as it mimics the previous behavior of rfkill-input. In order to implement these features in a clean way, the entire event handling of rfkill-input was refactored into a single worker function. Protection against input event DoS (repeatedly firing rfkill events for rfkill-input to process) was removed during the code refactoring. It will be added back in a future patch. Note that with these changes, rfkill-input doesn't need to explicitly handle any radio types for which KEY_ or SW_ events do not exist yet. Code to handle EV_SW SW_{WLAN,WWAN,BLUETOOTH,WIMAX,...} was added as it might be needed in the future (and its implementation is not that obvious), but is currently #ifdef'd out to avoid wasting resources. Signed-off-by: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh Cc: Ivo van Doorn Cc: Dmitry Torokhov Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/rfkill.txt | 20 +++++++++++++------- 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index b65f0799df4..4d3ee317a4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -191,12 +191,20 @@ Userspace input handlers (uevents) or kernel input handlers (rfkill-input): to tell the devices registered with the rfkill class to change their state (i.e. translates the input layer event into real action). + * rfkill-input implements EPO by handling EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 0 (power off all transmitters) in a special way: it ignores any overrides and local state cache and forces all transmitters to the RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED state (including those which are already - supposed to be BLOCKED). Note that the opposite event (power on all - transmitters) is handled normally. + supposed to be BLOCKED). + * rfkill EPO will remain active until rfkill-input receives an + EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 1 event. While the EPO is active, transmitters + are locked in the blocked state (rfkill will refuse to unblock them). + * rfkill-input implements different policies that the user can + select for handling EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 1. It will unlock rfkill, + and either do nothing (leave transmitters blocked, but now unlocked), + restore the transmitters to their state before the EPO, or unblock + them all. Userspace uevent handler or kernel platform-specific drivers hooked to the rfkill notifier chain: @@ -331,11 +339,9 @@ class to get a sysfs interface :-) correct event for your switch/button. These events are emergency power-off events when they are trying to turn the transmitters off. An example of an input device which SHOULD generate *_RFKILL_ALL events is the wireless-kill -switch in a laptop which is NOT a hotkey, but a real switch that kills radios -in hardware, even if the O.S. has gone to lunch. An example of an input device -which SHOULD NOT generate *_RFKILL_ALL events by default, is any sort of hot -key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific -(e.g. the one for WLAN). +switch in a laptop which is NOT a hotkey, but a real sliding/rocker switch. +An example of an input device which SHOULD NOT generate *_RFKILL_ALL events by +default, is any sort of hot key that is type-specific (e.g. the one for WLAN). 3.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5c7f9b7363bfd10e40cf1a28dfc9048417df7028 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tim Gardner Date: Tue, 14 Oct 2008 10:38:03 -0600 Subject: ipw2x00: change default policy for auto-associate Do not attempt association until directed to do so by a user space application. In particular, this avoids race conditions with NetworkManager association state. Signed-off-by: Tim Gardner Acked-by: Dan Williams Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 index 4f2a40f1dbc..80c728522c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 +++ b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ Where the supported parameter are: driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan for and associate to a network until it has been configured with one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring - the network SSID. Default is 1 (auto-associate) + the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate) Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0 -- cgit v1.2.3 From d2372b315289aec9f565a855023c40654a5bff68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Berg Date: Fri, 24 Oct 2008 20:32:20 +0200 Subject: wireless: make regdom passing semantics simpler The regdom struct is given to the core, so it might as well free it in error conditions. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt | 13 +++---------- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt index a96989a8ff3..357d4ba4f13 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt @@ -167,7 +167,6 @@ struct ieee80211_regdomain mydriver_jp_regdom = { Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: - int r; struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd; int size_of_regd; int num_rules = mydriver_jp_regdom.n_reg_rules; @@ -178,17 +177,11 @@ Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL); if (!rd) - return -ENOMEM; + return -ENOMEM; memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain)); - for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) { + for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); - } - r = regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); - if (r) { - kfree(rd); - return r; - } - + return regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); -- cgit v1.2.3 From be3d48106c1e5d075784e5e67928a6b5ffc0f3b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Johannes Berg Date: Fri, 24 Oct 2008 20:32:21 +0200 Subject: wireless: remove struct regdom hinting The code needs to be split out and cleaned up, so as a first step remove the capability, to add it back in a subsequent patch as a separate function. Also remove the publically facing return value of the function and the wiphy argument. A number of internal functions go from being generic helpers to just being used for alpha2 setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt | 11 +++++++---- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt index 357d4ba4f13..dcf31648414 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/regulatory.txt @@ -131,11 +131,13 @@ are expected to do this during initialization. r = zd_reg2alpha2(mac->regdomain, alpha2); if (!r) - regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2, NULL); + regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, alpha2); Example code - drivers providing a built in regulatory domain: -------------------------------------------------------------- +[NOTE: This API is not currently available, it can be added when required] + If you have regulatory information you can obtain from your driver and you *need* to use this we let you build a regulatory domain structure and pass it to the wireless core. To do this you should @@ -182,6 +184,7 @@ Then in some part of your code after your wiphy has been registered: memcpy(rd, &mydriver_jp_regdom, sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain)); for (i=0; i < num_rules; i++) - memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], - sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); - return regulatory_hint(hw->wiphy, NULL, rd); + memcpy(&rd->reg_rules[i], + &mydriver_jp_regdom.reg_rules[i], + sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule)); + regulatory_struct_hint(rd); -- cgit v1.2.3 From 395628ef4ea12ff0748099f145363b5e33c69acb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alok Kataria Date: Fri, 24 Oct 2008 17:22:01 -0700 Subject: x86: Skip verification by the watchdog for TSC clocksource. Impact: Changes timekeeping on Vmware (or with tsc=reliable). This is achieved by resetting the CLOCKSOURCE_MUST_VERIFY flag. We add a tsc=reliable commandline option to enable this. This enables legacy hardware without HPET, LAPIC, or ACPI timers to enter high-resolution timer mode. Along with that have extended this to be used in virtualization environement too. Now we also set this flag if the X86_FEATURE_TSC_RELIABLE bit is set. This is important since there is a wrap-around problem with the acpi_pm timer. The acpi_pm counter is just 24bits and this can overflow in ~4 seconds. With the NO_HZ kernels in virtualized environment, there can be situations when the guest is descheduled for longer duration, as a result we may miss the wrap of the acpi counter. When TSC is used as a clocksource and acpi_pm timer is being used as the watchdog clocksource this error in acpi_pm results in TSC being marked as unstable, and essentially results in time dropping in chunks of 4 seconds whenever this wrap is missed. Since the virtualized TSC is reliable on VMware, we should always use the TSCs clocksource on VMware, so we skip the verfication at runtime, by checking for the feature bit. Since we reset the flag for mgeode systems too, i have combined the mgeode case with the feature bit check. Signed-off-by: Jeff Hansen Signed-off-by: Alok N Kataria Signed-off-by: Dan Hecht Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1bbcaa8982b..dc6b06f67fc 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2267,6 +2267,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,,,,,,,, + tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC. + Format: + [x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this + disables clocksource verification at runtime. + Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older + hardware, and in virtualized environment. + turbografx.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY] TurboGraFX parallel port interface Format: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3f8b4b13785c2737413d3241c21c7c86a41535ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andy Gospodarek Date: Wed, 22 Oct 2008 11:19:48 +0000 Subject: bonding: update docs to correctly reflect arp_ip_target behavior This documentation patch hopes to clarify that the '+' was only needed for Fedora 7 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0 and 5.1. After that the IP addreses could be added as a comma separated list just like the module option. Signed-off-by: Andy Gospodarek Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/networking/bonding.txt | 16 +++++++++------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 688dfe1e6b7..d733a428eff 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -922,17 +922,19 @@ USERCTL=no NETMASK, NETWORK and BROADCAST) to match your network configuration. For later versions of initscripts, such as that found with Fedora -7 and Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 5 (or later), it is possible, and, -indeed, preferable, to specify the bonding options in the ifcfg-bond0 +7 (or later) and Red Hat Enterprise Linux version 5 (or later), it is possible, +and, indeed, preferable, to specify the bonding options in the ifcfg-bond0 file, e.g. a line of the format: -BONDING_OPTS="mode=active-backup arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.254" +BONDING_OPTS="mode=active-backup arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.1.254" will configure the bond with the specified options. The options specified in BONDING_OPTS are identical to the bonding module parameters -except for the arp_ip_target field. Each target should be included as a -separate option and should be preceded by a '+' to indicate it should be -added to the list of queried targets, e.g., +except for the arp_ip_target field when using versions of initscripts older +than and 8.57 (Fedora 8) and 8.45.19 (Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.2). When +using older versions each target should be included as a separate option and +should be preceded by a '+' to indicate it should be added to the list of +queried targets, e.g., arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.1 arp_ip_target=+192.168.1.2 @@ -940,7 +942,7 @@ added to the list of queried targets, e.g., options via BONDING_OPTS, it is not necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf. - For older versions of initscripts that do not support + For even older versions of initscripts that do not support BONDING_OPTS, it is necessary to edit /etc/modules.conf (or /etc/modprobe.conf, depending upon your distro) to load the bonding module with your desired options when the bond0 interface is brought up. The -- cgit v1.2.3 From d9e540762f5cdd89f24e518ad1fd31142d0b9726 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Peter Zijlstra Date: Sat, 1 Nov 2008 19:57:37 +0100 Subject: ftrace: ftrace_dump_on_oops=[tracer] Impact: add new (optional) debug boot option In order to facilitate early boot trouble, allow one to specify a tracer on the kernel boot line. Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra Acked-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1bbcaa8982b..4862284d311 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -765,6 +765,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file parameter will force ia64_sal_cache_flush to call ia64_pal_cache_flush instead of SAL_CACHE_FLUSH. + ftrace=[tracer] + [ftrace] will set and start the specified tracer + as early as possible in order to facilitate early + boot debugging. + + ftrace_dump_on_oops + [ftrace] will dump the trace buffers on oops. + gamecon.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY] Multisystem joystick and NES/SNES/PSX pad support via parallel port (up to 5 devices per port) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5b9a0e14eb4bf40a7cb780af4723560e06753f2d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Cyrill Gorcunov Date: Sat, 1 Nov 2008 18:06:51 +0300 Subject: x86: nmi - nmi_watchdog boot param docs cleanup Impact: documentation update 1) nmi_watchdog boot parameter is common to 32/64 bit modes. So move it from Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt to Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt and integrate with. 2) Also fix [panic] keyword placement -- it ought to be at first position otherwise it will not be recognized. 3) Document lapic and ioapic keywords. Signed-off-by: Cyrill Gorcunov Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 15 ++++++++++++++- Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt | 11 ----------- 2 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 343e0f0f84b..6246220ac91 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1403,7 +1403,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file when a NMI is triggered. Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] - nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32] Debugging features for SMP kernels + nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86-32,X86-64] Debugging features for SMP kernels + Format: [panic,][num] + Valid num: 0,1,2 + 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off + 1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog + 2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using + a performance counter. Note: This will use one performance + counter and the local APIC's performance vector. + When panic is specified panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. + This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box + quickly up again. + Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following + symbolic names: lapic and ioapic + Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic no387 [BUGS=X86-32] Tells the kernel to use the 387 maths emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 72ffb5373ec..bc8a339c1f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -79,17 +79,6 @@ Timing Report when timer interrupts are lost because some code turned off interrupts for too long. - nmi_watchdog=NUMBER[,panic] - NUMBER can be: - 0 don't use an NMI watchdog - 1 use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog - 2 use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using a performance counter. Note - This will use one performance counter and the local APIC's performance - vector. - When panic is specified panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. - This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box - quickly up again. - nohpet Don't use the HPET timer. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 26f5df265f06b8c8fe9f5d0942b7d8df00e5edec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Mon, 3 Nov 2008 17:39:46 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add ALC299 fujitsu preset model Added a preset model for FSC Amilo with ALC269 codec chip. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index e0e54a27fc1..fa8e9fadfaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -857,6 +857,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. quanta Quanta FL1 eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 + fujitsu FSC Amilo + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) ALC662/663 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8e1a4857cd92e32e642b3e7184c7f6bf85c96e2e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:53:06 -0500 Subject: Update Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt Fix paragraph with recommendations on how to tune ext4 for benchmarks. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 42 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 174eaff7ded..f75ab101c00 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -58,13 +58,22 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever - - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that - ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most. - So when comparing with a metadata-only journalling filesystem, such - as ext3, use `mount -o data=writeback'. And you might as well use - `mount -o nobh' too along with it. Making the journal larger than - the mke2fs default often helps performance with metadata-intensive - workloads. + - When comparing performance with other filesystems, it's always + important to try multiple workloads; very often a subtle change in a + workload parameter can completely change the ranking of which + filesystems do well compared to others. When comparing versus ext3, + note that ext4 enables write barriers by default, while ext3 does + not enable write barriers by default. So it is useful to use + explicitly specify whether barriers are enabled or not when via the + '-o barriers=[0|1]' mount option for both ext3 and ext4 filesystems + for a fair comparison. When tuning ext3 for best benchmark numbers, + it is often worthwhile to try changing the data journaling mode; '-o + data=writeback,nobh' can be faster for some workloads. (Note + however that running mounted with data=writeback can potentially + leave stale data exposed in recently written files in case of an + unclean shutdown, which could be a security exposure in some + situations.) Configuring the filesystem with a large journal can + also be helpful for metadata-intensive workloads. 2. Features =========== @@ -74,7 +83,7 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be * ability to use filesystems > 16TB (e2fsprogs support not available yet) * extent format reduces metadata overhead (RAM, IO for access, transactions) * extent format more robust in face of on-disk corruption due to magics, -* internal redunancy in tree +* internal redundancy in tree * improved file allocation (multi-block alloc) * fix 32000 subdirectory limit * nsec timestamps for mtime, atime, ctime, create time @@ -116,6 +125,12 @@ grouping of bitmaps and inode tables. Some test results available here: When mounting an ext4 filesystem, the following option are accepted: (*) == default +ro Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will + replay the journal (and thus write to the + partition) even when mounted "read only". The + mount options "ro,noload" can be used to prevent + writes to the filesystem. + extents (*) ext4 will use extents to address file data. The file system will no longer be mountable by ext3. @@ -144,7 +159,11 @@ journal_dev=devnum When the external journal device's major/minor numbers identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded in devnum. -noload Don't load the journal on mounting. +noload Don't load the journal on mounting. Note that + if the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly, + skipping the journal replay will lead to the + filesystem containing inconsistencies that can + lead to any number of problems. data=journal All data are committed into the journal prior to being written into the main file system. @@ -219,9 +238,12 @@ minixdf Make 'df' act like Minix. debug Extra debugging information is sent to syslog. -errors=remount-ro(*) Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. +errors=remount-ro Remount the filesystem read-only on an error. errors=continue Keep going on a filesystem error. errors=panic Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs. + (These mount options override the errors behavior + specified in the superblock, which can be configured + using tune2fs) data_err=ignore(*) Just print an error message if an error occurs in a file data buffer in ordered mode. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 30773840c19cea60dcef39545960d541b1ac1cf8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Sat, 3 Jan 2009 20:27:38 -0500 Subject: ext4: add fsync batch tuning knobs Add new mount options, min_batch_time and max_batch_time, which controls how long the jbd2 layer should wait for additional filesystem operations to get batched with a synchronous write transaction. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 29 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index f75ab101c00..e3fcbea3ec8 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -283,6 +283,35 @@ delalloc (*) Deferring block allocation until write-out time. nodelalloc Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation when data is copied from user to page cache. +max_batch_time=usec Maximum amount of time ext4 should wait for + additional filesystem operations to be batch + together with a synchronous write operation. + Since a synchronous write operation is going to + force a commit and then a wait for the I/O + complete, it doesn't cost much, and can be a + huge throughput win, we wait for a small amount + of time to see if any other transactions can + piggyback on the synchronous write. The + algorithm used is designed to automatically tune + for the speed of the disk, by measuring the + amount of time (on average) that it takes to + finish committing a transaction. Call this time + the "commit time". If the time that the + transactoin has been running is less than the + commit time, ext4 will try sleeping for the + commit time to see if other operations will join + the transaction. The commit time is capped by + the max_batch_time, which defaults to 15000us + (15ms). This optimization can be turned off + entirely by setting max_batch_time to 0. + +min_batch_time=usec This parameter sets the commit time (as + described above) to be at least min_batch_time. + It defaults to zero microseconds. Increasing + this parameter may improve the throughput of + multi-threaded, synchronous workloads on very + fast disks, at the cost of increasing latency. + Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 13c947444f4355293b49f83b809f178393a0a4d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 5 Nov 2008 08:06:08 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add ASUS V1Sn support Asus V1s series laptops have an ALC660VD with PCI id: 0x1043, 0x1633. 1.) remove the previous behaviour of mapping that to the ALC861VD_LENOVO device. 2.) add a new ALC660VD_V1S device based on ALC861VD_LENOVO, with an added digital out. Signed-off-by: Tristan Aston Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index fa8e9fadfaf..f6594549bf5 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -940,6 +940,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. lenovo Lenovo 3000 C200 dallas Dallas laptops hp HP TX1000 + asus-v1s ASUS V1Sn auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) CMI9880 -- cgit v1.2.3 From c238b4f4038e0e49bb241640610584a088b268b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 5 Nov 2008 14:57:20 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Split ALC268 acer model There are actually two variants of ALC268 Acer implementation, one with an analog built-in mic (pin 0x19) and another with a digital mic (pin 0x12). Created a new model, acer-dmic, for the latter case now. So far, all known models are assigned to be analog-mic, according to the BIOS setup. If this doesn't match with the actual case, one needs to try model=acer-dmic, and fix the entry to point ALC268_ACER_DMIC if it works. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index f6594549bf5..3ab5fb1357a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -844,6 +844,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 3stack 3-stack model toshiba Toshiba A205 acer Acer laptops + acer-dmic Acer laptops with digital-mic acer-aspire Acer Aspire One dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) zepto Zepto laptops -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1f29fae29709b4668979e244c09b2fa78ff1ad59 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Serge E. Hallyn" Date: Wed, 5 Nov 2008 16:08:52 -0600 Subject: file capabilities: add no_file_caps switch (v4) Add a no_file_caps boot option when file capabilities are compiled into the kernel (CONFIG_SECURITY_FILE_CAPABILITIES=y). This allows distributions to ship a kernel with file capabilities compiled in, without forcing users to use (and understand and trust) them. When no_file_caps is specified at boot, then when a process executes a file, any file capabilities stored with that file will not be used in the calculation of the process' new capability sets. This means that booting with the no_file_caps boot option will not be the same as booting a kernel with file capabilities compiled out - in particular a task with CAP_SETPCAP will not have any chance of passing capabilities to another task (which isn't "really" possible anyway, and which may soon by killed altogether by David Howells in any case), and it will instead be able to put new capabilities in its pI. However since fI will always be empty and pI is masked with fI, it gains the task nothing. We also support the extra prctl options, setting securebits and dropping capabilities from the per-process bounding set. The other remaining difference is that killpriv, task_setscheduler, setioprio, and setnice will continue to be hooked. That will be noticable in the case where a root task changed its uid while keeping some caps, and another task owned by the new uid tries to change settings for the more privileged task. Changelog: Nov 05 2008: (v4) trivial port on top of always-start-\ with-clear-caps patch Sep 23 2008: nixed file_caps_enabled when file caps are not compiled in as it isn't used. Document no_file_caps in kernel-parameters.txt. Signed-off-by: Serge Hallyn Acked-by: Andrew G. Morgan Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 1bbcaa8982b..784443acca9 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1459,6 +1459,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file instruction doesn't work correctly and not to use it. + no_file_caps Tells the kernel not to honor file capabilities. The + only way then for a file to be executed with privilege + is to be setuid root or executed by root. + nohalt [IA-64] Tells the kernel not to use the power saving function PAL_HALT_LIGHT when idle. This increases power-consumption. On the positive side, it reduces -- cgit v1.2.3 From 305d552accae6afb859c493ebc7d98ca3371dae2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Brian Haley Date: Tue, 4 Nov 2008 17:51:14 -0800 Subject: bonding: send IPv6 neighbor advertisement on failover This patch adds better IPv6 failover support for bonding devices, especially when in active-backup mode and there are only IPv6 addresses configured, as reported by Alex Sidorenko. - Creates a new file, net/drivers/bonding/bond_ipv6.c, for the IPv6-specific routines. Both regular bonds and VLANs over bonds are supported. - Adds a new tunable, num_unsol_na, to limit the number of unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements that are sent on a failover event. Default is 1. - Creates two new IPv6 neighbor discovery functions: ndisc_build_skb() ndisc_send_skb() These were required to support VLANs since we have to be able to add the VLAN id to the skb since ndisc_send_na() and friends shouldn't be asked to do this. These two routines are basically __ndisc_send() split into two pieces, in a slightly different order. - Updates Documentation/networking/bonding.txt and bumps the rev of bond support to 3.4.0. On failover, this new code will generate one packet: - An unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement, which helps the switch learn that the address has moved to the new slave. Testing has shown that sending just the NA results in pretty good behavior when in active-back mode, I saw no lost ping packets for example. Signed-off-by: Brian Haley Signed-off-by: Jay Vosburgh Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/networking/bonding.txt | 10 ++++++++++ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index d733a428eff..3f4d0fae708 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -551,6 +551,16 @@ num_grat_arp affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for bonding version 3.3.0. +num_unsol_na + + Specifies the number of unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements + to be issued after a failover event. One unsolicited NA is issued + immediately after the failover. + + The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option + affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for + bonding version 3.4.0. + primary A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the -- cgit v1.2.3 From fd989c83325cb34795bc4d4aa6b13c06f90eac99 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jay Vosburgh Date: Tue, 4 Nov 2008 17:51:16 -0800 Subject: bonding: alternate agg selection policies for 802.3ad This patch implements alternative aggregator selection policies for 802.3ad. The existing policy, now termed "stable," selects the active aggregator by greatest bandwidth, and only reselects a new aggregator if the active aggregator is entirely disabled (no more ports or all ports down). This patch adds two new policies: bandwidth and count, selecting the active aggregator by total bandwidth (like the stable policy) or by the number of ports in the aggregator, respectively. These two policies also differ from the stable policy in that they will reselect the active aggregator when availability-related changes occur in the bond (e.g., link state change). This permits "gang failover" within 802.3ad, allowing redundant aggregators along parallel paths to always maintain the "best" aggregator as the active aggregator (rather than having to wait for the active to entirely fail). This patch also updates the driver version to 3.5.0. Signed-off-by: Jay Vosburgh Signed-off-by: Jeff Garzik --- Documentation/networking/bonding.txt | 42 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 42 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 3f4d0fae708..5ede7473b42 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -194,6 +194,48 @@ or, for backwards compatibility, the option value. E.g., The parameters are as follows: +ad_select + + Specifies the 802.3ad aggregation selection logic to use. The + possible values and their effects are: + + stable or 0 + + The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate + bandwidth. + + Reselection of the active aggregator occurs only when all + slaves of the active aggregator are down or the active + aggregator has no slaves. + + This is the default value. + + bandwidth or 1 + + The active aggregator is chosen by largest aggregate + bandwidth. Reselection occurs if: + + - A slave is added to or removed from the bond + + - Any slave's link state changes + + - Any slave's 802.3ad association state changes + + - The bond's adminstrative state changes to up + + count or 2 + + The active aggregator is chosen by the largest number of + ports (slaves). Reselection occurs as described under the + "bandwidth" setting, above. + + The bandwidth and count selection policies permit failover of + 802.3ad aggregations when partial failure of the active aggregator + occurs. This keeps the aggregator with the highest availability + (either in bandwidth or in number of ports) active at all times. + + This option was added in bonding version 3.4.0. + arp_interval Specifies the ARP link monitoring frequency in milliseconds. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 90080bf4b803efbc9b9cd3a7ed1639f1e036238e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 4 Nov 2008 14:37:25 -0800 Subject: sched, documentation: update scheduler header file paths Impact: update documentation Update Documentation/scheduler/ files to reflect changed header files locations. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt index 941615a9769..d43dbcbd163 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-arch.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Context switch By default, the switch_to arch function is called with the runqueue locked. This is usually not a problem unless switch_to may need to take the runqueue lock. This is usually due to a wake up operation in -the context switch. See include/asm-ia64/system.h for an example. +the context switch. See arch/ia64/include/asm/system.h for an example. To request the scheduler call switch_to with the runqueue unlocked, you must `#define __ARCH_WANT_UNLOCKED_CTXSW` in a header file @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ disabled. Interrupts may be enabled over the call if it is likely to introduce a significant interrupt latency by adding the line `#define __ARCH_WANT_INTERRUPTS_ON_CTXSW` in the same place as for unlocked context switches. This define also implies -`__ARCH_WANT_UNLOCKED_CTXSW`. See include/asm-arm/system.h for an +`__ARCH_WANT_UNLOCKED_CTXSW`. See arch/arm/include/asm/system.h for an example. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 934352f214b3251eb0793c1209d346595a661d80 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bharata B Rao Date: Mon, 10 Nov 2008 20:41:13 +0530 Subject: sched: add hierarchical accounting to cpu accounting controller Impact: improve CPU time accounting of tasks under the cpu accounting controller Add hierarchical accounting to cpu accounting controller and include cpuacct documentation. Currently, while charging the task's cputime to its accounting group, the accounting group hierarchy isn't updated. This patch charges the cputime of a task to its accounting group and all its parent accounting groups. Reported-by: Srivatsa Vaddagiri Signed-off-by: Bharata B Rao Reviewed-by: Paul Menage Acked-by: Balbir Singh Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt | 32 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt b/Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bb775fbe43d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +CPU Accounting Controller +------------------------- + +The CPU accounting controller is used to group tasks using cgroups and +account the CPU usage of these groups of tasks. + +The CPU accounting controller supports multi-hierarchy groups. An accounting +group accumulates the CPU usage of all of its child groups and the tasks +directly present in its group. + +Accounting groups can be created by first mounting the cgroup filesystem. + +# mkdir /cgroups +# mount -t cgroup -ocpuacct none /cgroups + +With the above step, the initial or the parent accounting group +becomes visible at /cgroups. At bootup, this group includes all the +tasks in the system. /cgroups/tasks lists the tasks in this cgroup. +/cgroups/cpuacct.usage gives the CPU time (in nanoseconds) obtained by +this group which is essentially the CPU time obtained by all the tasks +in the system. + +New accounting groups can be created under the parent group /cgroups. + +# cd /cgroups +# mkdir g1 +# echo $$ > g1 + +The above steps create a new group g1 and move the current shell +process (bash) into it. CPU time consumed by this bash and its children +can be obtained from g1/cpuacct.usage and the same is accumulated in +/cgroups/cpuacct.usage also. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a4c52791fa8c73e3cffe4a82865edb41e8fe8c3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jiri Slaby Date: Sat, 8 Nov 2008 11:24:57 +0100 Subject: x86, 64-bit: update address space documentation Impact: documentation update Commit a6523748bddd38bcec11431f57502090b6014a96 (paravirt/x86, 64-bit: move __PAGE_OFFSET to leave a space for hypervisor) changed address space without changing the documentation. Change it according to the code change -- direct mapping start: ffff810000000000 => ffff880000000000 which gives 57 TiB, something between 45 and 46 bits. Signed-off-by: Jiri Slaby Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt index efce7509736..29b52b14d0b 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Virtual memory map with 4 level page tables: 0000000000000000 - 00007fffffffffff (=47 bits) user space, different per mm hole caused by [48:63] sign extension ffff800000000000 - ffff80ffffffffff (=40 bits) guard hole -ffff810000000000 - ffffc0ffffffffff (=46 bits) direct mapping of all phys. memory +ffff880000000000 - ffffc0ffffffffff (=57 TB) direct mapping of all phys. memory ffffc10000000000 - ffffc1ffffffffff (=40 bits) hole ffffc20000000000 - ffffe1ffffffffff (=45 bits) vmalloc/ioremap space ffffe20000000000 - ffffe2ffffffffff (=40 bits) virtual memory map (1TB) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9ee670fd87b7d69c8633b94c42aadcbbcb96f28e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KOSAKI Motohiro Date: Tue, 11 Nov 2008 11:49:01 +0900 Subject: x86/doc: spelling fix for grub Impact: documentation fix I met okuji-san (GRUB maintainer) yesterday. He said GRuB isn't correct spelled and he want to fix it. Signed-off-by: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 83c0033ee9e..804d9b1a46e 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ Protocol: 2.00+ 3 SYSLINUX 4 EtherBoot 5 ELILO - 7 GRuB + 7 GRUB 8 U-BOOT 9 Xen A Gujin -- cgit v1.2.3 From d90ebcbfa7f5a8b4e20518c9f94c5c4e4cd3c2e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Wed, 12 Nov 2008 00:47:26 -0800 Subject: dccp: Query supported CCIDs This provides a data structure to record which CCIDs are locally supported and three accessor functions: - a test function for internal use which is used to validate CCID requests made by the user; - a copy function so that the list can be used for feature-negotiation; - documented getsockopt() support so that the user can query capabilities. The data structure is a table which is filled in at compile-time with the list of available CCIDs (which in turn depends on the Kconfig choices). Using the copy function for cloning the list of supported CCIDs is useful for feature negotiation, since the negotiation is now with the full list of available CCIDs (e.g. {2, 3}) instead of the default value {2}. This means negotiation will not fail if the peer requests to use CCID3 instead of CCID2. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 39131a3c78f..f0aeb20fa63 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -57,6 +57,10 @@ can be set before calling bind(). DCCP_SOCKOPT_GET_CUR_MPS is read-only and retrieves the current maximum packet size (application payload size) in bytes, see RFC 4340, section 14. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs +supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). +The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.2.3 From a94c80e78bc9f4493ffc25a02d5d7bcd93c399d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Rostedt Date: Wed, 12 Nov 2008 17:52:36 -0500 Subject: ftrace: rename trace_entries to buffer_size_kb Impact: rename of debugfs file trace_entries to buffer_size_kb The original ftrace had fixed size entries, and the number of entries was shown and modified via the file called trace_entries. By converting to the unified trace buffer, we now allow for variable size entries which makes the meaning of trace_entries pointless. Since trace_size might be confused to the size of the trace, this patch names it "buffer_size_kb" (thanks to Arjan van de Ven for this idea). [ mingo@elte.hu: changed from buffer_size to buffer_size_kb ] ( Note, the units are still bytes - the next patch changes that, to keep the wide rename patch separate from the unit-change patch. ) Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index 9cc4d685dde..a1b58777839 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: only be recorded if the latency is greater than the value in this file. (in microseconds) - trace_entries: This sets or displays the number of bytes each CPU + buffer_size_kb: This sets or displays the number of bytes each CPU buffer can hold. The tracer buffers are the same size for each CPU. The displayed number is the size of the CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The @@ -1299,13 +1299,13 @@ trace entries ------------- Having too much or not enough data can be troublesome in diagnosing -an issue in the kernel. The file trace_entries is used to modify +an issue in the kernel. The file buffer_size_kb is used to modify the size of the internal trace buffers. The number listed is the number of entries that can be recorded per CPU. To know the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUS with the number of entries. - # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries + # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb 65620 Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that, @@ -1313,8 +1313,8 @@ echo "nop" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set to "nop", an EINVAL error will be returned. # echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer - # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries - # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries + # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb + # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb 100045 @@ -1323,8 +1323,8 @@ are held in individual pages. It allocates the number of pages it takes to fulfill the request. If more entries may fit on the last page then they will be added. - # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries - # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries + # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb + # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb 85 This shows us that 85 entries can fit in a single page. @@ -1332,8 +1332,8 @@ This shows us that 85 entries can fit in a single page. The number of pages which will be allocated is limited to a percentage of available memory. Allocating too much will produce an error. - # echo 1000000000000 > /debug/tracing/trace_entries + # echo 1000000000000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb -bash: echo: write error: Cannot allocate memory - # cat /debug/tracing/trace_entries + # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb 85 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1696b2b0f44a8d42f3e6b1ea90c21790871c04d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Rostedt Date: Thu, 13 Nov 2008 00:09:35 -0500 Subject: ftrace: show buffer size in kilobytes Impact: change the units of buffer_size_kb to kilobytes This patch changes the units of the buffer_size_kb file to kilobytes. Reading and writing to the file uses kilobytes as units. To help users to know what units are used, the output of the file now looks like: # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb 1408 Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 22 +++++----------------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index a1b58777839..6d3fe4cdf92 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: only be recorded if the latency is greater than the value in this file. (in microseconds) - buffer_size_kb: This sets or displays the number of bytes each CPU + buffer_size_kb: This sets or displays the number of kilobytes each CPU buffer can hold. The tracer buffers are the same size for each CPU. The displayed number is the size of the - CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The + CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size). If the last page allocated has room for more bytes @@ -1306,28 +1306,16 @@ the full size, multiply the number of possible CPUS with the number of entries. # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb -65620 +1408 (units kilobytes) Note, to modify this, you must have tracing completely disabled. To do that, echo "nop" into the current_tracer. If the current_tracer is not set to "nop", an EINVAL error will be returned. # echo nop > /debug/tracing/current_tracer - # echo 100000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb + # echo 10000 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb -100045 - - -Notice that we echoed in 100,000 but the size is 100,045. The entries -are held in individual pages. It allocates the number of pages it takes -to fulfill the request. If more entries may fit on the last page -then they will be added. - - # echo 1 > /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb - # cat /debug/tracing/buffer_size_kb -85 - -This shows us that 85 entries can fit in a single page. +10000 (units kilobytes) The number of pages which will be allocated is limited to a percentage of available memory. Allocating too much will produce an error. -- cgit v1.2.3 From ee6bce52276c0717ed3e63296e5d9465d339e923 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Rostedt Date: Wed, 12 Nov 2008 17:52:37 -0500 Subject: ftrace: rename iter_ctrl to trace_options Impact: rename file /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl to /debug/tracing/trace_options The original ftrace had a file called "iter_ctrl" that would control the way the output was iterated. But this file grew into a catch all for different trace options. This patch renames the file from iter_ctrl to trace_options to reflect this change. Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index 6d3fe4cdf92..753f4de4b17 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: tracer is not adding more data, they will display the same information every time they are read. - iter_ctrl: This file lets the user control the amount of data + trace_options: This file lets the user control the amount of data that is displayed in one of the above output files. @@ -316,23 +316,23 @@ The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers. The rest is the same as the 'trace' file. -iter_ctrl ---------- +trace_options +------------- -The iter_ctrl file is used to control what gets printed in the trace +The trace_options file is used to control what gets printed in the trace output. To see what is available, simply cat the file: - cat /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl + cat /debug/tracing/trace_options print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \ noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with "no". - echo noprint-parent > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl + echo noprint-parent > /debug/tracing/trace_options To enable an option, leave off the "no". - echo sym-offset > /debug/tracing/iter_ctrl + echo sym-offset > /debug/tracing/trace_options Here are the available options: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 98870ab0a5a3f1822aee681d2997017e1c87d026 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Howells Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 10:39:26 +1100 Subject: CRED: Documentation Document credentials and the new credentials API. Signed-off-by: David Howells Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/credentials.txt | 582 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 582 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/credentials.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/credentials.txt b/Documentation/credentials.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..df03169782e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/credentials.txt @@ -0,0 +1,582 @@ + ==================== + CREDENTIALS IN LINUX + ==================== + +By: David Howells + +Contents: + + (*) Overview. + + (*) Types of credentials. + + (*) File markings. + + (*) Task credentials. + + - Immutable credentials. + - Accessing task credentials. + - Accessing another task's credentials. + - Altering credentials. + - Managing credentials. + + (*) Open file credentials. + + (*) Overriding the VFS's use of credentials. + + +======== +OVERVIEW +======== + +There are several parts to the security check performed by Linux when one +object acts upon another: + + (1) Objects. + + Objects are things in the system that may be acted upon directly by + userspace programs. Linux has a variety of actionable objects, including: + + - Tasks + - Files/inodes + - Sockets + - Message queues + - Shared memory segments + - Semaphores + - Keys + + As a part of the description of all these objects there is a set of + credentials. What's in the set depends on the type of object. + + (2) Object ownership. + + Amongst the credentials of most objects, there will be a subset that + indicates the ownership of that object. This is used for resource + accounting and limitation (disk quotas and task rlimits for example). + + In a standard UNIX filesystem, for instance, this will be defined by the + UID marked on the inode. + + (3) The objective context. + + Also amongst the credentials of those objects, there will be a subset that + indicates the 'objective context' of that object. This may or may not be + the same set as in (2) - in standard UNIX files, for instance, this is the + defined by the UID and the GID marked on the inode. + + The objective context is used as part of the security calculation that is + carried out when an object is acted upon. + + (4) Subjects. + + A subject is an object that is acting upon another object. + + Most of the objects in the system are inactive: they don't act on other + objects within the system. Processes/tasks are the obvious exception: + they do stuff; they access and manipulate things. + + Objects other than tasks may under some circumstances also be subjects. + For instance an open file may send SIGIO to a task using the UID and EUID + given to it by a task that called fcntl(F_SETOWN) upon it. In this case, + the file struct will have a subjective context too. + + (5) The subjective context. + + A subject has an additional interpretation of its credentials. A subset + of its credentials forms the 'subjective context'. The subjective context + is used as part of the security calculation that is carried out when a + subject acts. + + A Linux task, for example, has the FSUID, FSGID and the supplementary + group list for when it is acting upon a file - which are quite separate + from the real UID and GID that normally form the objective context of the + task. + + (6) Actions. + + Linux has a number of actions available that a subject may perform upon an + object. The set of actions available depends on the nature of the subject + and the object. + + Actions include reading, writing, creating and deleting files; forking or + signalling and tracing tasks. + + (7) Rules, access control lists and security calculations. + + When a subject acts upon an object, a security calculation is made. This + involves taking the subjective context, the objective context and the + action, and searching one or more sets of rules to see whether the subject + is granted or denied permission to act in the desired manner on the + object, given those contexts. + + There are two main sources of rules: + + (a) Discretionary access control (DAC): + + Sometimes the object will include sets of rules as part of its + description. This is an 'Access Control List' or 'ACL'. A Linux + file may supply more than one ACL. + + A traditional UNIX file, for example, includes a permissions mask that + is an abbreviated ACL with three fixed classes of subject ('user', + 'group' and 'other'), each of which may be granted certain privileges + ('read', 'write' and 'execute' - whatever those map to for the object + in question). UNIX file permissions do not allow the arbitrary + specification of subjects, however, and so are of limited use. + + A Linux file might also sport a POSIX ACL. This is a list of rules + that grants various permissions to arbitrary subjects. + + (b) Mandatory access control (MAC): + + The system as a whole may have one or more sets of rules that get + applied to all subjects and objects, regardless of their source. + SELinux and Smack are examples of this. + + In the case of SELinux and Smack, each object is given a label as part + of its credentials. When an action is requested, they take the + subject label, the object label and the action and look for a rule + that says that this action is either granted or denied. + + +==================== +TYPES OF CREDENTIALS +==================== + +The Linux kernel supports the following types of credentials: + + (1) Traditional UNIX credentials. + + Real User ID + Real Group ID + + The UID and GID are carried by most, if not all, Linux objects, even if in + some cases it has to be invented (FAT or CIFS files for example, which are + derived from Windows). These (mostly) define the objective context of + that object, with tasks being slightly different in some cases. + + Effective, Saved and FS User ID + Effective, Saved and FS Group ID + Supplementary groups + + These are additional credentials used by tasks only. Usually, an + EUID/EGID/GROUPS will be used as the subjective context, and real UID/GID + will be used as the objective. For tasks, it should be noted that this is + not always true. + + (2) Capabilities. + + Set of permitted capabilities + Set of inheritable capabilities + Set of effective capabilities + Capability bounding set + + These are only carried by tasks. They indicate superior capabilities + granted piecemeal to a task that an ordinary task wouldn't otherwise have. + These are manipulated implicitly by changes to the traditional UNIX + credentials, but can also be manipulated directly by the capset() system + call. + + The permitted capabilities are those caps that the process might grant + itself to its effective or permitted sets through capset(). This + inheritable set might also be so constrained. + + The effective capabilities are the ones that a task is actually allowed to + make use of itself. + + The inheritable capabilities are the ones that may get passed across + execve(). + + The bounding set limits the capabilities that may be inherited across + execve(), especially when a binary is executed that will execute as UID 0. + + (3) Secure management flags (securebits). + + These are only carried by tasks. These govern the way the above + credentials are manipulated and inherited over certain operations such as + execve(). They aren't used directly as objective or subjective + credentials. + + (4) Keys and keyrings. + + These are only carried by tasks. They carry and cache security tokens + that don't fit into the other standard UNIX credentials. They are for + making such things as network filesystem keys available to the file + accesses performed by processes, without the necessity of ordinary + programs having to know about security details involved. + + Keyrings are a special type of key. They carry sets of other keys and can + be searched for the desired key. Each process may subscribe to a number + of keyrings: + + Per-thread keying + Per-process keyring + Per-session keyring + + When a process accesses a key, if not already present, it will normally be + cached on one of these keyrings for future accesses to find. + + For more information on using keys, see Documentation/keys.txt. + + (5) LSM + + The Linux Security Module allows extra controls to be placed over the + operations that a task may do. Currently Linux supports two main + alternate LSM options: SELinux and Smack. + + Both work by labelling the objects in a system and then applying sets of + rules (policies) that say what operations a task with one label may do to + an object with another label. + + (6) AF_KEY + + This is a socket-based approach to credential management for networking + stacks [RFC 2367]. It isn't discussed by this document as it doesn't + interact directly with task and file credentials; rather it keeps system + level credentials. + + +When a file is opened, part of the opening task's subjective context is +recorded in the file struct created. This allows operations using that file +struct to use those credentials instead of the subjective context of the task +that issued the operation. An example of this would be a file opened on a +network filesystem where the credentials of the opened file should be presented +to the server, regardless of who is actually doing a read or a write upon it. + + +============= +FILE MARKINGS +============= + +Files on disk or obtained over the network may have annotations that form the +objective security context of that file. Depending on the type of filesystem, +this may include one or more of the following: + + (*) UNIX UID, GID, mode; + + (*) Windows user ID; + + (*) Access control list; + + (*) LSM security label; + + (*) UNIX exec privilege escalation bits (SUID/SGID); + + (*) File capabilities exec privilege escalation bits. + +These are compared to the task's subjective security context, and certain +operations allowed or disallowed as a result. In the case of execve(), the +privilege escalation bits come into play, and may allow the resulting process +extra privileges, based on the annotations on the executable file. + + +================ +TASK CREDENTIALS +================ + +In Linux, all of a task's credentials are held in (uid, gid) or through +(groups, keys, LSM security) a refcounted structure of type 'struct cred'. +Each task points to its credentials by a pointer called 'cred' in its +task_struct. + +Once a set of credentials has been prepared and committed, it may not be +changed, barring the following exceptions: + + (1) its reference count may be changed; + + (2) the reference count on the group_info struct it points to may be changed; + + (3) the reference count on the security data it points to may be changed; + + (4) the reference count on any keyrings it points to may be changed; + + (5) any keyrings it points to may be revoked, expired or have their security + attributes changed; and + + (6) the contents of any keyrings to which it points may be changed (the whole + point of keyrings being a shared set of credentials, modifiable by anyone + with appropriate access). + +To alter anything in the cred struct, the copy-and-replace principle must be +adhered to. First take a copy, then alter the copy and then use RCU to change +the task pointer to make it point to the new copy. There are wrappers to aid +with this (see below). + +A task may only alter its _own_ credentials; it is no longer permitted for a +task to alter another's credentials. This means the capset() system call is no +longer permitted to take any PID other than the one of the current process. +Also keyctl_instantiate() and keyctl_negate() functions no longer permit +attachment to process-specific keyrings in the requesting process as the +instantiating process may need to create them. + + +IMMUTABLE CREDENTIALS +--------------------- + +Once a set of credentials has been made public (by calling commit_creds() for +example), it must be considered immutable, barring two exceptions: + + (1) The reference count may be altered. + + (2) Whilst the keyring subscriptions of a set of credentials may not be + changed, the keyrings subscribed to may have their contents altered. + +To catch accidental credential alteration at compile time, struct task_struct +has _const_ pointers to its credential sets, as does struct file. Furthermore, +certain functions such as get_cred() and put_cred() operate on const pointers, +thus rendering casts unnecessary, but require to temporarily ditch the const +qualification to be able to alter the reference count. + + +ACCESSING TASK CREDENTIALS +-------------------------- + +A task being able to alter only its own credentials permits the current process +to read or replace its own credentials without the need for any form of locking +- which simplifies things greatly. It can just call: + + const struct cred *current_cred() + +to get a pointer to its credentials structure, and it doesn't have to release +it afterwards. + +There are convenience wrappers for retrieving specific aspects of a task's +credentials (the value is simply returned in each case): + + uid_t current_uid(void) Current's real UID + gid_t current_gid(void) Current's real GID + uid_t current_euid(void) Current's effective UID + gid_t current_egid(void) Current's effective GID + uid_t current_fsuid(void) Current's file access UID + gid_t current_fsgid(void) Current's file access GID + kernel_cap_t current_cap(void) Current's effective capabilities + void *current_security(void) Current's LSM security pointer + struct user_struct *current_user(void) Current's user account + +There are also convenience wrappers for retrieving specific associated pairs of +a task's credentials: + + void current_uid_gid(uid_t *, gid_t *); + void current_euid_egid(uid_t *, gid_t *); + void current_fsuid_fsgid(uid_t *, gid_t *); + +which return these pairs of values through their arguments after retrieving +them from the current task's credentials. + + +In addition, there is a function for obtaining a reference on the current +process's current set of credentials: + + const struct cred *get_current_cred(void); + +and functions for getting references to one of the credentials that don't +actually live in struct cred: + + struct user_struct *get_current_user(void); + struct group_info *get_current_groups(void); + +which get references to the current process's user accounting structure and +supplementary groups list respectively. + +Once a reference has been obtained, it must be released with put_cred(), +free_uid() or put_group_info() as appropriate. + + +ACCESSING ANOTHER TASK'S CREDENTIALS +------------------------------------ + +Whilst a task may access its own credentials without the need for locking, the +same is not true of a task wanting to access another task's credentials. It +must use the RCU read lock and rcu_dereference(). + +The rcu_dereference() is wrapped by: + + const struct cred *__task_cred(struct task_struct *task); + +This should be used inside the RCU read lock, as in the following example: + + void foo(struct task_struct *t, struct foo_data *f) + { + const struct cred *tcred; + ... + rcu_read_lock(); + tcred = __task_cred(t); + f->uid = tcred->uid; + f->gid = tcred->gid; + f->groups = get_group_info(tcred->groups); + rcu_read_unlock(); + ... + } + +A function need not get RCU read lock to use __task_cred() if it is holding a +spinlock at the time as this implicitly holds the RCU read lock. + +Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of +time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a +reference on them using: + + const struct cred *get_task_cred(struct task_struct *task); + +This does all the RCU magic inside of it. The caller must call put_cred() on +the credentials so obtained when they're finished with. + +There are a couple of convenience functions to access bits of another task's +credentials, hiding the RCU magic from the caller: + + uid_t task_uid(task) Task's real UID + uid_t task_euid(task) Task's effective UID + +If the caller is holding a spinlock or the RCU read lock at the time anyway, +then: + + __task_cred(task)->uid + __task_cred(task)->euid + +should be used instead. Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials +need to be accessed, RCU read lock or a spinlock should be used, __task_cred() +called, the result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential +aspects called from that before dropping the lock. This prevents the +potentially expensive RCU magic from being invoked multiple times. + +Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be +accessed, then this can be used: + + task_cred_xxx(task, member) + +where 'member' is a non-pointer member of the cred struct. For instance: + + uid_t task_cred_xxx(task, suid); + +will retrieve 'struct cred::suid' from the task, doing the appropriate RCU +magic. This may not be used for pointer members as what they point to may +disappear the moment the RCU read lock is dropped. + + +ALTERING CREDENTIALS +-------------------- + +As previously mentioned, a task may only alter its own credentials, and may not +alter those of another task. This means that it doesn't need to use any +locking to alter its own credentials. + +To alter the current process's credentials, a function should first prepare a +new set of credentials by calling: + + struct cred *prepare_creds(void); + +this locks current->cred_replace_mutex and then allocates and constructs a +duplicate of the current process's credentials, returning with the mutex still +held if successful. It returns NULL if not successful (out of memory). + +The mutex prevents ptrace() from altering the ptrace state of a process whilst +security checks on credentials construction and changing is taking place as +the ptrace state may alter the outcome, particularly in the case of execve(). + +The new credentials set should be altered appropriately, and any security +checks and hooks done. Both the current and the proposed sets of credentials +are available for this purpose as current_cred() will return the current set +still at this point. + + +When the credential set is ready, it should be committed to the current process +by calling: + + int commit_creds(struct cred *new); + +This will alter various aspects of the credentials and the process, giving the +LSM a chance to do likewise, then it will use rcu_assign_pointer() to actually +commit the new credentials to current->cred, it will release +current->cred_replace_mutex to allow ptrace() to take place, and it will notify +the scheduler and others of the changes. + +This function is guaranteed to return 0, so that it can be tail-called at the +end of such functions as sys_setresuid(). + +Note that this function consumes the caller's reference to the new credentials. +The caller should _not_ call put_cred() on the new credentials afterwards. + +Furthermore, once this function has been called on a new set of credentials, +those credentials may _not_ be changed further. + + +Should the security checks fail or some other error occur after prepare_creds() +has been called, then the following function should be invoked: + + void abort_creds(struct cred *new); + +This releases the lock on current->cred_replace_mutex that prepare_creds() got +and then releases the new credentials. + + +A typical credentials alteration function would look something like this: + + int alter_suid(uid_t suid) + { + struct cred *new; + int ret; + + new = prepare_creds(); + if (!new) + return -ENOMEM; + + new->suid = suid; + ret = security_alter_suid(new); + if (ret < 0) { + abort_creds(new); + return ret; + } + + return commit_creds(new); + } + + +MANAGING CREDENTIALS +-------------------- + +There are some functions to help manage credentials: + + (*) void put_cred(const struct cred *cred); + + This releases a reference to the given set of credentials. If the + reference count reaches zero, the credentials will be scheduled for + destruction by the RCU system. + + (*) const struct cred *get_cred(const struct cred *cred); + + This gets a reference on a live set of credentials, returning a pointer to + that set of credentials. + + (*) struct cred *get_new_cred(struct cred *cred); + + This gets a reference on a set of credentials that is under construction + and is thus still mutable, returning a pointer to that set of credentials. + + +===================== +OPEN FILE CREDENTIALS +===================== + +When a new file is opened, a reference is obtained on the opening task's +credentials and this is attached to the file struct as 'f_cred' in place of +'f_uid' and 'f_gid'. Code that used to access file->f_uid and file->f_gid +should now access file->f_cred->fsuid and file->f_cred->fsgid. + +It is safe to access f_cred without the use of RCU or locking because the +pointer will not change over the lifetime of the file struct, and nor will the +contents of the cred struct pointed to, barring the exceptions listed above +(see the Task Credentials section). + + +======================================= +OVERRIDING THE VFS'S USE OF CREDENTIALS +======================================= + +Under some circumstances it is desirable to override the credentials used by +the VFS, and that can be done by calling into such as vfs_mkdir() with a +different set of credentials. This is done in the following places: + + (*) sys_faccessat(). + + (*) do_coredump(). + + (*) nfs4recover.c. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a0bca6a59ebc052751eed6e3b182c153495672d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mathieu Desnoyers Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 17:47:40 -0500 Subject: markers: create DEFINE_MARKER and GET_MARKER (new API) Impact: new API. Allow markers to be used only for declaration, without function call associated. Useful to create specialized probes. The problem we had is that two function calls were required when one wanted to put a marker in a tracepoint probe. Now the marker can be used simply for trace data type declaration, leaving the trace write work within the tracepoint probe without any additional function call. Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/markers.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/markers.txt b/Documentation/markers.txt index 089f6138fcd..6d275e4ef38 100644 --- a/Documentation/markers.txt +++ b/Documentation/markers.txt @@ -70,6 +70,20 @@ a printk warning which identifies the inconsistency: "Format mismatch for probe probe_name (format), marker (format)" +Another way to use markers is to simply define the marker without generating any +function call to actually call into the marker. This is useful in combination +with tracepoint probes in a scheme like this : + +void probe_tracepoint_name(unsigned int arg1, struct task_struct *tsk); + +DEFINE_MARKER_TP(marker_eventname, tracepoint_name, probe_tracepoint_name, + "arg1 %u pid %d"); + +notrace void probe_tracepoint_name(unsigned int arg1, struct task_struct *tsk) +{ + struct marker *marker = &GET_MARKER(kernel_irq_entry); + /* write data to trace buffers ... */ +} * Probe / marker example -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7e066fb870fcd1025ec3ba7bbde5d541094f4ce1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mathieu Desnoyers Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 17:47:47 -0500 Subject: tracepoints: add DECLARE_TRACE() and DEFINE_TRACE() Impact: API *CHANGE*. Must update all tracepoint users. Add DEFINE_TRACE() to tracepoints to let them declare the tracepoint structure in a single spot for all the kernel. It helps reducing memory consumption, especially when declaring a lot of tracepoints, e.g. for kmalloc tracing. *API CHANGE WARNING*: now, DECLARE_TRACE() must be used in headers for tracepoint declarations rather than DEFINE_TRACE(). This is the sane way to do it. The name previously used was misleading. Updates scheduler instrumentation to follow this API change. Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/tracepoints.txt | 7 ++++++- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt index 5d354e16749..e8ad47b437f 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ In include/trace/subsys.h : #include -DEFINE_TRACE(subsys_eventname, +DECLARE_TRACE(subsys_eventname, TPPTOTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p), TPARGS(firstarg, p)); @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ In subsys/file.c (where the tracing statement must be added) : #include +DEFINE_TRACE(subsys_eventname); + void somefct(void) { ... @@ -86,6 +88,9 @@ to limit collisions. Tracepoint names are global to the kernel: they are considered as being the same whether they are in the core kernel image or in modules. +If the tracepoint has to be used in kernel modules, an +EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL_GPL() or EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL() can be used to +export the defined tracepoints. * Probe / tracepoint example -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8fd88d159031bd238dad1d7186a2030b9f9349de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mathieu Desnoyers Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 17:47:48 -0500 Subject: tracepoints: documentation fix for teardown Impact: documentation update Need a tracepoint_synchronize_unregister() before the end of exit() to make sure every probe callers have exited the non preemptible section and thus are not executing the probe code anymore. Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/tracepoints.txt | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt index e8ad47b437f..93cd90e89cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt @@ -70,10 +70,12 @@ Where : Connecting a function (probe) to a tracepoint is done by providing a probe (function to call) for the specific tracepoint through register_trace_subsys_eventname(). Removing a probe is done through -unregister_trace_subsys_eventname(); it will remove the probe sure there is no -caller left using the probe when it returns. Probe removal is preempt-safe -because preemption is disabled around the probe call. See the "Probe example" -section below for a sample probe module. +unregister_trace_subsys_eventname(); it will remove the probe. +marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit +function to make sure there is no caller left using the probe. This, and the +fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure that probe +removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section below for a +sample probe module. The tracepoint mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the same tracepoint, but a single definition must be made of a given tracepoint name over -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0dcf8fe5fe5d7279f1c479fa82f1f1ca6f22e814 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mathieu Desnoyers Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 17:47:49 -0500 Subject: tracepoints, docs: marker_synchronize_unregister->tracepoint_synchronize_unregister Impact: documentation update. Signed-off-by: Zhaolei Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/tracepoints.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt index 93cd90e89cc..3a1c74384ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Connecting a function (probe) to a tracepoint is done by providing a probe (function to call) for the specific tracepoint through register_trace_subsys_eventname(). Removing a probe is done through unregister_trace_subsys_eventname(); it will remove the probe. -marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit +tracepoint_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit function to make sure there is no caller left using the probe. This, and the fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure that probe removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section below for a -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0a7ad64531713e33e39af95bdbfb172f4f328b1e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ingo Molnar Date: Sun, 16 Nov 2008 08:54:36 +0100 Subject: tracepoints: format documentation Impact: documentation update Properly format Documentation/tracepoints.txt - it was full of overlong lines and other typographical problems. Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/tracepoints.txt | 87 +++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 47 insertions(+), 40 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt index 3a1c74384ff..2d42241a25c 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt @@ -3,28 +3,30 @@ Mathieu Desnoyers -This document introduces Linux Kernel Tracepoints and their use. It provides -examples of how to insert tracepoints in the kernel and connect probe functions -to them and provides some examples of probe functions. +This document introduces Linux Kernel Tracepoints and their use. It +provides examples of how to insert tracepoints in the kernel and +connect probe functions to them and provides some examples of probe +functions. * Purpose of tracepoints -A tracepoint placed in code provides a hook to call a function (probe) that you -can provide at runtime. A tracepoint can be "on" (a probe is connected to it) or -"off" (no probe is attached). When a tracepoint is "off" it has no effect, -except for adding a tiny time penalty (checking a condition for a branch) and -space penalty (adding a few bytes for the function call at the end of the -instrumented function and adds a data structure in a separate section). When a -tracepoint is "on", the function you provide is called each time the tracepoint -is executed, in the execution context of the caller. When the function provided -ends its execution, it returns to the caller (continuing from the tracepoint -site). +A tracepoint placed in code provides a hook to call a function (probe) +that you can provide at runtime. A tracepoint can be "on" (a probe is +connected to it) or "off" (no probe is attached). When a tracepoint is +"off" it has no effect, except for adding a tiny time penalty +(checking a condition for a branch) and space penalty (adding a few +bytes for the function call at the end of the instrumented function +and adds a data structure in a separate section). When a tracepoint +is "on", the function you provide is called each time the tracepoint +is executed, in the execution context of the caller. When the function +provided ends its execution, it returns to the caller (continuing from +the tracepoint site). You can put tracepoints at important locations in the code. They are lightweight hooks that can pass an arbitrary number of parameters, -which prototypes are described in a tracepoint declaration placed in a header -file. +which prototypes are described in a tracepoint declaration placed in a +header file. They can be used for tracing and performance accounting. @@ -63,36 +65,41 @@ Where : - subsys_eventname is an identifier unique to your event - subsys is the name of your subsystem. - eventname is the name of the event to trace. -- TPPTOTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p) is the prototype of the function - called by this tracepoint. -- TPARGS(firstarg, p) are the parameters names, same as found in the prototype. -Connecting a function (probe) to a tracepoint is done by providing a probe -(function to call) for the specific tracepoint through +- TPPTOTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p) is the prototype of the + function called by this tracepoint. + +- TPARGS(firstarg, p) are the parameters names, same as found in the + prototype. + +Connecting a function (probe) to a tracepoint is done by providing a +probe (function to call) for the specific tracepoint through register_trace_subsys_eventname(). Removing a probe is done through unregister_trace_subsys_eventname(); it will remove the probe. -tracepoint_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit -function to make sure there is no caller left using the probe. This, and the -fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure that probe -removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section below for a -sample probe module. - -The tracepoint mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the same -tracepoint, but a single definition must be made of a given tracepoint name over -all the kernel to make sure no type conflict will occur. Name mangling of the -tracepoints is done using the prototypes to make sure typing is correct. -Verification of probe type correctness is done at the registration site by the -compiler. Tracepoints can be put in inline functions, inlined static functions, -and unrolled loops as well as regular functions. - -The naming scheme "subsys_event" is suggested here as a convention intended -to limit collisions. Tracepoint names are global to the kernel: they are -considered as being the same whether they are in the core kernel image or in -modules. + +tracepoint_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of +the module exit function to make sure there is no caller left using +the probe. This, and the fact that preemption is disabled around the +probe call, make sure that probe removal and module unload are safe. +See the "Probe example" section below for a sample probe module. + +The tracepoint mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the +same tracepoint, but a single definition must be made of a given +tracepoint name over all the kernel to make sure no type conflict will +occur. Name mangling of the tracepoints is done using the prototypes +to make sure typing is correct. Verification of probe type correctness +is done at the registration site by the compiler. Tracepoints can be +put in inline functions, inlined static functions, and unrolled loops +as well as regular functions. + +The naming scheme "subsys_event" is suggested here as a convention +intended to limit collisions. Tracepoint names are global to the +kernel: they are considered as being the same whether they are in the +core kernel image or in modules. If the tracepoint has to be used in kernel modules, an -EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL_GPL() or EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL() can be used to -export the defined tracepoints. +EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL_GPL() or EXPORT_TRACEPOINT_SYMBOL() can be +used to export the defined tracepoints. * Probe / tracepoint example -- cgit v1.2.3 From 536533e69e3e4a9f0174509813f8df28970d6ebe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Dumazet Date: Sun, 16 Nov 2008 19:41:14 -0800 Subject: rcu: documents rculist_nulls Adds Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt file to describe how 'nulls' end-of-list can help in some RCU algos. Signed-off-by: Eric Dumazet Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt | 167 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 167 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..239f542d48b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rculist_nulls.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +Using hlist_nulls to protect read-mostly linked lists and +objects using SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU allocations. + +Please read the basics in Documentation/RCU/listRCU.txt + +Using special makers (called 'nulls') is a convenient way +to solve following problem : + +A typical RCU linked list managing objects which are +allocated with SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU kmem_cache can +use following algos : + +1) Lookup algo +-------------- +rcu_read_lock() +begin: +obj = lockless_lookup(key); +if (obj) { + if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects + goto begin; + /* + * Because a writer could delete object, and a writer could + * reuse these object before the RCU grace period, we + * must check key after geting the reference on object + */ + if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected + put_ref(obj); + goto begin; + } +} +rcu_read_unlock(); + +Beware that lockless_lookup(key) cannot use traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu() +but a version with an additional memory barrier (smp_rmb()) + +lockless_lookup(key) +{ + struct hlist_node *node, *next; + for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first); + pos && ({ next = pos->next; smp_rmb(); prefetch(next); 1; }) && + ({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; }); + pos = rcu_dereference(next)) + if (obj->key == key) + return obj; + return NULL; + +And note the traditional hlist_for_each_entry_rcu() misses this smp_rmb() : + + struct hlist_node *node; + for (pos = rcu_dereference((head)->first); + pos && ({ prefetch(pos->next); 1; }) && + ({ tpos = hlist_entry(pos, typeof(*tpos), member); 1; }); + pos = rcu_dereference(pos->next)) + if (obj->key == key) + return obj; + return NULL; +} + +Quoting Corey Minyard : + +"If the object is moved from one list to another list in-between the + time the hash is calculated and the next field is accessed, and the + object has moved to the end of a new list, the traversal will not + complete properly on the list it should have, since the object will + be on the end of the new list and there's not a way to tell it's on a + new list and restart the list traversal. I think that this can be + solved by pre-fetching the "next" field (with proper barriers) before + checking the key." + +2) Insert algo : +---------------- + +We need to make sure a reader cannot read the new 'obj->obj_next' value +and previous value of 'obj->key'. Or else, an item could be deleted +from a chain, and inserted into another chain. If new chain was empty +before the move, 'next' pointer is NULL, and lockless reader can +not detect it missed following items in original chain. + +/* + * Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list, + * not in the middle or end. + */ +obj = kmem_cache_alloc(...); +lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock() +obj->key = key; +atomic_inc(&obj->refcnt); +/* + * we need to make sure obj->key is updated before obj->next + */ +smp_wmb(); +hlist_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list); +unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock() + + +3) Remove algo +-------------- +Nothing special here, we can use a standard RCU hlist deletion. +But thanks to SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU, beware a deleted object can be reused +very very fast (before the end of RCU grace period) + +if (put_last_reference_on(obj) { + lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock() + hlist_del_init_rcu(&obj->obj_node); + unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock() + kmem_cache_free(cachep, obj); +} + + + +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- +With hlist_nulls we can avoid extra smp_rmb() in lockless_lookup() +and extra smp_wmb() in insert function. + +For example, if we choose to store the slot number as the 'nulls' +end-of-list marker for each slot of the hash table, we can detect +a race (some writer did a delete and/or a move of an object +to another chain) checking the final 'nulls' value if +the lookup met the end of chain. If final 'nulls' value +is not the slot number, then we must restart the lookup at +the begining. If the object was moved to same chain, +then the reader doesnt care : It might eventually +scan the list again without harm. + + +1) lookup algo + + head = &table[slot]; + rcu_read_lock(); +begin: + hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu(obj, node, head, member) { + if (obj->key == key) { + if (!try_get_ref(obj)) // might fail for free objects + goto begin; + if (obj->key != key) { // not the object we expected + put_ref(obj); + goto begin; + } + goto out; + } +/* + * if the nulls value we got at the end of this lookup is + * not the expected one, we must restart lookup. + * We probably met an item that was moved to another chain. + */ + if (get_nulls_value(node) != slot) + goto begin; + obj = NULL; + +out: + rcu_read_unlock(); + +2) Insert function : +-------------------- + +/* + * Please note that new inserts are done at the head of list, + * not in the middle or end. + */ +obj = kmem_cache_alloc(cachep); +lock_chain(); // typically a spin_lock() +obj->key = key; +atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1); +/* + * insert obj in RCU way (readers might be traversing chain) + */ +hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu(&obj->obj_node, list); +unlock_chain(); // typically a spin_unlock() -- cgit v1.2.3 From dd9c0e363cef32b7d6f23d4c87e8dfe4f91fd1c5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Sun, 16 Nov 2008 22:55:08 -0800 Subject: dccp: Deprecate Ack Ratio sysctl This patch deprecates the Ack Ratio sysctl, since * Ack Ratio is entirely ignored by CCID-3 and CCID-4, * Ack Ratio currently doesn't work in CCID-2 (i.e. is always set to 1); * even if it would work in CCID-2, there is no point for a user to change it: - Ack Ratio is constrained by cwnd (RFC 4341, 6.1.2), - if Ack Ratio > cwnd, the system resorts to spurious RTO timeouts (since waiting for Acks which will never arrive in this window), - cwnd is not a user-configurable value. The only reasonable place for Ack Ratio is to print it for debugging. It is planned to do this later on, as part of e.g. dccp_probe. With this patch Ack Ratio is now under full control of feature negotiation: * Ack Ratio is resolved as a dependency of the selected CCID; * if the chosen CCID supports it (i.e. CCID == CCID-2), Ack Ratio is set to the default of 2, following RFC 4340, 11.3 - "New connections start with Ack Ratio 2 for both endpoints"; * what happens then is part of another patch set, since it concerns the dynamic update of Ack Ratio while the connection is in full flight. Thanks to Tomasz Grobelny for discussion leading up to this patch. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index f0aeb20fa63..43df4487379 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -125,9 +125,6 @@ send_ndp = 1 send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -ack_ratio = 2 - The default Ack Ratio (sec. 11.3) to use. - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6fae35f9cea92793a98b2d9ab21235e5ae035581 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Vrabel Date: Mon, 17 Nov 2008 15:53:42 +0000 Subject: uwb: add basic radio manager The UWB radio manager coordinates the use of the radio between the PALs that may be using it. PALs request use of the radio with uwb_radio_start() and the radio manager will start beaconing if its not already doing so. When the last PAL has called uwb_radio_stop() beaconing will be stopped. In the future, the radio manager will have a more sophisticated channel selection algorithm, probably following the Channel Selection Policy from the WiMedia Alliance when it is finalized. For now, channel 9 (BG1, TFC1) is selected. The user may override the channel selected by the radio manager and may force the radio to stop beaconing. The WUSB Host Controller PAL makes use of this and there are two new debug PAL commands that can be used for testing. Signed-off-by: David Vrabel --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc | 14 ++++++++------ Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf | 9 --------- 2 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc index a0d18dbeb7a..6a5fd072849 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc @@ -32,14 +32,16 @@ Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org Description: Write: - [] + - to start beaconing on a specific channel, or stop - beaconing if is -1. Valid channels depends - on the radio controller's supported band groups. + to force a specific channel to be used when beaconing, + or, if is -1, to prohibit beaconing. If + is 0, then the default channel selection + algorithm will be used. Valid channels depends on the + radio controller's supported band groups. - may be used to try and join a specific - beacon group if more than one was found during a scan. + Reading returns the currently active channel, or -1 if + the radio controller is not beaconing. What: /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/scan Date: July 2008 diff --git a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf index 2e78b70f3ad..426ddaaef96 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf +++ b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf @@ -80,12 +80,6 @@ case $1 in start) for dev in ${2:-$hdevs} do - uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc) - if cat $uwb_rc/beacon | grep -q -- "-1" - then - echo 13 0 > $uwb_rc/beacon - echo I: started beaconing on ch 13 on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2 - fi echo $host_CHID > $dev/wusb_chid echo I: started host $(basename $dev) >&2 done @@ -95,9 +89,6 @@ case $1 in do echo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 > $dev/wusb_chid echo I: stopped host $(basename $dev) >&2 - uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc) - echo -1 | cat > $uwb_rc/beacon - echo I: stopped beaconing on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2 done ;; set-chid) -- cgit v1.2.3 From cec87e38e92cdfe86678ca2a5c29c38d05127601 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Peter Popovec Date: Tue, 11 Nov 2008 14:46:14 -0500 Subject: Input: add joystick driver for Walkera WK-0701 RC transmitter Signed-off-by: Peter Popovec Signed-off-by: Dmitry Torokhov --- Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt | 109 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 109 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8f4289efc5c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + +Walkera WK-0701 transmitter is supplied with a ready to fly Walkera +helicopters such as HM36, HM37, HM60. The walkera0701 module enables to use +this transmitter as joystick + +Devel homepage and download: +http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/walkera-wk0701/ + +or use cogito: +cg-clone http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/GIT/walkera0701-joystick + + +Connecting to PC: + +At back side of transmitter S-video connector can be found. Modulation +pulses from processor to HF part can be found at pin 2 of this connector, +pin 3 is GND. Between pin 3 and CPU 5k6 resistor can be found. To get +modulation pulses to PC, signal pulses must be amplified. + +Cable: (walkera TX to parport) + +Walkera WK-0701 TX S-VIDEO connector: + (back side of TX) + __ __ S-video: canon25 + / |_| \ pin 2 (signal) NPN parport + / O 4 3 O \ pin 3 (GND) LED ________________ 10 ACK + ( O 2 1 O ) | C + \ ___ / 2 ________________________|\|_____|/ + | [___] | |/| B |\ + ------- 3 __________________________________|________________ 25 GND + E + + +I use green LED and BC109 NPN transistor. + +Software: + +Build kernel with walkera0701 module. Module walkera0701 need exclusive +access to parport, modules like lp must be unloaded before loading +walkera0701 module, check dmesg for error messages. Connect TX to PC by +cable and run jstest /dev/input/js0 to see values from TX. If no value can +be changed by TX "joystick", check output from /proc/interrupts. Value for +(usually irq7) parport must increase if TX is on. + + + +Technical details: + +Driver use interrupt from parport ACK input bit to measure pulse length +using hrtimers. + +Frame format: +Based on walkera WK-0701 PCM Format description by Shaul Eizikovich. +(downloaded from http://www.smartpropoplus.com/Docs/Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf) + +Signal pulses: + (ANALOG) + SYNC BIN OCT + +---------+ +------+ + | | | | +--+ +------+ +--- + +Frame: + SYNC , BIN1, OCT1, BIN2, OCT2 ... BIN24, OCT24, BIN25, next frame SYNC .. + +pulse length: + Binary values: Analog octal values: + + 288 uS Binary 0 318 uS 000 + 438 uS Binary 1 398 uS 001 + 478 uS 010 + 558 uS 011 + 638 uS 100 + 1306 uS SYNC 718 uS 101 + 798 uS 110 + 878 uS 111 + +24 bin+oct values + 1 bin value = 24*4+1 bits = 97 bits + +(Warning, pulses on ACK ar inverted by transistor, irq is rised up on sync +to bin change or octal value to bin change). + +Binary data representations: + +One binary and octal value can be grouped to nibble. 24 nibbles + one binary +values can be sampled between sync pulses. + +Values for first four channels (analog joystick values) can be found in +first 10 nibbles. Analog value is represented by one sign bit and 9 bit +absolute binary value. (10 bits per channel). Next nibble is checksum for +first ten nibbles. + +Next nibbles 12 .. 21 represents four channels (not all channels can be +directly controlled from TX). Binary representations ar the same as in first +four channels. In nibbles 22 and 23 is a special magic number. Nibble 24 is +checksum for nibbles 12..23. + +After last octal value for nibble 24 and next sync pulse one additional +binary value can be sampled. This bit and magic number is not used in +software driver. Some details about this magic numbers can be found in +Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf. + +Checksum calculation: + +Summary of octal values in nibbles must be same as octal value in checksum +nibble (only first 3 bits are used). Binary value for checksum nibble is +calculated by sum of binary values in checked nibbles + sum of octal values +in checked nibbles divided by 8. Only bit 0 of this sum is used. + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5b2d1ecac2a79b9438aed731557b8912564cedfd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Vincent Petry Date: Tue, 18 Nov 2008 22:21:57 +0800 Subject: ALSA: hda: Added Realtek ALC888 model entry for Acer Aspire 4930G laptop Added Realtek ALC888 model entry for the Acer Aspire 4930G laptop that fixes the following features: - internal microphone - heaphone jack sense - channel mode Signed-off-by: Vincent Petry Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 3ab5fb1357a..010aa66ab92 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -903,6 +903,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 6stack-dig-demo 6-jack digital for Intel demo board acer Acer laptops (Travelmate 3012WTMi, Aspire 5600, etc) acer-aspire Acer Aspire 9810 + acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G medion Medion Laptops medion-md2 Medion MD2 targa-dig Targa/MSI -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1725b82a6e2721612a3572d0336f51f1f1c3cf54 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 21 Nov 2008 02:25:48 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - make laptop-eapd model back for AD1986A The changes specific for Samsung laptops seem unapplicable to other hardware models like ASUS. The mic inputs are lost on such hardware by the change 5d5d5f43f1b835c375de9bd270cce030d16e2871. This patch adds back the old laptop-eapd model, and create a new model "samsung" for the new one specific to Samsung laptops with automatic mic selection feature. Reference: kernel bugzilla #12070 http://bugzilla.kernel.org/show_bug.cgi?id=12070 Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 010aa66ab92..e55081fdc8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -984,9 +984,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. 6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default) 3stack 3-stack, shared surrounds laptop 2-channel only (FSC V2060, Samsung M50) - laptop-eapd 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung R65, ASUS A6J) + laptop-eapd 2-channel with EAPD (ASUS A6J) laptop-automute 2-channel with EAPD and HP-automute (Lenovo N100) ultra 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung Ultra tablet PC) + samsung 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung R65) AD1988/AD1988B/AD1989A/AD1989B 6stack 6-jack -- cgit v1.2.3 From 875065491fba8eb13219f16c36e79a6fb4e15c68 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Tue, 18 Nov 2008 20:50:34 +0000 Subject: ASoC: Rename snd_soc_card to snd_soc_machine One of the issues with the ASoC v1 API which has been addressed in the ASoC v2 work that Liam Girdwood has done is that the ALSA card provided by ASoC is distributed around the ASoC structures. For example, machine wide data such as the struct snd_card are maintained as part of the CODEC data structure, preventing the use of multiple codecs. This has been addressed by refactoring the data structures so that all the data for the ALSA card is contained in a single structure snd_soc_card which replaces the existing snd_soc_machine and snd_soc_device. Begin the process of backporting this by renaming struct snd_soc_machine to struct snd_soc_card, better reflecting its function and bringing it closer to standard ALSA terminology. Signed-off-by: Mark Brown --- Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt index f370e7db86a..4a9f51e2905 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ the audio subsystem with the kernel as a platform device and is represented by the following struct:- /* SoC machine */ -struct snd_soc_machine { +struct snd_soc_card {_ char *name; int (*probe)(struct platform_device *pdev); @@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ static struct snd_soc_dai_link corgi_dai = { .ops = &corgi_ops, }; -struct snd_soc_machine then sets up the machine with it's DAIs. e.g. +struct snd_soc_card then sets up the machine with it's DAIs. e.g. /* corgi audio machine driver */ -static struct snd_soc_machine snd_soc_machine_corgi = { +static struct snd_soc_card snd_soc_corgi = { .name = "Corgi", .dai_link = &corgi_dai, .num_links = 1, @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ static struct wm8731_setup_data corgi_wm8731_setup = { /* corgi audio subsystem */ static struct snd_soc_device corgi_snd_devdata = { - .machine = &snd_soc_machine_corgi, + .machine = &snd_soc_corgi, .platform = &pxa2xx_soc_platform, .codec_dev = &soc_codec_dev_wm8731, .codec_data = &corgi_wm8731_setup, -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4f904735c809e44c11f57cd4f82446aac1243e0e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Fri, 21 Nov 2008 15:08:23 +0000 Subject: ALSA: ASoC: Fix typo in snd_soc_card update documentation Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt index 4a9f51e2905..bab7711ce96 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/machine.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ the audio subsystem with the kernel as a platform device and is represented by the following struct:- /* SoC machine */ -struct snd_soc_card {_ +struct snd_soc_card { char *name; int (*probe)(struct platform_device *pdev); -- cgit v1.2.3 From f9f88fed3433139b58962011c81597b44fd48458 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jouni Malinen Date: Sun, 9 Nov 2008 18:38:51 +0200 Subject: mac80211_hwsim: Update documentation (AP mode enabled) AP mode is now enabled in mac80211, so there is no need to point users to an additional patch to enable the mode. In addition, add a pointer to more hwsim test cases in hostap.git. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen Signed-off-by: John W. Linville --- Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README index 2ff8ccb8dc3..24ac91d5669 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README +++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README @@ -50,10 +50,6 @@ associates with the AP. hostapd and wpa_supplicant are used to take care of WPA2-PSK authentication. In addition, hostapd is also processing access point side of association. -Please note that the current Linux kernel does not enable AP mode, so a -simple patch is needed to enable AP mode selection: -http://johannes.sipsolutions.net/patches/kernel/all/LATEST/006-allow-ap-vlan-modes.patch - # Build mac80211_hwsim as part of kernel configuration @@ -65,3 +61,8 @@ hostapd hostapd.conf # Run wpa_supplicant (station) for wlan1 wpa_supplicant -Dwext -iwlan1 -c wpa_supplicant.conf + + +More test cases are available in hostap.git: +git://w1.fi/srv/git/hostap.git and mac80211_hwsim/tests subdirectory +(http://w1.fi/gitweb/gitweb.cgi?p=hostap.git;a=tree;f=mac80211_hwsim/tests) -- cgit v1.2.3 From e022c2f07ae52bfbd92faa273db0db2f34eb28e8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Krzysztof=20Ha=C5=82asa?= Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 19:17:38 +0200 Subject: WAN: new synchronous PPP implementation for generic HDLC. MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Krzysztof Hałasa --- Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt index 31bc8b759b7..4eb3cc40b70 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/generic-hdlc.txt @@ -3,15 +3,15 @@ Krzysztof Halasa Generic HDLC layer currently supports: -1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI). +1. Frame Relay (ANSI, CCITT, Cisco and no LMI) - Normal (routed) and Ethernet-bridged (Ethernet device emulation) interfaces can share a single PVC. - ARP support (no InARP support in the kernel - there is an experimental InARP user-space daemon available on: http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/hdlc/). -2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation. -3. Cisco HDLC. -4. PPP (uses syncppp.c). +2. raw HDLC - either IP (IPv4) interface or Ethernet device emulation +3. Cisco HDLC +4. PPP 5. X.25 (uses X.25 routines). Generic HDLC is a protocol driver only - it needs a low-level driver -- cgit v1.2.3 From 72364706c3b7c09a658e356218a918c5f92dcad0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?Krzysztof=20Ha=C5=82asa?= Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 19:18:17 +0200 Subject: WAN: syncppp.c is no longer used by any kernel code. Remove it. MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Signed-off-by: Krzysztof Hałasa --- Documentation/DocBook/Makefile | 2 +- Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl | 3 -- Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl | 99 ----------------------------------- 3 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 103 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 9b1f6ca100d..0a08126d309 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ # To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the # list of DOCBOOKS. -DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \ +DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \ kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \ procfs-guide.xml writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl index f24f9e85e4a..627707a3cb9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl @@ -98,9 +98,6 @@ X!Enet/core/wireless.c --> - Synchronous PPP -!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c - diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl deleted file mode 100644 index 8c93db122f0..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/wanbook.tmpl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - - - - - - Synchronous PPP and Cisco HDLC Programming Guide - - - - Alan - Cox - -
- alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk -
- - - - - - 2000 - Alan Cox - - - - - This documentation is free software; you can redistribute - it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either - version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later - version. - - - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be - useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied - warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - See the GNU General Public License for more details. - - - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public - License along with this program; if not, write to the Free - Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, - MA 02111-1307 USA - - - - For more details see the file COPYING in the source - distribution of Linux. - - - - - - - - Introduction - - The syncppp drivers in Linux provide a fairly complete - implementation of Cisco HDLC and a minimal implementation of - PPP. The longer term goal is to switch the PPP layer to the - generic PPP interface that is new in Linux 2.3.x. The API should - remain unchanged when this is done, but support will then be - available for IPX, compression and other PPP features - - - - Known Bugs And Assumptions - - - PPP is minimal - - - The current PPP implementation is very basic, although sufficient - for most wan usages. - - - - Cisco HDLC Quirks - - - Currently we do not end all packets with the correct Cisco multicast - or unicast flags. Nothing appears to mind too much but this should - be corrected. - - - - - - - - - Public Functions Provided -!Edrivers/net/wan/syncppp.c - - - -- cgit v1.2.3 From a5fcf89eff2372b50f2d47fbb3e1f3090f044ee3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wu Fengguang Date: Sat, 22 Nov 2008 09:40:55 +0800 Subject: ALSA: hda - document the ELD proc interface Describe what ELD proc interface provides and how to fix incorrect values. Signed-off-by: Wu Fengguang Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt | 10 ++++++++++ 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt index f738b296440..bba2dbb79d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt @@ -153,6 +153,16 @@ card*/codec#* Shows the general codec information and the attribute of each widget node. +card*/eld#* + Available for HDMI or DisplayPort interfaces. + Shows ELD(EDID Like Data) info retrieved from the attached HDMI sink, + and describes its audio capabilities and configurations. + + Some ELD fields may be modified by doing `echo name hex_value > eld#*`. + Only do this if you are sure the HDMI sink provided value is wrong. + And if that makes your HDMI audio work, please report to us so that we + can fix it in future kernel releases. + Sequencer Information --------------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From 02b67518e2b1c490787dac7f35e1204e74fe21ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?T=C3=B6r=C3=B6k=20Edwin?= Date: Sat, 22 Nov 2008 13:28:47 +0200 Subject: tracing: add support for userspace stacktraces in tracing/iter_ctrl MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Impact: add new (default-off) tracing visualization feature Usage example: mount -t debugfs nodev /sys/kernel/debug cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing echo userstacktrace >iter_ctrl echo sched_switch >current_tracer echo 1 >tracing_enabled .... run application ... echo 0 >tracing_enabled Then read one of 'trace','latency_trace','trace_pipe'. To get the best output you can compile your userspace programs with frame pointers (at least glibc + the app you are tracing). Signed-off-by: Török Edwin Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index 753f4de4b17..79a80f79c06 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ output. To see what is available, simply cat the file: cat /debug/tracing/trace_options print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \ - noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree + noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree nouserstacktrace To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with "no". @@ -378,6 +378,9 @@ Here are the available options: When a trace is recorded, so is the stack of functions. This allows for back traces of trace sites. + userstacktrace - This option changes the trace. + It records a stacktrace of the current userspace thread. + sched-tree - TBD (any users??) -- cgit v1.2.3 From b54d3de9f3b8956653b06f1a32e9f9321c6d9027 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?T=C3=B6r=C3=B6k=20Edwin?= Date: Sat, 22 Nov 2008 13:28:48 +0200 Subject: tracing: identify which executable object the userspace address belongs to MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Impact: modify+improve the userstacktrace tracing visualization feature Store thread group leader id, and use it to lookup the address in the process's map. We could have looked up the address on thread's map, but the thread might not exist by the time we are called. The process might not exist either, but if you are reading trace_pipe, that is unlikely. Example usage: mount -t debugfs nodev /sys/kernel/debug cd /sys/kernel/debug/tracing echo userstacktrace >iter_ctrl echo sym-userobj >iter_ctrl echo sched_switch >current_tracer echo 1 >tracing_enabled cat trace_pipe >/tmp/trace& .... run application ... echo 0 >tracing_enabled cat /tmp/trace You'll see stack entries like: /lib/libpthread-2.7.so[+0xd370] You can convert them to function/line using: addr2line -fie /lib/libpthread-2.7.so 0xd370 Or: addr2line -fie /usr/lib/debug/libpthread-2.7.so 0xd370 For non-PIC/PIE executables this won't work: a.out[+0x73b] You need to run the following: addr2line -fie a.out 0x40073b (where 0x400000 is the default load address of a.out) Signed-off-by: Török Edwin Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 13 ++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index 79a80f79c06..35a78bc6651 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ output. To see what is available, simply cat the file: cat /debug/tracing/trace_options print-parent nosym-offset nosym-addr noverbose noraw nohex nobin \ - noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree nouserstacktrace + noblock nostacktrace nosched-tree nouserstacktrace nosym-userobj To disable one of the options, echo in the option prepended with "no". @@ -381,6 +381,17 @@ Here are the available options: userstacktrace - This option changes the trace. It records a stacktrace of the current userspace thread. + sym-userobj - when user stacktrace are enabled, look up which object the + address belongs to, and print a relative address + This is especially useful when ASLR is on, otherwise you don't + get a chance to resolve the address to object/file/line after the app is no + longer running + + The lookup is performed when you read trace,trace_pipe,latency_trace. Example: + + a.out-1623 [000] 40874.465068: /root/a.out[+0x480] <-/root/a.out[+0 +x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6] + sched-tree - TBD (any users??) -- cgit v1.2.3 From b20a9c24d5c5d466d7e4a25c6f1bedbd2d16ad4f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Sun, 23 Nov 2008 16:02:31 -0800 Subject: dccp: Set per-connection CCIDs via socket options With this patch, TX/RX CCIDs can now be changed on a per-connection basis, which overrides the defaults set by the global sysctl variables for TX/RX CCIDs. To make full use of this facility, the remaining patches of this patch set are needed, which track dependencies and activate negotiated feature values. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 43df4487379..610083ff73f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -61,6 +61,20 @@ DCCP_SOCKOPT_AVAILABLE_CCIDS is also read-only and returns the list of CCIDs supported by the endpoint (see include/linux/dccp.h for symbolic constants). The caller needs to provide a sufficiently large (> 2) array of type uint8_t. +DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID is write-only and sets both the TX and RX CCIDs at the same +time, combining the operation of the next two socket options. This option is +preferrable over the latter two, since often applications will use the same +type of CCID for both directions; and mixed use of CCIDs is not currently well +understood. This socket option takes as argument at least one uint8_t value, or +an array of uint8_t values, which must match available CCIDS (see above). CCIDs +must be registered on the socket before calling connect() or listen(). + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID is read/write. It returns the current CCID (if set) or sets +the preference list for the TX CCID, using the same format as DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID. +Please note that the getsockopt argument type here is `int', not uint8_t. + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_RX_CCID is analogous to DCCP_SOCKOPT_TX_CCID, but for the RX CCID. + DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVER_TIMEWAIT enables the server (listening socket) to hold timewait state when closing the connection (RFC 4340, 8.3). The usual case is that the closing server sends a CloseReq, whereupon the client holds timewait -- cgit v1.2.3 From ef8ef5fb1027b56f867d4b913cf52bfdc610d2a7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Vincent Petry Date: Sun, 23 Nov 2008 11:31:41 +0800 Subject: ALSA: hda: Added an ALC888 model entry for Fujitsu-Siemens Amilo Xa3530 This patch fixes the bug 0004240: ALC888 - Intel HDA - Headphone Controlling. It is made against the 2008-11-23 snapshot. Added Realtek ALC888 model entry for the Fujitsu-Siemens Amilo Xa3530 laptop. It has 4 jacks: HP out, Mic-in, Line-in and Line-out/Side/SPDIF (this one is on the laptop side, the other ones are on the rear). Model detection works. Headphone jack sense works now. Front mic works now, was same as Acer Aspire 4930G. Added channel mode from 2 to 8 channels. In 2ch and 4ch modes, the front is also sent to the Line-out/side jack for convenience instead of just muting the Line-out/side jack like other models do. When using the Mic-in jack as CLFE, the sound is very low (bug?). To work it around, in 6ch mode the CLFE channel is duplicated to the Line-out/side jack because this one has a better amp. Cc: manu@frogged.de Signed-off-by: Vincent Petry Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 1b7e36af0f0..93624e7b4f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -919,6 +919,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. mitac Mitac 8252D clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 + fujitsu-xa3530 Fujitsu AMILO XA3530 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) -- cgit v1.2.3 From df4fc31558dd2a3a30292ddb3a64c2a5befcec73 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Rostedt Date: Wed, 26 Nov 2008 00:16:23 -0500 Subject: ftrace: add function tracing to single thread Impact: feature to function trace a single thread This patch adds the ability to function trace a single thread. The file: /debugfs/tracing/set_ftrace_pid contains the pid to trace. Valid pids are any positive integer. Writing any negative number to this file will disable the pid tracing and the function tracer will go back to tracing all of threads. This feature works with both static and dynamic function tracing. Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 79 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 79 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index 35a78bc6651..de05042f11b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -127,6 +127,8 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: be traced. If a function exists in both set_ftrace_filter and set_ftrace_notrace, the function will _not_ be traced. + set_ftrace_pid: Have the function tracer only trace a single thread. + available_filter_functions: This lists the functions that ftrace has processed and can trace. These are the function names that you can pass to "set_ftrace_filter" or @@ -1073,6 +1075,83 @@ For simple one time traces, the above is sufficent. For anything else, a search through /proc/mounts may be needed to find where the debugfs file-system is mounted. + +Single thread tracing +--------------------- + +By writing into /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid you can trace a +single thread. For example: + +# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid +no pid +# echo 3111 > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid +# cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid +3111 +# echo function > /debug/tracing/current_tracer +# cat /debug/tracing/trace | head + # tracer: function + # + # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION + # | | | | | + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254676: finish_task_switch <-thread_return + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254681: hrtimer_cancel <-schedule_hrtimeout_range + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254682: hrtimer_try_to_cancel <-hrtimer_cancel + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254683: lock_hrtimer_base <-hrtimer_try_to_cancel + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254685: fget_light <-do_sys_poll + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1637.254686: pipe_poll <-do_sys_poll +# echo -1 > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid +# cat /debug/tracing/trace |head + # tracer: function + # + # TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION + # | | | | | + ##### CPU 3 buffer started #### + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957688: free_poll_entry <-poll_freewait + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957689: remove_wait_queue <-free_poll_entry + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957691: fput <-free_poll_entry + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957692: audit_syscall_exit <-sysret_audit + yum-updatesd-3111 [003] 1701.957693: path_put <-audit_syscall_exit + +If you want to trace a function when executing, you could use +something like this simple program: + +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include +#include + +int main (int argc, char **argv) +{ + if (argc < 1) + exit(-1); + + if (fork() > 0) { + int fd, ffd; + char line[64]; + int s; + + ffd = open("/debug/tracing/current_tracer", O_WRONLY); + if (ffd < 0) + exit(-1); + write(ffd, "nop", 3); + + fd = open("/debug/tracing/set_ftrace_pid", O_WRONLY); + s = sprintf(line, "%d\n", getpid()); + write(fd, line, s); + + write(ffd, "function", 8); + + close(fd); + close(ffd); + + execvp(argv[1], argv+1); + } + + return 0; +} + dynamic ftrace -------------- -- cgit v1.2.3 From c072c24975ec4f0ccfcb6f5c8a8040b6eb75ef8f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: walimis Date: Fri, 28 Nov 2008 12:21:19 +0800 Subject: ftrace: improve documentation Impact: extend documentation with notice of using wild cards correctly We know that we can use wild cards to set set_ftrace_filter, but there's problem when using them naively such as: echo h* > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter If there are files named with "h" prefix in current directory, echo "h*" will echo these filenames to set_ftrace_filter, not the intended "h*". For example: $ cat /debug/tracing/available_filter_functions |grep ^hr |wc -l 23 $ ls $ touch hraa hrdd $ ls hraa hrdd $ echo hr* > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter $ cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter No output in /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter! If we use '' to escape wild cards, it works: $ ls hraa hrdd $ echo "hr*" > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter $ cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter |wc -l 23 This problem can lead to unexpected result if current directory has a lot of files. Signed-off-by: walimis Acked-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/ftrace.txt | 8 ++++++-- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index de05042f11b..803b1318b13 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -1251,7 +1251,11 @@ These are the only wild cards which are supported. * will not work. - # echo hrtimer_* > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter +Note: It is better to use quotes to enclose the wild cards, otherwise + the shell may expand the parameters into names of files in the local + directory. + + # echo 'hrtimer_*' > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter Produces: @@ -1306,7 +1310,7 @@ Again, now we want to append. # echo sys_nanosleep > /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter sys_nanosleep - # echo hrtimer_* >> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter + # echo 'hrtimer_*' >> /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter # cat /debug/tracing/set_ftrace_filter hrtimer_run_queues hrtimer_run_pending -- cgit v1.2.3 From de04b102bfc9a13e96f0892305b394077ffb6514 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Clemens Ladisch Date: Wed, 26 Nov 2008 10:37:23 +0100 Subject: ALSA: oxygen: add Claro halo support Add support for the HT-Omega Claro halo (XT). Signed-off-by: Clemens Ladisch Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index e0e54a27fc1..0cca842a663 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1647,7 +1647,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. * AuzenTech X-Meridian * Bgears b-Enspirer * Club3D Theatron DTS - * HT-Omega Claro + * HT-Omega Claro (plus) + * HT-Omega Claro halo (XT) * Razer Barracuda AC-1 * Sondigo Inferno -- cgit v1.2.3 From a838c2ec6ea1f18431da74dfe4978c57355b95f3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wu Fengguang Date: Thu, 27 Nov 2008 16:14:44 +0800 Subject: markers: comment marker_synchronize_unregister() on data dependency Add document and comments on marker_synchronize_unregister(): it should be called before freeing resources that the probes depend on. Based on comments from Lai Jiangshan and Mathieu Desnoyers. Signed-off-by: Wu Fengguang Reviewed-by: Mathieu Desnoyers Reviewed-by: Lai Jiangshan Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/markers.txt | 15 ++++++++++----- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/markers.txt b/Documentation/markers.txt index 6d275e4ef38..d2b3d0e91b2 100644 --- a/Documentation/markers.txt +++ b/Documentation/markers.txt @@ -51,11 +51,16 @@ to call) for the specific marker through marker_probe_register() and can be activated by calling marker_arm(). Marker deactivation can be done by calling marker_disarm() as many times as marker_arm() has been called. Removing a probe is done through marker_probe_unregister(); it will disarm the probe. -marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called before the end of the module exit -function to make sure there is no caller left using the probe. This, and the -fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure that probe -removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section below for a -sample probe module. + +marker_synchronize_unregister() must be called between probe unregistration and +the first occurrence of +- the end of module exit function, + to make sure there is no caller left using the probe; +- the free of any resource used by the probes, + to make sure the probes wont be accessing invalid data. +This, and the fact that preemption is disabled around the probe call, make sure +that probe removal and module unload are safe. See the "Probe example" section +below for a sample probe module. The marker mechanism supports inserting multiple instances of the same marker. Markers can be put in inline functions, inlined static functions, and -- cgit v1.2.3 From f08340c5d68ab621f377c108637e2d8e95b3e5d4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikanth Karthikesan Date: Sat, 29 Nov 2008 15:43:32 +0530 Subject: tracepoints: Documentation TPPROTO misspelt in Documentation/tracepoints.txt Impact: fix typo in documentation TPPROTO is misspelt in Documentation/tracepoints.txt Kept me wondering what was wrong, when I was trying to add a new tracepoint subsystem. Signed-off-by: Nikanth Karthikesan Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/tracepoints.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt index 2d42241a25c..6f0a044f5b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/tracepoints.txt +++ b/Documentation/tracepoints.txt @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ In include/trace/subsys.h : #include DECLARE_TRACE(subsys_eventname, - TPPTOTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p), + TPPROTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p), TPARGS(firstarg, p)); In subsys/file.c (where the tracing statement must be added) : @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Where : - subsys is the name of your subsystem. - eventname is the name of the event to trace. -- TPPTOTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p) is the prototype of the +- TPPROTO(int firstarg, struct task_struct *p) is the prototype of the function called by this tracepoint. - TPARGS(firstarg, p) are the parameters names, same as found in the -- cgit v1.2.3 From 553dea4dd531562688ba01c641c7f8fc7abaaf8c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Artem Bityutskiy Date: Sat, 1 Nov 2008 14:57:49 +0200 Subject: UBIFS: introduce compression mount options It is very handy to be able to change default UBIFS compressor via mount options. Introduce -o compr= mount option support. Currently only "none", "lzo" and "zlib" compressors are supported. Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index dd84ea3c10d..2d0db5482d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -95,6 +95,9 @@ no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to of this option is that corruption of the contents of a file can go unnoticed. chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes +compr=none override defoult comressor and set it to "none" +compr=lzo override defoult comressor and set it to "lzo" +compr=zlib override defoult comressor and set it to "zlib" Quick usage instructions -- cgit v1.2.3 From a7fe49bf01dd64b3c73ad0e172f68bd03c813d65 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 3 Dec 2008 18:26:35 +0100 Subject: ALSA: Add more documentation about HD-audio driver The file can be converted to PDF via asciidoc. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 535 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 535 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e758f24017b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,535 @@ +MORE NOTES ON HD-AUDIO DRIVER +============================= + Takashi Iwai + + +GENERAL +------- + +HD-audio is the new standard on-board audio component on modern PCs +after AC97. Although Linux has been supporting HD-audio since long +time ago, there are often problems with new machines. A part of the +problem is broken BIOS, and rest is the driver implementation. This +document explains the trouble-shooting and debugging methods for the +HD-audio hardware. + +The HD-audio component consists of two parts: the controller chip and +the codec chips on the HD-audio bus. Linux provides a single driver +for all controllers, snd-hda-intel. Since the HD-audio controllers +are supposed to be compatible, the single snd-hda-driver should work +in most cases. But, not surprisingly, there are known bugs and issues +specific to each controller type. The snd-hda-intel driver has a +bunch of workarounds for these as described below. + +A controller may have multiple codecs. Usually you have one audio +codec and optionally one modem codec. In some cases, there can be +multiple audio codecs, e.g. for analog and digital outputs, but the +driver might not work properly. + +The snd-hda-intel driver has several different codec parsers depending +on the codec. It has a generic parser as a fallback, but this +functionality is fairly limited until now. Instead of the generic +parser, usually the codec-specific parser (coded in patch_*.c) is used +for the codec-specific implementations. The details about the +codec-specific problems are explained in the later sections. + +If you are interested in the deep debugging of HD-audio, read the +HD-audio specification at first. The specification is found on +Intel's web page, for example: + +- http://www.intel.com/standards/hdaudio/ + + +HD-AUDIO CONTROLLER +------------------- + +DMA-Position Problem +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The most common problem of the controller is the inaccurate DMA +pointer reporting. The DMA pointer for playback and capture can be +read in two ways, either via a LPIB register or via a position-buffer +map. As default the driver tries to reads from the io-mapped +position-buffer, and falls back to LPIB if it appears unupdated. +However, this detection isn't perfect on some devices. In such a +case, you can change the default method via `position_fix` option. + +`position_fix=1` means to use LPIB method explicitly. +`position_fix=2` means to use the position-buffer. 0 is the default +value, the automatic check. If you get a problem of repeated sounds, +this option might help. + +In addition to that, every controller is known to be broken regarding +the wake-up timing. It wakes up a few samples before actually +processing the data on the buffer. This caused a lot of problems, for +example, with ALSA dmix or JACK. Since 2.6.27 kernel, the driver puts +an artificial delay to the wake up timing. This delay is controlled +via `bdl_pos_adj` option. + +When `bdl_pos_adj` is a negative value (as default), it's assigned to +an appropriate value depending on the controller chip. For Intel +chip, it'd be 1 while it'd be 32 for others. Usually this works. +Only in case it doesn't work and you get warning messages, you should +change to other values. + + +Codec-Probing Problem +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +A less often but a more severe problem is the codec probing. When +BIOS reports the available codec slots wrongly, the driver gets +confused and tries to access the non-existing codec slot. This often +results in the total screw-up, and destruct the further communication +with the codec chips. The symptom appears usually as the error +message like: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to polling mode: \ + last cmd=0x12345678 + hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to single_cmd mode: \ + last cmd=0x12345678 +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +The first line is a warning, and this is usually relatively harmless. +It means that the codec response isn't notified via an IRQ. The +driver uses explicit polling method to read the response. It gives +very slight CPU overhead, but you'd unlikely notice it. + +The second line is, however, a fatal error. If this happens, usually +it means that something is really wrong. Most likely you are +accessing a non-existing codec slot. + +Thus, if the second error message appears, try to narrow the probed +codec slots via `probe_mask` option. It's a bitmask, and each bit +corresponding to the codec slot. For example, to probe only the +first slot, pass `probe_mask=1`. For the first and the third slots, +pass `probe_mask=5` (where 5 = 1 | 4), and so on. + +Since 2.6.29 kernel, the driver has a more robust probing method, so +this error might happen rarely, though. + + +Interrupt Handling +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +In rare but some cases, the interrupt isn't properly handled as +default. You would notice this by the DMA transfer error reported by +ALSA PCM core, for example. Using MSI might help in such a case. +Pass `enable_msi=1` option for enabling MSI. + + +HD-AUDIO CODEC +-------------- + +Model Option +~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The most common problems with the HD-audio driver is the unsupported +codec features or the mismatched device configuration. Most of +codec-specific code has several preset models, either to override the +BIOS setup or to provide more comprehensive features. + +The driver checks PCI SSID and looks through the static configuration +table until any matching entry is found. If you have a new machine, +you may see a message like below: +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + hda_codec: Unknown model for ALC880, trying auto-probe from BIOS... +------------------------------------------------------------------------ +Even if you such a message, DON'T PANIC. Take a deep breath (and keep +your towel). First of all, it's an informational message, no warning, +no error. This means that the PCI SSID of your device isn't listed in +the known preset model list. But, this doesn't mean that the driver +is broken. Many codec-driver provides the automatic configuration +based on the BIOS setup. + +The HD-audio codec has usually "pin" widgets, and BIOS sets the default +configuration of each pin, which indicates the location, the +connection type, the jack color, etc. The HD-audio driver can guess +the right connection judging from these default configuration values. +However -- some codec support codes, such as patch_analog.c, don't +support the automatic probing (yet as of 2.6.28). And, BIOS is often, +yes, pretty often broken. It sets up wrong values and screws up the +driver. + +The preset model is provided basically to override such a situation. +When the matching preset model is found in the list, the driver +assumes the static configuration of that preset and builds the mixer +and PCM based on the static information. Thus, if you have a newer +machine with a slightly different PCI SSID from the existing one, you +may have a good chance to re-use the same model. You can pass the +`model` option to specify the preset model instead of PCI SSID +look-up. + +What `model` option values are available depends on the codec chip. +Check your codec chip from the codec proc file (see "Codec Proc-File" +section below). It will show the vendor/product name of your codec +chip. Then, see Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt file. +In the section of HD-audio driver, you can find a list of codecs and +`model` options belonging to each codec. For example, for Realtek +ALC262 codec chip, pass `model=ultra` for devices that are compatible +with Samsung Q1 Ultra. + +Thus, the first thing you can do for any brand-new, unsupported +HD-audio hardware is to check HD-audio codec and several different +`model` option values. If you have a luck, some of them might suit +with your device well. + +Some codecs such as ALC880 have a special model option `model=test`. +This configures the driver to provide as many mixer controls as +possible for every single pin feature except for the unsolicited +events (and maybe some other specials). Adjust each mixer element and +try the I/O in the way of trial-and-error until figuring out the whole +I/O pin mappings. + +Note that `model=generic` has a special meaning. It means to use the +generic parser regardless of the codec. Usually the codec-specific +parser is much better than the generic parser (as now). Thus this +option is more about the debugging purpose. + + +Speaker and Headphone Output +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +One of the most frequent (and obvious) bugs with HD-audio is the +silent output from either or both of a built-in speaker and a +headphone jack. In general, you should try a headphone output at +first. A speaker output often requires more additional controls like +the amplifier. Thus a headphone output has a slightly better chance. + +Before making a bug report, double-check whether the mixer is set up +correctly. The recent version of snd-hda-intel driver provides mostly +"Master" volume control as well as "Front" volume. In addition, there +are individual "Headphone" and "Speaker" controls. + +Ditto for the speaker output. There can be "External Amplifier" +switch on some codecs. Turn on this if present. + +Another related problem is the automatic mute of speaker output by +headphone plugging. This feature is implemented in most cases, but +not on every preset model or codec-support code. + +In anyway, try a different model option if you have such a problem. +Some other models may match better and give you more matching +functionality. If none of the available models works, send a bug +report. See the bug report section for details. + +If you are masochistic enough to debug the driver problem, note the +following: + +- The speaker (and the headphone, too) output often requires the + external amplifier. This can be set usually via EAPD verb or a + certain GPIO. If the codec pin supports EAPD, you have a better + chance via SET_EAPD_BTL verb (0x70c). On others, GPIO pin (mostly + it's either GPIO0 or GPIO1) can turn on/off EAPD. +- Some Realtek codecs require special vendor-specific coefficients to + turn on the amplifier. See patch_realtek.c. +- IDT codecs may have extra power-enable/disable controls on each + analog pin. See patch_sigmatel.c. +- Very rare but some devices don't accept the pin-detection verb until + triggered. Issuing GET_PIN_SENSE verb (0xf09) may result in the + codec-communication stall. Some examples are found in + patch_realtek.c. + + +Capture Problems +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The capture problems are often missing setups of mixers. Thus, before +submitting a bug report, make sure that you set up the mixer +correctly. For example, both "Capture Volume" and "Capture Switch" +have to be set properly in addition to the right "Capture Source" or +"Input Source" selection. Some devices have "Mic Boost" volume or +switch. + +When the PCM device is opened via "default" PCM (without pulse-audio +plugin), you'll likely have "Digital Capture Volume" control as well. +This is provided for the extra gain/attenuation of the signal in +software, especially for the inputs without the hardware volume +control such as digital microphones. Unless really needed, this +should be set to exactly 50%, corresponding to 0dB. When you use "hw" +PCM, i.e., a raw access PCM, this control will have no influence, +though. + +It's known that some codecs / devices have fairly bad analog circuits, +and the recorded sound contains a certain DC-offset. This is no bug +of the driver. + +Most of modern laptops have no analog CD-input connection. Thus, the +recording from CD input won't work in many cases although the driver +provides it as the capture source. + +The automatic switching of the built-in and external mic per plugging +is implemented on some codec models but not on every model. Partly +because of my laziness but mostly lack of testers. Feel free to +submit the improvement patch to the author. + + +Direct Debugging +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +If no model option gives you a better result, and you are a touch guy +to fight again the evil, try debugging via hitting the raw HD-audio +codec verbs to the device. Some tools are available: hda-emu and +hda-analyzer. The detailed description is found in the sections +below. You'd need to enable hwdep for using these tools. See "Kernel +Configuration". + + +OTHER ISSUES +------------ + +Kernel Configuration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +In general, I recommend you to enable the sound debug option, +`CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y`, no matter whether you are debugging or not. +This enables snd_printd() macro and others, and you'll get additional +kernel messages at probing. + +In addition, you can enable `CONFIG_SND_DEBUG_VERBOSE=y`. But this +will give you far more messages. Thus turn this on only when you are +sure to want it. + +Don't forget to turn on the appropriate `CONFIG_SND_HDA_CODEC_*` +options. Note that each of them corresponds to the codec chip, not +the controller chip. Thus, even if lspci shows the Nvidia controller, +you may choose the option for other vendors. If you are unsure, just +choose all yes. + +`CONFIG_SND_HDA_HWDEP` is a useful option for debugging the driver. +When this is enabled, the driver creates hardware-dependent devices +(one per each codec), and you have a raw access to the device via +hda-verb program. For example, `hwC0D2` will be created for the card +0 codec slot #2. For debug tools such as hda-verb and hda-analyzer, +the hwdep device has to be enabled. Thus, turn this on always. + +`CONFIG_SND_HDA_RECONFIG` is a new option, and this depends on the +hwdep option above. When enabled, you'll have some sysfs files under +the corresponding hwdep directory. See "HD-audio reconfiguration" +section below. + +`CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE` option enables the power-saving feature. +See "Power-saving" section below. + + +Codec Proc-File +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The codec proc-file is a treasure-chest for debugging HD-audio. +It shows most of useful information of each codec widget. + +The proc file is located in /proc/asound/card*/codec#*, one file per +each codec slot. You can know the codec vendor, product id and +names, the type of each widget, capabilities and so on. +This file, however, doesn't show the jack sensing state, so far. This +is because the jack-sensing might be depending on the trigger state. + +This file will be picked up by the debug tools, and also it can be fed +to the emulator as the primary codec information. See the debug tools +section below. + +This proc file can be also used to check whether the generic parser is +used. When the generic parser is used, the vendor/product ID name +will appear as "Realtek ID 0262", instead of "Realtek ALC262". + + +HD-Audio Reconfiguration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +This is an experimental feature to allow you re-configure the HD-audio +codec dynamically without reloading the driver. The following sysfs +files are available under each codec-hwdep device directory (e.g. +/sys/class/sound/hwC0D0): + +vendor_id:: + Shows the 32bit codec vendor-id hex number. You can change the + vendor-id value by writing to this file. +subsystem_id:: + Shows the 32bit codec subsystem-id hex number. You can change the + subsystem-id value by writing to this file. +revision_id:: + Shows the 32bit codec revision-id hex number. You can change the + revision-id value by writing to this file. +afg:: + Shows the AFG ID. This is read-only. +mfg:: + Shows the MFG ID. This is read-only. +name:: + Shows the codec name string. Can be changed by writing to this + file. +modelname:: + Shows the currently set `model` option. Can be changed by writing + to this file. +init_verbs:: + The extra verbs to execute at initialization. You can add a verb by + writing to this file. Pass tree numbers, nid, verb and parameter. +hints:: + Shows hint strings for codec parsers for any use. Right now it's + not used. +reconfig:: + Triggers the codec re-configuration. When any value is written to + this file, the driver re-initialize and parses the codec tree + again. All the changes done by the sysfs entries above are taken + into account. +clear:: + Resets the codec, removes the mixer elements and PCM stuff of the + specified codec, and clear all init verbs and hints. + + +Power-Saving +~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The power-saving is a kind of auto-suspend of the device. When the +device is inactive for a certain time, the device is automatically +turned off to save the power. The time to go down is specified via +`power_save` module option, and this option can be changed dynamically +via sysfs. + +The power-saving won't work when the analog loopback is enabled on +some codecs. Make sure that you mute all unneeded signal routes when +you want the power-saving. + +The power-saving feature might cause audible click noises at each +power-down/up depending on the device. Some of them might be +solvable, but some are hard, I'm afraid. Some distros such as +openSUSE enables the power-saving feature automatically when the power +cable is unplugged. Thus, if you hear noises, suspect first the +power-saving. See /sys/modules/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to +check the current value. If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on. + + +Sending a Bug Report +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +If any model or module options don't work for your device, it's time +to send a bug report to the developers. Give the following in your +bug report: + +- Hardware vendor, product and model names +- Kernel version (and ALSA-driver version if you built externally) +- `alsa-info.sh` output; run with `--no-upload` option. See the + section below about alsa-info + +If it's a regression, at best, send alsa-info outputs of both working +and non-working kernels. This is really helpful because we can +compare the codec registers directly. + +Send a bug report either the followings: + +kernel-bugzilla:: + http://bugme.linux-foundation.org/ +alsa-devel ML:: + alsa-devel@alsa-project.org + + +DEBUG TOOLS +----------- + +This section describes some tools available for debugging HD-audio +problems. + +alsa-info +~~~~~~~~~ +The script `alsa-info.sh` is a very useful tool to gather the audio +device information. You can fetch the latest version from: + +- http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-info.sh + +Run this script as root, and it will gather the important information +such as the module lists, module parameters, proc file contents +including the codec proc files, mixer outputs and the control +elements. As default, it will store the information onto a web server +on alsa-project.org. But, if you send a bug report, it'd be better to +run with `--no-upload` option, and attach the generated file. + +There are some other useful options. See `--help` option output for +details. + + +hda-verb +~~~~~~~~ +hda-verb is a tiny program that allows you to access the HD-audio +codec directly. It executes a HD-audio codec verb directly. +This program accesses the hwdep device, thus you need to enable the +kernel config `CONFIG_SND_HDA_HWDEP=y` beforehand. + +The hda-verb program takes four arguments: the hwdep device file, the +widget NID, the verb and the parameter. When you access to the codec +on the slot 2 of the card 0, pass /dev/snd/hwC0D2 to the first +argument, typically. (However, the real path name depends on the +system.) + +The second parameter is the widget number-id to access. The third +parameter can be either a hex/digit number or a string corresponding +to a verb. Similarly, the last parameter is the value to write, or +can be a string for the parameter type. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + % hda-verb /dev/snd/hwC0D0 0x12 0x701 2 + nid = 0x12, verb = 0x701, param = 0x2 + value = 0x0 + + % hda-verb /dev/snd/hwC0D0 0x0 PARAMETERS VENDOR_ID + nid = 0x0, verb = 0xf00, param = 0x0 + value = 0x10ec0262 + + % hda-verb /dev/snd/hwC0D0 2 set_a 0xb080 + nid = 0x2, verb = 0x300, param = 0xb080 + value = 0x0 +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +Although you can issue any verbs with this program, the driver state +won't be always updated. For example, the volume values are usually +cached in the driver, and thus changing the widget amp value directly +via hda-verb won't change the mixer value. + +The hda-verb program is found in the ftp directory: + +- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/misc/ + +Also a git repository is available: + +- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/hda-verb.git + +See README file in the tarball for more details about hda-verb +program. + + +hda-analyzer +~~~~~~~~~~~~ +hda-analyzer provides a graphical interface to access the raw HD-audio +control, based on pyGTK2 binding. It's a more powerful version of +hda-verb. The program gives you a easy-to-use GUI stuff for showing +the widget information and adjusting the amp values, as well as the +proc-compatible output. + +The hda-analyzer is a part of alsa.git repository in +alsa-project.org: + +- http://git.alsa-project.org/?p=alsa.git;a=tree;f=hda-analyzer + + +hda-emu +~~~~~~~ +hda-emu is a HD-audio emulator. The main purpose of this program is +to debug an HD-audio codec without the real hardware. Thus, it +doesn't emulate the behavior with the real audio I/O, but it just +dumps the codec register changes and the ALSA-driver internal changes +at probing and operating the HD-audio driver. + +The program requires a codec proc-file to simulate. Get a proc file +for the target codec beforehand, or pick up an example codec from the +codec proc collections in the tarball. Then, run the program with the +proc file, and the hda-emu program will start parsing the codec file +and simulates the HD-audio driver: + +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + % hda-emu codecs/stac9200-dell-d820-laptop + # Parsing.. + hda_codec: Unknown model for STAC9200, using BIOS defaults + hda_codec: pin nid 08 bios pin config 40c003fa + .... +------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +The program gives you only a very dumb command-line interface. You +can get a proc-file dump at the current state, get a list of control +(mixer) elements, set/get the control element value, simulate the PCM +operation, the jack plugging simulation, etc. + +The package is found in: + +- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/misc/ + +A git repository is available: + +- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/hda-emu.git + +See README file in the tarball for more details about hda-emu +program. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5410ecc0def8955ab99810c5626cc7e156991896 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mike Frysinger Date: Thu, 6 Nov 2008 03:31:34 -0500 Subject: kbuild: introduce $(kecho) convenience echo There is a bunch of places in the build system where we do 'echo' to show some nice status lines. This means we still get output when running in silent mode. So declare a new KECHO variable that only does 'echo' when we are in a suitable verbose build mode. Signed-off-by: Mike Frysinger [sam: added Documentation] Signed-off-by: Sam Ravnborg --- Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt | 14 ++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index 7a7753321a2..51104f9194a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -383,6 +383,20 @@ more details, with real examples. to prerequisites are referenced with $(src) (because they are not generated files). + $(kecho) + echoing information to user in a rule is often a good practice + but when execution "make -s" one does not expect to see any output + except for warnings/errors. + To support this kbuild define $(kecho) which will echo out the + text following $(kecho) to stdout except if "make -s" is used. + + Example: + #arch/blackfin/boot/Makefile + $(obj)/vmImage: $(obj)/vmlinux.gz + $(call if_changed,uimage) + @$(kecho) 'Kernel: $@ is ready' + + --- 3.11 $(CC) support functions The kernel may be built with several different versions of -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1c12757c56b4c9ab5aab1f6c1248ae4ea8af3a01 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Thu, 13 Nov 2008 18:11:52 -0800 Subject: Document RCU and unloadable modules Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Reviewed-by: Lai Jiangshan Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX | 2 + Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt | 304 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 306 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX index 461481dfb7c..0f2a8d08168 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX @@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ rcuref.txt - Reference-count design for elements of lists/arrays protected by RCU rcu.txt - RCU Concepts +rcubarrier.txt + - Unloading modules that use RCU callbacks RTFP.txt - List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980. torture.txt diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..909602d409b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt @@ -0,0 +1,304 @@ +RCU and Unloadable Modules + +[Originally published in LWN Jan. 14, 2007: http://lwn.net/Articles/217484/] + +RCU (read-copy update) is a synchronization mechanism that can be thought +of as a replacement for read-writer locking (among other things), but with +very low-overhead readers that are immune to deadlock, priority inversion, +and unbounded latency. RCU read-side critical sections are delimited +by rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock(), which, in non-CONFIG_PREEMPT +kernels, generate no code whatsoever. + +This means that RCU writers are unaware of the presence of concurrent +readers, so that RCU updates to shared data must be undertaken quite +carefully, leaving an old version of the data structure in place until all +pre-existing readers have finished. These old versions are needed because +such readers might hold a reference to them. RCU updates can therefore be +rather expensive, and RCU is thus best suited for read-mostly situations. + +How can an RCU writer possibly determine when all readers are finished, +given that readers might well leave absolutely no trace of their +presence? There is a synchronize_rcu() primitive that blocks until all +pre-existing readers have completed. An updater wishing to delete an +element p from a linked list might do the following, while holding an +appropriate lock, of course: + + list_del_rcu(p); + synchronize_rcu(); + kfree(p); + +But the above code cannot be used in IRQ context -- the call_rcu() +primitive must be used instead. This primitive takes a pointer to an +rcu_head struct placed within the RCU-protected data structure and +another pointer to a function that may be invoked later to free that +structure. Code to delete an element p from the linked list from IRQ +context might then be as follows: + + list_del_rcu(p); + call_rcu(&p->rcu, p_callback); + +Since call_rcu() never blocks, this code can safely be used from within +IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows: + + static void p_callback(struct rcu_head *rp) + { + struct pstruct *p = container_of(rp, struct pstruct, rcu); + + kfree(p); + } + + +Unloading Modules That Use call_rcu() + +But what if p_callback is defined in an unloadable module? + +If we unload the module while some RCU callbacks are pending, +the CPUs executing these callbacks are going to be severely +disappointed when they are later invoked, as fancifully depicted at +http://lwn.net/images/ns/kernel/rcu-drop.jpg. + +We could try placing a synchronize_rcu() in the module-exit code path, +but this is not sufficient. Although synchronize_rcu() does wait for a +grace period to elapse, it does not wait for the callbacks to complete. + +One might be tempted to try several back-to-back synchronize_rcu() +calls, but this is still not guaranteed to work. If there is a very +heavy RCU-callback load, then some of the callbacks might be deferred +in order to allow other processing to proceed. Such deferral is required +in realtime kernels in order to avoid excessive scheduling latencies. + + +rcu_barrier() + +We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive. This primitive is similar +to synchronize_rcu(), but instead of waiting solely for a grace +period to elapse, it also waits for all outstanding RCU callbacks to +complete. Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows: + + 1. Prevent any new RCU callbacks from being posted. + 2. Execute rcu_barrier(). + 3. Allow the module to be unloaded. + +Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()? + +The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier in its exit function +as follows: + + 1 static void + 2 rcu_torture_cleanup(void) + 3 { + 4 int i; + 5 + 6 fullstop = 1; + 7 if (shuffler_task != NULL) { + 8 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_shuffle task"); + 9 kthread_stop(shuffler_task); +10 } +11 shuffler_task = NULL; +12 +13 if (writer_task != NULL) { +14 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_writer task"); +15 kthread_stop(writer_task); +16 } +17 writer_task = NULL; +18 +19 if (reader_tasks != NULL) { +20 for (i = 0; i < nrealreaders; i++) { +21 if (reader_tasks[i] != NULL) { +22 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( +23 "Stopping rcu_torture_reader task"); +24 kthread_stop(reader_tasks[i]); +25 } +26 reader_tasks[i] = NULL; +27 } +28 kfree(reader_tasks); +29 reader_tasks = NULL; +30 } +31 rcu_torture_current = NULL; +32 +33 if (fakewriter_tasks != NULL) { +34 for (i = 0; i < nfakewriters; i++) { +35 if (fakewriter_tasks[i] != NULL) { +36 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( +37 "Stopping rcu_torture_fakewriter task"); +38 kthread_stop(fakewriter_tasks[i]); +39 } +40 fakewriter_tasks[i] = NULL; +41 } +42 kfree(fakewriter_tasks); +43 fakewriter_tasks = NULL; +44 } +45 +46 if (stats_task != NULL) { +47 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_stats task"); +48 kthread_stop(stats_task); +49 } +50 stats_task = NULL; +51 +52 /* Wait for all RCU callbacks to fire. */ +53 rcu_barrier(); +54 +55 rcu_torture_stats_print(); /* -After- the stats thread is stopped! */ +56 +57 if (cur_ops->cleanup != NULL) +58 cur_ops->cleanup(); +59 if (atomic_read(&n_rcu_torture_error)) +60 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: FAILURE"); +61 else +62 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: SUCCESS"); +63 } + +Line 6 sets a global variable that prevents any RCU callbacks from +re-posting themselves. This will not be necessary in most cases, since +RCU callbacks rarely include calls to call_rcu(). However, the rcutorture +module is an exception to this rule, and therefore needs to set this +global variable. + +Lines 7-50 stop all the kernel tasks associated with the rcutorture +module. Therefore, once execution reaches line 53, no more rcutorture +RCU callbacks will be posted. The rcu_barrier() call on line 53 waits +for any pre-existing callbacks to complete. + +Then lines 55-62 print status and do operation-specific cleanup, and +then return, permitting the module-unload operation to be completed. + +Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might + be required? + +Your module might have additional complications. For example, if your +module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all +the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining +RCU callbacks to complete. + + +Implementing rcu_barrier() + +Dipankar Sarma's implementation of rcu_barrier() makes use of the fact +that RCU callbacks are never reordered once queued on one of the per-CPU +queues. His implementation queues an RCU callback on each of the per-CPU +callback queues, and then waits until they have all started executing, at +which point, all earlier RCU callbacks are guaranteed to have completed. + +The original code for rcu_barrier() was as follows: + + 1 void rcu_barrier(void) + 2 { + 3 BUG_ON(in_interrupt()); + 4 /* Take cpucontrol mutex to protect against CPU hotplug */ + 5 mutex_lock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); + 6 init_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); + 7 atomic_set(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count, 0); + 8 on_each_cpu(rcu_barrier_func, NULL, 0, 1); + 9 wait_for_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); +10 mutex_unlock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); +11 } + +Line 3 verifies that the caller is in process context, and lines 5 and 10 +use rcu_barrier_mutex to ensure that only one rcu_barrier() is using the +global completion and counters at a time, which are initialized on lines +6 and 7. Line 8 causes each CPU to invoke rcu_barrier_func(), which is +shown below. Note that the final "1" in on_each_cpu()'s argument list +ensures that all the calls to rcu_barrier_func() will have completed +before on_each_cpu() returns. Line 9 then waits for the completion. + +This code was rewritten in 2008 to support rcu_barrier_bh() and +rcu_barrier_sched() in addition to the original rcu_barrier(). + +The rcu_barrier_func() runs on each CPU, where it invokes call_rcu() +to post an RCU callback, as follows: + + 1 static void rcu_barrier_func(void *notused) + 2 { + 3 int cpu = smp_processor_id(); + 4 struct rcu_data *rdp = &per_cpu(rcu_data, cpu); + 5 struct rcu_head *head; + 6 + 7 head = &rdp->barrier; + 8 atomic_inc(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count); + 9 call_rcu(head, rcu_barrier_callback); +10 } + +Lines 3 and 4 locate RCU's internal per-CPU rcu_data structure, +which contains the struct rcu_head that needed for the later call to +call_rcu(). Line 7 picks up a pointer to this struct rcu_head, and line +8 increments a global counter. This counter will later be decremented +by the callback. Line 9 then registers the rcu_barrier_callback() on +the current CPU's queue. + +The rcu_barrier_callback() function simply atomically decrements the +rcu_barrier_cpu_count variable and finalizes the completion when it +reaches zero, as follows: + + 1 static void rcu_barrier_callback(struct rcu_head *notused) + 2 { + 3 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count)) + 4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion); + 5 } + +Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes + immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the + value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations + are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in + rcu_barrier() returning prematurely? + + +rcu_barrier() Summary + +The rcu_barrier() primitive has seen relatively little use, since most +code using RCU is in the core kernel rather than in modules. However, if +you are using RCU from an unloadable module, you need to use rcu_barrier() +so that your module may be safely unloaded. + + +Answers to Quick Quizzes + +Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()? + +Answer: Since there is no call_srcu(), there can be no outstanding SRCU + callbacks. Therefore, there is no need to wait for them. + +Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might + be required? + +Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally + implemented for module unloading. Nikita Danilov was using + RCU in a filesystem, which resulted in a similar situation at + filesystem-unmount time. Dipankar Sarma coded up rcu_barrier() + in response, so that Nikita could invoke it during the + filesystem-unmount process. + + Much later, yours truly hit the RCU module-unload problem when + implementing rcutorture, and found that rcu_barrier() solves + this problem as well. + +Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes + immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the + value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations + are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in + rcu_barrier() returning prematurely? + +Answer: This cannot happen. The reason is that on_each_cpu() has its last + argument, the wait flag, set to "1". This flag is passed through + to smp_call_function() and further to smp_call_function_on_cpu(), + causing this latter to spin until the cross-CPU invocation of + rcu_barrier_func() has completed. This by itself would prevent + a grace period from completing on non-CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, + since each CPU must undergo a context switch (or other quiescent + state) before the grace period can complete. However, this is + of no use in CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels. + + Therefore, on_each_cpu() disables preemption across its call + to smp_call_function() and also across the local call to + rcu_barrier_func(). This prevents the local CPU from context + switching, again preventing grace periods from completing. This + means that all CPUs have executed rcu_barrier_func() before + the first rcu_barrier_callback() can possibly execute, in turn + preventing rcu_barrier_cpu_count from prematurely reaching zero. + + Currently, -rt implementations of RCU keep but a single global + queue for RCU callbacks, and thus do not suffer from this + problem. However, when the -rt RCU eventually does have per-CPU + callback queues, things will have to change. One simple change + is to add an rcu_read_lock() before line 8 of rcu_barrier() + and an rcu_read_unlock() after line 8 of this same function. If + you can think of a better change, please let me know! -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2884f00b94be73a6a7875bada739bf9bb2f9a1b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Pavel Machek Date: Wed, 26 Nov 2008 17:15:21 +0100 Subject: Document handling of bad memory MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Document how to deal with bad memory reported with memtest. Signed-off-by: Jan-Simon Möller Signed-off-by: Pavel Machek Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/bad_memory.txt | 45 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 45 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/bad_memory.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/bad_memory.txt b/Documentation/bad_memory.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..df841621320 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/bad_memory.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +March 2008 +Jan-Simon Moeller, dl9pf@gmx.de + + +How to deal with bad memory e.g. reported by memtest86+ ? +######################################################### + +There are three possibilities I know of: + +1) Reinsert/swap the memory modules + +2) Buy new modules (best!) or try to exchange the memory + if you have spare-parts + +3) Use BadRAM or memmap + +This Howto is about number 3) . + + +BadRAM +###### +BadRAM is the actively developed and available as kernel-patch +here: http://rick.vanrein.org/linux/badram/ + +For more details see the BadRAM documentation. + +memmap +###### + +memmap is already in the kernel and usable as kernel-parameter at +boot-time. Its syntax is slightly strange and you may need to +calculate the values by yourself! + +Syntax to exclude a memory area (see kernel-parameters.txt for details): +memmap=$
+ +Example: memtest86+ reported here errors at address 0x18691458, 0x18698424 and + some others. All had 0x1869xxxx in common, so I chose a pattern of + 0x18690000,0xffff0000. + +With the numbers of the example above: +memmap=64K$0x18690000 + or +memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4e7c4d7b6d980264194c2aecbbb1e1e4c7302b63 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 4 Dec 2008 10:25:37 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add reference to HD-Audio.txt in ALSA-Configuration.txt Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 3cd2ad95817..3f2bdd533c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -778,6 +778,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. specify a certain model in such a case. There are different models depending on the codec chip. + See Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt for some details. + Model name Description ---------- ----------- ALC880 -- cgit v1.2.3 From b74ca3a896b9ab5f952bc440154758e708c48884 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wang Chen Date: Mon, 8 Dec 2008 01:14:16 -0800 Subject: netdevice: Kill netdev->priv This is the last shoot of this series. After I removing all directly reference of netdev->priv, I am killing "priv" of "struct net_device" and fixing relative comments/docs. Anyone will not be allowed to reference netdev->priv directly. If you want to reference the memory of private data, use netdev_priv() instead. If the private data is not allocted when alloc_netdev(), use netdev->ml_priv to point that memory after you creating that private data. Signed-off-by: Wang Chen Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/driver.txt | 2 +- Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt | 2 +- 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt index ea72d2e66ca..03283daa64f 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/driver.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Transmit path guidelines: static int drv_hard_start_xmit(struct sk_buff *skb, struct net_device *dev) { - struct drv *dp = dev->priv; + struct drv *dp = netdev_priv(dev); lock_tx(dp); ... diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt index d0f71fc7f78..a2ab6a0b116 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ There are routines in net_init.c to handle the common cases of alloc_etherdev, alloc_netdev. These reserve extra space for driver private data which gets freed when the network device is freed. If separately allocated data is attached to the network device -(dev->priv) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that. +(netdev_priv(dev)) then it is up to the module exit handler to free that. MTU === -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0049bab5e765aa74cf767a834fa336e19453fc5e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Mon, 8 Dec 2008 01:18:05 -0800 Subject: dccp: Remove obsolete parts of the old CCID interface The TX/RX CCIDs of the minisock are now redundant: similar to the Ack Vector case, their value equals initially that of the sysctl, but at the end of feature negotiation may be something different. The old interface removed by this patch thus has been replaced by the newer interface to dynamically query the currently loaded CCIDs. Also removed are the constructors for the TX CCID and the RX CCID, since the switch "rx <-> non-rx" is done by the handler in minisocks.c (and the handler is the only place in the code where CCIDs are loaded). Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 610083ff73f..a203d132dbe 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -140,10 +140,11 @@ send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). tx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. + Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the + choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. rx_ccid = 2 - Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection. + Default CCID for the receiver-sender half-connection; see tx_ccid. seq_window = 100 The initial sequence window (sec. 7.5.2). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4098dce5be537a157eed4a326efd464109825b8b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Mon, 8 Dec 2008 01:18:37 -0800 Subject: dccp: Remove manual influence on NDP Count feature Updating the NDP count feature is handled automatically now: * for CCID-2 it is disabled, since the code does not use NDP counts; * for CCID-3 it is enabled, as NDP counts are used to determine loss lengths. Allowing the user to change NDP values leads to unpredictable and failing behaviour, since it is then possible to disable NDP counts even when they are needed (e.g. in CCID-3). This means that only those user settings are sensible that agree with the values for Send NDP Count implied by the choice of CCID. But those settings are already activated by the feature negotiation (CCID dependency tracking), hence this form of support is redundant. At startup the initialisation of the NDP count feature uses the default value of 0, which is done implicitly by the zeroing-out of the socket when it is allocated. If the choice of CCID or feature negotiation enables NDP count, this will then be updated via the NDP activation handler. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index a203d132dbe..1403745ab40 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ndp = 1 - Whether or not to send NDP count options (sec. 7.7.2). - send_ackvec = 1 Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6fdd34d43bff8be9bb925b49d87a0ee144d2ab07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gerrit Renker Date: Mon, 8 Dec 2008 01:19:06 -0800 Subject: dccp ccid-2: Phase out the use of boolean Ack Vector sysctl This removes the use of the sysctl and the minisock variable for the Send Ack Vector feature, as it now is handled fully dynamically via feature negotiation (i.e. when CCID-2 is enabled, Ack Vectors are automatically enabled as per RFC 4341, 4.). Using a sysctl in parallel to this implementation would open the door to crashes, since much of the code relies on tests of the boolean minisock / sysctl variable. Thus, this patch replaces all tests of type if (dccp_msk(sk)->dccpms_send_ack_vector) /* ... */ with if (dp->dccps_hc_rx_ackvec != NULL) /* ... */ The dccps_hc_rx_ackvec is allocated by the dccp_hdlr_ackvec() when feature negotiation concluded that Ack Vectors are to be used on the half-connection. Otherwise, it is NULL (due to dccp_init_sock/dccp_create_openreq_child), so that the test is a valid one. The activation handler for Ack Vectors is called as soon as the feature negotiation has concluded at the * server when the Ack marking the transition RESPOND => OPEN arrives; * client after it has sent its ACK, marking the transition REQUEST => PARTOPEN. Adding the sequence number of the Response packet to the Ack Vector has been removed, since (a) connection establishment implies that the Response has been received; (b) the CCIDs only look at packets received in the (PART)OPEN state, i.e. this entry will always be ignored; (c) it can not be used for anything useful - to detect loss for instance, only packets received after the loss can serve as pseudo-dupacks. There was a FIXME to change the error code when dccp_ackvec_add() fails. I removed this after finding out that: * the check whether ackno < ISN is already made earlier, * this Response is likely the 1st packet with an Ackno that the client gets, * so when dccp_ackvec_add() fails, the reason is likely not a packet error. Signed-off-by: Gerrit Renker Acked-by: Ian McDonald Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/networking/dccp.txt | 3 --- 1 file changed, 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index 1403745ab40..7a3bb1abb83 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ retries2 importance for retransmitted acknowledgments and feature negotiation, data packets are never retransmitted. Analogue of tcp_retries2. -send_ackvec = 1 - Whether or not to send Ack Vector options (sec. 11.5). - tx_ccid = 2 Default CCID for the sender-receiver half-connection. Depending on the choice of CCID, the Send Ack Vector feature is enabled automatically. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 94d6a5f7341ebaff53d4e41cc81fab37f0d9fbed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Serge E. Hallyn" Date: Mon, 8 Dec 2008 15:52:21 -0600 Subject: user namespaces: document CFS behavior Documented the currently bogus state of support for CFS user groups with user namespaces. In particular, all users in a user namespace should be children of the user which created the user namespace. This is yet to be implemented. Signed-off-by: Serge E. Hallyn Acked-by: Dhaval Giani Signed-off-by: Serge E. Hallyn Signed-off-by: James Morris --- Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt | 21 +++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt index eb471c7a905..8398ca4ff4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt @@ -273,3 +273,24 @@ task groups and modify their CPU share using the "cgroups" pseudo filesystem. # #Launch gmplayer (or your favourite movie player) # echo > multimedia/tasks + +8. Implementation note: user namespaces + +User namespaces are intended to be hierarchical. But they are currently +only partially implemented. Each of those has ramifications for CFS. + +First, since user namespaces are hierarchical, the /sys/kernel/uids +presentation is inadequate. Eventually we will likely want to use sysfs +tagging to provide private views of /sys/kernel/uids within each user +namespace. + +Second, the hierarchical nature is intended to support completely +unprivileged use of user namespaces. So if using user groups, then +we want the users in a user namespace to be children of the user +who created it. + +That is currently unimplemented. So instead, every user in a new +user namespace will receive 1024 shares just like any user in the +initial user namespace. Note that at the moment creation of a new +user namespace requires each of CAP_SYS_ADMIN, CAP_SETUID, and +CAP_SETGID. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 30bc4481de890e97dc001ee123761d89638cbc50 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Tue, 9 Dec 2008 08:23:45 +0100 Subject: ALSA: Updates about bug-reporting in ALSA-Configuration.txt Updated the information about bug-reporting for HD-audio. Mentioned alsa-info.sh and kernel bugzilla. Removed ALSA BTS address not to flood the unhandled reports any more. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 11 +++++++---- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 3f2bdd533c3..1c7334a3054 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1091,8 +1091,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. "codec-patch". It's sometimes good for testing and debugging. If the default configuration doesn't work and one of the above - matches with your device, report it together with the PCI - subsystem ID (output of "lspci -nv") to ALSA BTS or alsa-devel + matches with your device, report it together with alsa-info.sh + output (with --no-upload option) to kernel bugzilla or alsa-devel ML (see the section "Links and Addresses"). power_save and power_save_controller options are for power-saving @@ -2409,8 +2409,11 @@ Links and Addresses ALSA project homepage http://www.alsa-project.org - ALSA Bug Tracking System - https://bugtrack.alsa-project.org/bugs/ + Kernel Bugzilla + http://bugzilla.kernel.org/ ALSA Developers ML mailto:alsa-devel@alsa-project.org + + alsa-info.sh script + http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-info.sh -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8e26e1d7bce73acf6f995a4d252610e46ee831a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Artem Bityutskiy Date: Tue, 9 Dec 2008 14:41:44 +0200 Subject: UBI: document UBI ioctls Update the ioctl-numbers.txt file, add UBI and DVB there (because they use the same ioctl numbers). Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index b880ce5dbd3..82469917443 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'M' all linux/soundcard.h 'N' 00-1F drivers/usb/scanner.h +'O' 00-02 include/mtd/ubi-user.h UBI 'P' all linux/soundcard.h 'Q' all linux/soundcard.h 'R' 00-1F linux/random.h @@ -142,6 +143,9 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'n' 00-7F linux/ncp_fs.h 'n' E0-FF video/matrox.h matroxfb 'o' 00-1F fs/ocfs2/ocfs2_fs.h OCFS2 +'o' 00-03 include/mtd/ubi-user.h conflict! (OCFS2 and UBI overlaps) +'o' 40-41 include/mtd/ubi-user.h UBI +'o' 01-A1 include/linux/dvb/*.h DVB 'p' 00-0F linux/phantom.h conflict! (OpenHaptics needs this) 'p' 00-3F linux/mc146818rtc.h conflict! 'p' 40-7F linux/nvram.h -- cgit v1.2.3 From d2afbe78a2922929ad44882d3583d938b9949a30 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Wed, 10 Dec 2008 09:28:15 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Update documentation Minor typo-fixes and improvements on HD-Audio.txt. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 159 ++++++++++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 83 insertions(+), 76 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index e758f24017b..ca8187de52d 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -9,22 +9,25 @@ GENERAL HD-audio is the new standard on-board audio component on modern PCs after AC97. Although Linux has been supporting HD-audio since long time ago, there are often problems with new machines. A part of the -problem is broken BIOS, and rest is the driver implementation. This -document explains the trouble-shooting and debugging methods for the -HD-audio hardware. +problem is broken BIOS, and the rest is the driver implementation. +This document explains the brief trouble-shooting and debugging +methods for the HD-audio hardware. The HD-audio component consists of two parts: the controller chip and the codec chips on the HD-audio bus. Linux provides a single driver -for all controllers, snd-hda-intel. Since the HD-audio controllers -are supposed to be compatible, the single snd-hda-driver should work -in most cases. But, not surprisingly, there are known bugs and issues -specific to each controller type. The snd-hda-intel driver has a -bunch of workarounds for these as described below. +for all controllers, snd-hda-intel. Although the driver name contains +a word of a well-known harware vendor, it's not specific to it but for +all controller chips by other companies. Since the HD-audio +controllers are supposed to be compatible, the single snd-hda-driver +should work in most cases. But, not surprisingly, there are known +bugs and issues specific to each controller type. The snd-hda-intel +driver has a bunch of workarounds for these as described below. A controller may have multiple codecs. Usually you have one audio -codec and optionally one modem codec. In some cases, there can be -multiple audio codecs, e.g. for analog and digital outputs, but the -driver might not work properly. +codec and optionally one modem codec. In theory, there might be +multiple audio codecs, e.g. for analog and digital outputs, and the +driver might not work properly because of conflict of mixer elements. +This should be fixed in future if such hardware really exists. The snd-hda-intel driver has several different codec parsers depending on the codec. It has a generic parser as a fallback, but this @@ -48,15 +51,16 @@ DMA-Position Problem The most common problem of the controller is the inaccurate DMA pointer reporting. The DMA pointer for playback and capture can be read in two ways, either via a LPIB register or via a position-buffer -map. As default the driver tries to reads from the io-mapped -position-buffer, and falls back to LPIB if it appears unupdated. -However, this detection isn't perfect on some devices. In such a -case, you can change the default method via `position_fix` option. +map. As default the driver tries to read from the io-mapped +position-buffer, and falls back to LPIB if the position-buffer appears +dead. However, this detection isn't perfect on some devices. In such +a case, you can change the default method via `position_fix` option. `position_fix=1` means to use LPIB method explicitly. `position_fix=2` means to use the position-buffer. 0 is the default -value, the automatic check. If you get a problem of repeated sounds, -this option might help. +value, the automatic check and fallback to LPIB as described in the +above. If you get a problem of repeated sounds, this option might +help. In addition to that, every controller is known to be broken regarding the wake-up timing. It wakes up a few samples before actually @@ -67,9 +71,9 @@ via `bdl_pos_adj` option. When `bdl_pos_adj` is a negative value (as default), it's assigned to an appropriate value depending on the controller chip. For Intel -chip, it'd be 1 while it'd be 32 for others. Usually this works. +chips, it'd be 1 while it'd be 32 for others. Usually this works. Only in case it doesn't work and you get warning messages, you should -change to other values. +change this parameter to other values. Codec-Probing Problem @@ -77,13 +81,13 @@ Codec-Probing Problem A less often but a more severe problem is the codec probing. When BIOS reports the available codec slots wrongly, the driver gets confused and tries to access the non-existing codec slot. This often -results in the total screw-up, and destruct the further communication -with the codec chips. The symptom appears usually as the error -message like: +results in the total screw-up, and destructs the further communication +with the codec chips. The symptom appears usually as error messages +like: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to polling mode: \ + hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to polling mode: last cmd=0x12345678 - hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to single_cmd mode: \ + hda_intel: azx_get_response timeout, switching to single_cmd mode: last cmd=0x12345678 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ @@ -98,9 +102,9 @@ accessing a non-existing codec slot. Thus, if the second error message appears, try to narrow the probed codec slots via `probe_mask` option. It's a bitmask, and each bit -corresponding to the codec slot. For example, to probe only the -first slot, pass `probe_mask=1`. For the first and the third slots, -pass `probe_mask=5` (where 5 = 1 | 4), and so on. +corresponds to the codec slot. For example, to probe only the first +slot, pass `probe_mask=1`. For the first and the third slots, pass +`probe_mask=5` (where 5 = 1 | 4), and so on. Since 2.6.29 kernel, the driver has a more robust probing method, so this error might happen rarely, though. @@ -119,10 +123,10 @@ HD-AUDIO CODEC Model Option ~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The most common problems with the HD-audio driver is the unsupported -codec features or the mismatched device configuration. Most of -codec-specific code has several preset models, either to override the -BIOS setup or to provide more comprehensive features. +The most common problem regarding the HD-audio driver is the +unsupported codec features or the mismatched device configuration. +Most of codec-specific code has several preset models, either to +override the BIOS setup or to provide more comprehensive features. The driver checks PCI SSID and looks through the static configuration table until any matching entry is found. If you have a new machine, @@ -130,44 +134,44 @@ you may see a message like below: ------------------------------------------------------------------------ hda_codec: Unknown model for ALC880, trying auto-probe from BIOS... ------------------------------------------------------------------------ -Even if you such a message, DON'T PANIC. Take a deep breath (and keep -your towel). First of all, it's an informational message, no warning, -no error. This means that the PCI SSID of your device isn't listed in -the known preset model list. But, this doesn't mean that the driver -is broken. Many codec-driver provides the automatic configuration -based on the BIOS setup. +Even if you see such a message, DON'T PANIC. Take a deep breath and +keep your towel. First of all, it's an informational message, no +warning, no error. This means that the PCI SSID of your device isn't +listed in the known preset model (white-)list. But, this doesn't mean +that the driver is broken. Many codec-drivers provide the automatic +configuration mechanism based on the BIOS setup. The HD-audio codec has usually "pin" widgets, and BIOS sets the default configuration of each pin, which indicates the location, the connection type, the jack color, etc. The HD-audio driver can guess the right connection judging from these default configuration values. -However -- some codec support codes, such as patch_analog.c, don't +However -- some codec-support codes, such as patch_analog.c, don't support the automatic probing (yet as of 2.6.28). And, BIOS is often, yes, pretty often broken. It sets up wrong values and screws up the driver. -The preset model is provided basically to override such a situation. -When the matching preset model is found in the list, the driver +The preset model is provided basically to overcome such a situation. +When the matching preset model is found in the white-list, the driver assumes the static configuration of that preset and builds the mixer -and PCM based on the static information. Thus, if you have a newer -machine with a slightly different PCI SSID from the existing one, you -may have a good chance to re-use the same model. You can pass the -`model` option to specify the preset model instead of PCI SSID -look-up. +elements and PCM streams based on the static information. Thus, if +you have a newer machine with a slightly different PCI SSID from the +existing one, you may have a good chance to re-use the same model. +You can pass the `model` option to specify the preset model instead of +PCI SSID look-up. What `model` option values are available depends on the codec chip. Check your codec chip from the codec proc file (see "Codec Proc-File" section below). It will show the vendor/product name of your codec -chip. Then, see Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt file. -In the section of HD-audio driver, you can find a list of codecs and -`model` options belonging to each codec. For example, for Realtek +chip. Then, see Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +file, the section of HD-audio driver. You can find a list of codecs +and `model` options belonging to each codec. For example, for Realtek ALC262 codec chip, pass `model=ultra` for devices that are compatible with Samsung Q1 Ultra. -Thus, the first thing you can do for any brand-new, unsupported -HD-audio hardware is to check HD-audio codec and several different -`model` option values. If you have a luck, some of them might suit -with your device well. +Thus, the first thing you can do for any brand-new, unsupported and +non-working HD-audio hardware is to check HD-audio codec and several +different `model` option values. If you have a luck, some of them +might suit with your device well. Some codecs such as ALC880 have a special model option `model=test`. This configures the driver to provide as many mixer controls as @@ -188,12 +192,14 @@ One of the most frequent (and obvious) bugs with HD-audio is the silent output from either or both of a built-in speaker and a headphone jack. In general, you should try a headphone output at first. A speaker output often requires more additional controls like -the amplifier. Thus a headphone output has a slightly better chance. +the external amplifier bits. Thus a headphone output has a slightly +better chance. Before making a bug report, double-check whether the mixer is set up correctly. The recent version of snd-hda-intel driver provides mostly -"Master" volume control as well as "Front" volume. In addition, there -are individual "Headphone" and "Speaker" controls. +"Master" volume control as well as "Front" volume (where Front +indicates the front-channels). In addition, there can be individual +"Headphone" and "Speaker" controls. Ditto for the speaker output. There can be "External Amplifier" switch on some codecs. Turn on this if present. @@ -214,7 +220,7 @@ following: external amplifier. This can be set usually via EAPD verb or a certain GPIO. If the codec pin supports EAPD, you have a better chance via SET_EAPD_BTL verb (0x70c). On others, GPIO pin (mostly - it's either GPIO0 or GPIO1) can turn on/off EAPD. + it's either GPIO0 or GPIO1) may turn on/off EAPD. - Some Realtek codecs require special vendor-specific coefficients to turn on the amplifier. See patch_realtek.c. - IDT codecs may have extra power-enable/disable controls on each @@ -227,29 +233,29 @@ following: Capture Problems ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The capture problems are often missing setups of mixers. Thus, before -submitting a bug report, make sure that you set up the mixer -correctly. For example, both "Capture Volume" and "Capture Switch" -have to be set properly in addition to the right "Capture Source" or -"Input Source" selection. Some devices have "Mic Boost" volume or -switch. +The capture problems are often because of missing setups of mixers. +Thus, before submitting a bug report, make sure that you set up the +mixer correctly. For example, both "Capture Volume" and "Capture +Switch" have to be set properly in addition to the right "Capture +Source" or "Input Source" selection. Some devices have "Mic Boost" +volume or switch. When the PCM device is opened via "default" PCM (without pulse-audio plugin), you'll likely have "Digital Capture Volume" control as well. This is provided for the extra gain/attenuation of the signal in software, especially for the inputs without the hardware volume control such as digital microphones. Unless really needed, this -should be set to exactly 50%, corresponding to 0dB. When you use "hw" -PCM, i.e., a raw access PCM, this control will have no influence, -though. +should be set to exactly 50%, corresponding to 0dB -- neither extra +gain nor attenuation. When you use "hw" PCM, i.e., a raw access PCM, +this control will have no influence, though. It's known that some codecs / devices have fairly bad analog circuits, and the recorded sound contains a certain DC-offset. This is no bug of the driver. -Most of modern laptops have no analog CD-input connection. Thus, the +Most of modern laptops have no analog CD-input connection. Thus, the recording from CD input won't work in many cases although the driver -provides it as the capture source. +provides it as the capture source. Use CDDA instead. The automatic switching of the built-in and external mic per plugging is implemented on some codec models but not on every model. Partly @@ -264,7 +270,7 @@ to fight again the evil, try debugging via hitting the raw HD-audio codec verbs to the device. Some tools are available: hda-emu and hda-analyzer. The detailed description is found in the sections below. You'd need to enable hwdep for using these tools. See "Kernel -Configuration". +Configuration" section. OTHER ISSUES @@ -284,15 +290,16 @@ sure to want it. Don't forget to turn on the appropriate `CONFIG_SND_HDA_CODEC_*` options. Note that each of them corresponds to the codec chip, not the controller chip. Thus, even if lspci shows the Nvidia controller, -you may choose the option for other vendors. If you are unsure, just -choose all yes. +you may need to choose the option for other vendors. If you are +unsure, just select all yes. `CONFIG_SND_HDA_HWDEP` is a useful option for debugging the driver. When this is enabled, the driver creates hardware-dependent devices (one per each codec), and you have a raw access to the device via -hda-verb program. For example, `hwC0D2` will be created for the card -0 codec slot #2. For debug tools such as hda-verb and hda-analyzer, -the hwdep device has to be enabled. Thus, turn this on always. +these device files. For example, `hwC0D2` will be created for the +codec slot #2 of the first card (#0). For debug-tools such as +hda-verb and hda-analyzer, the hwdep device has to be enabled. +Thus, it'd be better to turn this on always. `CONFIG_SND_HDA_RECONFIG` is a new option, and this depends on the hwdep option above. When enabled, you'll have some sysfs files under @@ -436,7 +443,7 @@ details. hda-verb ~~~~~~~~ hda-verb is a tiny program that allows you to access the HD-audio -codec directly. It executes a HD-audio codec verb directly. +codec directly. You can execute a raw HD-audio codec verb with this. This program accesses the hwdep device, thus you need to enable the kernel config `CONFIG_SND_HDA_HWDEP=y` beforehand. @@ -486,7 +493,7 @@ hda-analyzer ~~~~~~~~~~~~ hda-analyzer provides a graphical interface to access the raw HD-audio control, based on pyGTK2 binding. It's a more powerful version of -hda-verb. The program gives you a easy-to-use GUI stuff for showing +hda-verb. The program gives you an easy-to-use GUI stuff for showing the widget information and adjusting the amp values, as well as the proc-compatible output. @@ -498,7 +505,7 @@ alsa-project.org: hda-emu ~~~~~~~ -hda-emu is a HD-audio emulator. The main purpose of this program is +hda-emu is an HD-audio emulator. The main purpose of this program is to debug an HD-audio codec without the real hardware. Thus, it doesn't emulate the behavior with the real audio I/O, but it just dumps the codec register changes and the ALSA-driver internal changes -- cgit v1.2.3 From 623b9f6738dee0394398564a74fdabbff00f506f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 11 Dec 2008 07:44:18 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Update HD-Audio.txt MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Fixed typos and added a section about codecgraph. Thanks to Vedran Miletić and Daniel T Chen for suggestions. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 17 +++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index ca8187de52d..ee9117eee1a 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ submit the improvement patch to the author. Direct Debugging ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ If no model option gives you a better result, and you are a touch guy -to fight again the evil, try debugging via hitting the raw HD-audio +to fight against evil, try debugging via hitting the raw HD-audio codec verbs to the device. Some tools are available: hda-emu and hda-analyzer. The detailed description is found in the sections below. You'd need to enable hwdep for using these tools. See "Kernel @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ power-down/up depending on the device. Some of them might be solvable, but some are hard, I'm afraid. Some distros such as openSUSE enables the power-saving feature automatically when the power cable is unplugged. Thus, if you hear noises, suspect first the -power-saving. See /sys/modules/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to +power-saving. See /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to check the current value. If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on. @@ -503,6 +503,19 @@ alsa-project.org: - http://git.alsa-project.org/?p=alsa.git;a=tree;f=hda-analyzer +Codecgraph +~~~~~~~~~~ +Codecgraph is a utility program to generate a graph and visualizes the +codec-node connection of a codec chip. It's especially useful when +you analyze or debug a codec without a proper datasheet. The program +parses the given codec proc file and converts to SVG via graphiz +program. + +The tarball and GIT trees are found in the web page at: + +- http://helllabs.org/codecgraph/ + + hda-emu ~~~~~~~ hda-emu is an HD-audio emulator. The main purpose of this program is -- cgit v1.2.3 From f8bbd06b17f16984328398cdecdf9302ef9bb0bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 11 Dec 2008 13:12:59 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Fix another typo in HD-Audio.txt --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index ee9117eee1a..2e4d031ea1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ submit the improvement patch to the author. Direct Debugging ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -If no model option gives you a better result, and you are a touch guy +If no model option gives you a better result, and you are a tough guy to fight against evil, try debugging via hitting the raw HD-audio codec verbs to the device. Some tools are available: hda-emu and hda-analyzer. The detailed description is found in the sections -- cgit v1.2.3 From 132bb7c0efe82fc976b06d557f5d63536cb9fdaa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Thu, 11 Dec 2008 15:39:52 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add development tree URLs in HD-audio.txt Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 22 ++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 22 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 2e4d031ea1f..642a2b01254 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -393,6 +393,28 @@ power-saving. See /sys/module/snd_hda_intel/parameters/power_save to check the current value. If it's non-zero, the feature is turned on. +Development Tree +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The latest development codes for HD-audio are found on sound git tree: + +- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tiwai/sound-2.6.git + +The master branch or for-next branches can be used as the main +development branches in general while the HD-audio specific patches +are committed in topic/hda branch. + +If you are using the latest Linus tree, it'd be better to pull the +above GIT tree onto it. If you are using the older kernels, an easy +way to try the latest ALSA code is to build from the snapshot +tarball. There are daily tarballs and the latest snapshot tarball. +All can be built just like normal alsa-driver release packages, that +is, installed via the usual spells: configure, make and make +install(-modules). See INSTALL in the package. The snapshot tarballs +are found at: + +- ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/tiwai/snapshot/ + + Sending a Bug Report ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ If any model or module options don't work for your device, it's time -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9470565579f29486f4ed0ffa50774268b64994b0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dave Jones Date: Mon, 1 Dec 2008 14:13:50 -0800 Subject: x86: remove init_mm export as planned for 2.6.26 Impact: remove deprecated export Signed-off-by: Dave Jones Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 12 ------------ 1 file changed, 12 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index c28a2ac88f9..1a8af7354e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -244,18 +244,6 @@ Who: Michael Buesch --------------------------- -What: init_mm export -When: 2.6.26 -Why: Not used in-tree. The current out-of-tree users used it to - work around problems in the CPA code which should be resolved - by now. One usecase was described to provide verification code - of the CPA operation. That's a good idea in general, but such - code / infrastructure should be in the kernel and not in some - out-of-tree driver. -Who: Thomas Gleixner - ----------------------------- - What: usedac i386 kernel parameter When: 2.6.27 Why: replaced by allowdac and no dac combination -- cgit v1.2.3 From e1286f2c686f5976e0424bb6195ece25e7a17607 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Philipp Kohlbecher Date: Sun, 14 Dec 2008 18:50:01 +0100 Subject: x86: documentation fix regarding boot protocol Impact: clarify documentation Documentation/x86/boot.txt describes payload_offset as the offset from the end of the real-mode code. In fact, it is more accurately described as the offset from the beginning of the protected-mode code, as (a) this is how it is actually calculated and (b) the padding after the real-mode code is not included in the offset. Signed-off-by: Philipp Kohlbecher Acked-by: Ian Campbell Acked-by: H. Peter Anvin Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/x86/boot.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 804d9b1a46e..fcdc62b3c3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -537,8 +537,8 @@ Type: read Offset/size: 0x248/4 Protocol: 2.08+ - If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the end of the - real-mode code to the payload. + If non-zero then this field contains the offset from the beginning + of the protected-mode code to the payload. The payload may be compressed. The format of both the compressed and uncompressed data should be determined using the standard magic -- cgit v1.2.3 From b31a1d8b41513b96e9c7ec2f68c5734cef0b26a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Andy Fleming Date: Tue, 16 Dec 2008 15:29:15 -0800 Subject: gianfar: Convert gianfar to an of_platform_driver Does the same for the accompanying MDIO driver, and then modifies the TBI configuration method. The old way used fields in einfo, which no longer exists. The new way is to create an MDIO device-tree node for each instance of gianfar, and create a tbi-handle property to associate ethernet controllers with the TBI PHYs they are connected to. Signed-off-by: Andy Fleming Signed-off-by: David S. Miller --- Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt | 12 ++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt index cf55fa4112d..7fa4b27574b 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ The MDIO is a bus to which the PHY devices are connected. For each device that exists on this bus, a child node should be created. See -the definition of the PHY node below for an example of how to define -a PHY. +the definition of the PHY node in booting-without-of.txt for an example +of how to define a PHY. Required properties: - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device @@ -21,6 +21,14 @@ Example: }; }; +* TBI Internal MDIO bus + +As of this writing, every tsec is associated with an internal TBI PHY. +This PHY is accessed through the local MDIO bus. These buses are defined +similarly to the mdio buses, except they are compatible with "fsl,gianfar-tbi". +The TBI PHYs underneath them are similar to normal PHYs, but the reg property +is considered instructive, rather than descriptive. The reg property should +be chosen so it doesn't interfere with other PHYs on the bus. * Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3b11ce7f542e415c90267b4482d4611410b468e6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mike Travis Date: Wed, 17 Dec 2008 15:21:39 -0800 Subject: x86: use possible_cpus=NUM to extend the possible cpus allowed Impact: add new boot parameter Use possible_cpus=NUM kernel parameter to extend the number of possible cpus. The ability to HOTPLUG ON cpus that are "possible" but not "present" is dealt with in a later patch. Signed-off-by: Mike Travis --- Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt | 17 +++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index 94bbc27ddd4..9d620c153b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -50,16 +50,17 @@ additional_cpus=n (*) Use this to limit hotpluggable cpus. This option sets cpu_possible_map = cpu_present_map + additional_cpus (*) Option valid only for following architectures -- x86_64, ia64 +- ia64 -ia64 and x86_64 use the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT -to determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation -should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely on the -apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't -mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this -parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map. +ia64 uses the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT to +determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation +should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely +on the apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event +BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could +use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the +cpu_possible_map. -possible_cpus=n [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus. +possible_cpus=n [s390,x86_64] use this to set hotpluggable cpus. This option sets possible_cpus bits in cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set constant even if the machine gets rebooted. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f38f1d2aa5a3520cf05da7cd6bd12fe2b0c509b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Steven Rostedt Date: Tue, 16 Dec 2008 23:06:40 -0500 Subject: trace: add a way to enable or disable the stack tracer Impact: enhancement to stack tracer The stack tracer currently is either on when configured in or off when it is not. It can not be disabled when it is configured on. (besides disabling the function tracer that it uses) This patch adds a way to enable or disable the stack tracer at run time. It defaults off on bootup, but a kernel parameter 'stacktrace' has been added to enable it on bootup. A new sysctl has been added "kernel.stack_tracer_enabled" to let the user enable or disable the stack tracer at run time. Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 2919a2e9193..edab81c1318 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -89,6 +89,7 @@ parameter is applicable: SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled. SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled. SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled. + FTRACE Function tracing enabled. TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled. USB USB support is enabled. USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled. @@ -2173,6 +2174,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file st= [HW,SCSI] SCSI tape parameters (buffers, etc.) See Documentation/scsi/st.txt. + stacktrace [FTRACE] + Enabled the stack tracer on boot up. + sti= [PARISC,HW] Format: Set the STI (builtin display/keyboard on the HP-PARISC -- cgit v1.2.3 From 64db4cfff99c04cd5f550357edcc8780f96b54a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Paul E. McKenney" Date: Thu, 18 Dec 2008 21:55:32 +0100 Subject: "Tree RCU": scalable classic RCU implementation This patch fixes a long-standing performance bug in classic RCU that results in massive internal-to-RCU lock contention on systems with more than a few hundred CPUs. Although this patch creates a separate flavor of RCU for ease of review and patch maintenance, it is intended to replace classic RCU. This patch still handles stress better than does mainline, so I am still calling it ready for inclusion. This patch is against the -tip tree. Nevertheless, experience on an actual 1000+ CPU machine would still be most welcome. Most of the changes noted below were found while creating an rcutiny (which should permit ejecting the current rcuclassic) and while doing detailed line-by-line documentation. Updates from v9 (http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/12/2/334): o Fixes from remainder of line-by-line code walkthrough, including comment spelling, initialization, undesirable narrowing due to type conversion, removing redundant memory barriers, removing redundant local-variable initialization, and removing redundant local variables. I do not believe that any of these fixes address the CPU-hotplug issues that Andi Kleen was seeing, but please do give it a whirl in case the machine is smarter than I am. A writeup from the walkthrough may be found at the following URL, in case you are suffering from terminal insomnia or masochism: http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/paulmck/tmp/rcutree-walkthrough.2008.12.16a.pdf o Made rcutree tracing use seq_file, as suggested some time ago by Lai Jiangshan. o Added a .csv variant of the rcudata debugfs trace file, to allow people having thousands of CPUs to drop the data into a spreadsheet. Tested with oocalc and gnumeric. Updated documentation to suit. Updates from v8 (http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/11/15/139): o Fix a theoretical race between grace-period initialization and force_quiescent_state() that could occur if more than three jiffies were required to carry out the grace-period initialization. Which it might, if you had enough CPUs. o Apply Ingo's printk-standardization patch. o Substitute local variables for repeated accesses to global variables. o Fix comment misspellings and redundant (but harmless) increments of ->n_rcu_pending (this latter after having explicitly added it). o Apply checkpatch fixes. Updates from v7 (http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/10/10/291): o Fixed a number of problems noted by Gautham Shenoy, including the cpu-stall-detection bug that he was having difficulty convincing me was real. ;-) o Changed cpu-stall detection to wait for ten seconds rather than three in order to reduce false positive, as suggested by Ingo Molnar. o Produced a design document (http://lwn.net/Articles/305782/). The act of writing this document uncovered a number of both theoretical and "here and now" bugs as noted below. o Fix dynticks_nesting accounting confusion, simplify WARN_ON() condition, fix kerneldoc comments, and add memory barriers in dynticks interface functions. o Add more data to tracing. o Remove unused "rcu_barrier" field from rcu_data structure. o Count calls to rcu_pending() from scheduling-clock interrupt to use as a surrogate timebase should jiffies stop counting. o Fix a theoretical race between force_quiescent_state() and grace-period initialization. Yes, initialization does have to go on for some jiffies for this race to occur, but given enough CPUs... Updates from v6 (http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/9/23/448): o Fix a number of checkpatch.pl complaints. o Apply review comments from Ingo Molnar and Lai Jiangshan on the stall-detection code. o Fix several bugs in !CONFIG_SMP builds. o Fix a misspelled config-parameter name so that RCU now announces at boot time if stall detection is configured. o Run tests on numerous combinations of configurations parameters, which after the fixes above, now build and run correctly. Updates from v5 (http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/9/15/92, bad subject line): o Fix a compiler error in the !CONFIG_FANOUT_EXACT case (blew a changeset some time ago, and finally got around to retesting this option). o Fix some tracing bugs in rcupreempt that caused incorrect totals to be printed. o I now test with a more brutal random-selection online/offline script (attached). Probably more brutal than it needs to be on the people reading it as well, but so it goes. o A number of optimizations and usability improvements: o Make rcu_pending() ignore the grace-period timeout when there is no grace period in progress. o Make force_quiescent_state() avoid going for a global lock in the case where there is no grace period in progress. o Rearrange struct fields to improve struct layout. o Make call_rcu() initiate a grace period if RCU was idle, rather than waiting for the next scheduling clock interrupt. o Invoke rcu_irq_enter() and rcu_irq_exit() only when idle, as suggested by Andi Kleen. I still don't completely trust this change, and might back it out. o Make CONFIG_RCU_TRACE be the single config variable manipulated for all forms of RCU, instead of the prior confusion. o Document tracing files and formats for both rcupreempt and rcutree. Updates from v4 for those missing v5 given its bad subject line: o Separated dynticks interface so that NMIs and irqs call separate functions, greatly simplifying it. In particular, this code no longer requires a proof of correctness. ;-) o Separated dynticks state out into its own per-CPU structure, avoiding the duplicated accounting. o The case where a dynticks-idle CPU runs an irq handler that invokes call_rcu() is now correctly handled, forcing that CPU out of dynticks-idle mode. o Review comments have been applied (thank you all!!!). For but one example, fixed the dynticks-ordering issue that Manfred pointed out, saving me much debugging. ;-) o Adjusted rcuclassic and rcupreempt to handle dynticks changes. Attached is an updated patch to Classic RCU that applies a hierarchy, greatly reducing the contention on the top-level lock for large machines. This passes 10-hour concurrent rcutorture and online-offline testing on 128-CPU ppc64 without dynticks enabled, and exposes some timekeeping bugs in presence of dynticks (exciting working on a system where "sleep 1" hangs until interrupted...), which were fixed in the 2.6.27 kernel. It is getting more reliable than mainline by some measures, so the next version will be against -tip for inclusion. See also Manfred Spraul's recent patches (or his earlier work from 2004 at http://marc.info/?l=linux-kernel&m=108546384711797&w=2). We will converge onto a common patch in the fullness of time, but are currently exploring different regions of the design space. That said, I have already gratefully stolen quite a few of Manfred's ideas. This patch provides CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT, which controls the bushiness of the RCU hierarchy. Defaults to 32 on 32-bit machines and 64 on 64-bit machines. If CONFIG_NR_CPUS is less than CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT, there is no hierarchy. By default, the RCU initialization code will adjust CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT to balance the hierarchy, so strongly NUMA architectures may choose to set CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT_EXACT to disable this balancing, allowing the hierarchy to be exactly aligned to the underlying hardware. Up to two levels of hierarchy are permitted (in addition to the root node), allowing up to 16,384 CPUs on 32-bit systems and up to 262,144 CPUs on 64-bit systems. I just know that I am going to regret saying this, but this seems more than sufficient for the foreseeable future. (Some architectures might wish to set CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT=4, which would limit such architectures to 64 CPUs. If this becomes a real problem, additional levels can be added, but I doubt that it will make a significant difference on real hardware.) In the common case, a given CPU will manipulate its private rcu_data structure and the rcu_node structure that it shares with its immediate neighbors. This can reduce both lock and memory contention by multiple orders of magnitude, which should eliminate the need for the strange manipulations that are reported to be required when running Linux on very large systems. Some shortcomings: o More bugs will probably surface as a result of an ongoing line-by-line code inspection. Patches will be provided as required. o There are probably hangs, rcutorture failures, &c. Seems quite stable on a 128-CPU machine, but that is kind of small compared to 4096 CPUs. However, seems to do better than mainline. Patches will be provided as required. o The memory footprint of this version is several KB larger than rcuclassic. A separate UP-only rcutiny patch will be provided, which will reduce the memory footprint significantly, even compared to the old rcuclassic. One such patch passes light testing, and has a memory footprint smaller even than rcuclassic. Initial reaction from various embedded guys was "it is not worth it", so am putting it aside. Credits: o Manfred Spraul for ideas, review comments, and bugs spotted, as well as some good friendly competition. ;-) o Josh Triplett, Ingo Molnar, Peter Zijlstra, Mathieu Desnoyers, Lai Jiangshan, Andi Kleen, Andy Whitcroft, and Andrew Morton for reviews and comments. o Thomas Gleixner for much-needed help with some timer issues (see patches below). o Jon M. Tollefson, Tim Pepper, Andrew Theurer, Jose R. Santos, Andy Whitcroft, Darrick Wong, Nishanth Aravamudan, Anton Blanchard, Dave Kleikamp, and Nathan Lynch for keeping machines alive despite my heavy abuse^Wtesting. Signed-off-by: Paul E. McKenney Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar --- Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX | 2 + Documentation/RCU/trace.txt | 413 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 415 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/RCU/trace.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX index 461481dfb7c..7dc0695a8f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX @@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ RTFP.txt - List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980. torture.txt - RCU Torture Test Operation (CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST) +trace.txt + - CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs files and formats UP.txt - RCU on Uniprocessor Systems whatisRCU.txt diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..068848240a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -0,0 +1,413 @@ +CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats + + +The rcupreempt and rcutree implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace +output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for +debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. +Note that the rcuclassic implementation of RCU does not provide debugfs +trace output. + +The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats for +preemptable RCU (rcupreempt) and hierarchical RCU (rcutree). + + +Preemptable RCU debugfs Files and Formats + +This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the +top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcuctrs (which displays the per-CPU +counters used by preemptable RCU) rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period +counters), and rcu/rcustats (which internal counters for debugging RCU). + +The output of "cat rcu/rcuctrs" looks as follows: + +CPU last cur F M + 0 5 -5 0 0 + 1 -1 0 0 0 + 2 0 1 0 0 + 3 0 1 0 0 + 4 0 1 0 0 + 5 0 1 0 0 + 6 0 2 0 0 + 7 0 -1 0 0 + 8 0 1 0 0 +ggp = 26226, state = waitzero + +The per-CPU fields are as follows: + +o "CPU" gives the CPU number. Offline CPUs are not displayed. + +o "last" gives the value of the counter that is being decremented + for the current grace period phase. In the example above, + the counters sum to 4, indicating that there are still four + RCU read-side critical sections still running that started + before the last counter flip. + +o "cur" gives the value of the counter that is currently being + both incremented (by rcu_read_lock()) and decremented (by + rcu_read_unlock()). In the example above, the counters sum to + 1, indicating that there is only one RCU read-side critical section + still running that started after the last counter flip. + +o "F" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to acknowledge + a counter flip. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any, + which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than + "waitack". + +o "M" indicates whether RCU is waiting for this CPU to execute a + memory barrier. In the above example, RCU is not waiting on any, + which is consistent with the state being "waitzero" rather than + "waitmb". + +o "ggp" is the global grace-period counter. + +o "state" is the RCU state, which can be one of the following: + + o "idle": there is no grace period in progress. + + o "waitack": RCU just incremented the global grace-period + counter, which has the effect of reversing the roles of + the "last" and "cur" counters above, and is waiting for + all the CPUs to acknowledge the flip. Once the flip has + been acknowledged, CPUs will no longer be incrementing + what are now the "last" counters, so that their sum will + decrease monotonically down to zero. + + o "waitzero": RCU is waiting for the sum of the "last" counters + to decrease to zero. + + o "waitmb": RCU is waiting for each CPU to execute a memory + barrier, which ensures that instructions from a given CPU's + last RCU read-side critical section cannot be reordered + with instructions following the memory-barrier instruction. + +The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows: + +oldggp=48870 newggp=48873 + +Note that reading from this file provokes a synchronize_rcu(). The +"oldggp" value is that of "ggp" from rcu/rcuctrs above, taken before +executing the synchronize_rcu(), and the "newggp" value is also the +"ggp" value, but taken after the synchronize_rcu() command returns. + + +The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows: + +na=1337955 nl=40 wa=1337915 wl=44 da=1337871 dl=0 dr=1337871 di=1337871 +1=50989 e1=6138 i1=49722 ie1=82 g1=49640 a1=315203 ae1=265563 a2=49640 +z1=1401244 ze1=1351605 z2=49639 m1=5661253 me1=5611614 m2=49639 + +These are counters tracking internal preemptable-RCU events, however, +some of them may be useful for debugging algorithms using RCU. In +particular, the "nl", "wl", and "dl" values track the number of RCU +callbacks in various states. The fields are as follows: + +o "na" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been enqueued + since boot. + +o "nl" is the number of RCU callbacks waiting for the previous + grace period to end so that they can start waiting on the next + grace period. + +o "wa" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have started waiting + for a grace period since boot. "na" should be roughly equal to + "nl" plus "wa". + +o "wl" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting for their + grace period to end. + +o "da" is the total number of RCU callbacks whose grace periods + have completed since boot. "wa" should be roughly equal to + "wl" plus "da". + +o "dr" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been removed + from the list of callbacks ready to invoke. "dr" should be roughly + equal to "da". + +o "di" is the total number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked + since boot. "di" should be roughly equal to "da", though some + early versions of preemptable RCU had a bug so that only the + last CPU's count of invocations was displayed, rather than the + sum of all CPU's counts. + +o "1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip(). This should be + roughly equal to the sum of "e1", "i1", "a1", "z1", and "m1" + described below. In other words, the number of times that + the state machine is visited should be equal to the sum of the + number of times that each state is visited plus the number of + times that the state-machine lock acquisition failed. + +o "e1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip() was unable to + acquire the fliplock. + +o "i1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_idle(). + +o "ie1" is the number of times rcu_try_flip_idle() exited early + due to the calling CPU having no work for RCU. + +o "g1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_idle() decided + to start a new grace period. "i1" should be roughly equal to + "ie1" plus "g1". + +o "a1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack(). + +o "ae1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitack() found + that at least one CPU had not yet acknowledge the new grace period + (AKA "counter flip"). + +o "a2" is the number of time rcu_try_flip_waitack() found that + all CPUs had acknowledged. "a1" should be roughly equal to + "ae1" plus "a2". (This particular output was collected on + a 128-CPU machine, hence the smaller-than-usual fraction of + calls to rcu_try_flip_waitack() finding all CPUs having already + acknowledged.) + +o "z1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitzero(). + +o "ze1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() found + that not all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had + completed. + +o "z2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitzero() finds + the sum of the counters equal to zero, in other words, that + all of the old RCU read-side critical sections had completed. + The value of "z1" should be roughly equal to "ze1" plus + "z2". + +o "m1" is the number of calls to rcu_try_flip_waitmb(). + +o "me1" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds + that at least one CPU has not yet executed a memory barrier. + +o "m2" is the number of times that rcu_try_flip_waitmb() finds that + all CPUs have executed a memory barrier. + + +Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats + +This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the +top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct +rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and +rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy). + +The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: + +rcu: + 0 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=1 rp=3c2a dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=1882 of=0 ri=2126 ql=2 b=10 + 1 c=4011 g=4012 pq=1 pqc=4011 qp=0 rpfq=3 rp=39a6 dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=1402 of=0 ri=1875 ql=46 b=10 + 2 c=4010 g=4010 pq=1 pqc=4010 qp=0 rpfq=-5 rp=1d12 dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2080 ql=0 b=10 + 3 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=2b50 dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=2230 of=0 ri=1923 ql=72 b=10 + 4 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1644 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=3348 of=0 ri=2805 ql=7 b=10 + 5 c=4012 g=4013 pq=0 pqc=4011 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1aac dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=3140 of=0 ri=2066 ql=10 b=10 + 6 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=ed8 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=3797 of=0 ri=1266 ql=10 b=10 + 7 c=4012 g=4013 pq=1 pqc=4012 qp=1 rpfq=3 rp=1fa2 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=2795 of=0 ri=2162 ql=28 b=10 +rcu_bh: + 0 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-145 rp=21d6 dt=23301/73 dn=2 df=0 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 + 1 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-170 rp=20ce dt=78073/1 dn=2 df=26 of=0 ri=5 ql=0 b=10 + 2 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-83 rp=fbd dt=16646/0 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=4 ql=0 b=10 + 3 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=0 rpfq=-105 rp=178c dt=21159/1 dn=2 df=28 of=0 ri=2 ql=0 b=10 + 4 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-30 rp=b54 dt=5783/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 + 5 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-29 rp=df5 dt=5879/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10 + 6 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-28 rp=788 dt=5847/1 dn=2 df=32 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 + 7 c=-268 g=-268 pq=1 pqc=-268 qp=1 rpfq=-53 rp=1098 dt=6199/1 dn=2 df=30 of=0 ri=3 ql=0 b=10 + +The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu, the second for +rcu_bh. Each section has one line per CPU, or eight for this 8-CPU system. +The fields are as follows: + +o The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number. + CPUs numbers followed by an exclamation mark are offline, + but have been online at least once since boot. There will be + no output for CPUs that have never been online, which can be + a good thing in the surprisingly common case where NR_CPUS is + substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs. + +o "c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have + completed. CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag quite a ways + behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu" above, which has slept + through the past 25 RCU grace periods. It is not unusual to + see CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods. + +o "g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have + started. Again, CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag behind. + If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU has already + reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace period that + it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it owes RCU a + quiescent state. + +o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state + for the current grace period. It is possible for "pq" to be + "1" and "c" different than "g", which indicates that although + the CPU has passed through a quiescent state, either (1) this + CPU has not yet reported that fact, (2) some other CPU has not + yet reported for this grace period, or (3) both. + +o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent + state for this CPU corresponds to. This is important for handling + the race between CPU 0 reporting an extended dynticks-idle + quiescent state for CPU 1 and CPU 1 suddenly waking up and + reporting its own quiescent state. If CPU 1 was the last CPU + for the current grace period, then the CPU that loses this race + will attempt to incorrectly mark CPU 1 as having checked in for + the next grace period! + +o "qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from + this CPU. + +o "rpfq" is the number of rcu_pending() calls on this CPU required + to induce this CPU to invoke force_quiescent_state(). + +o "rp" is low-order four hex digits of the count of how many times + rcu_pending() has been invoked on this CPU. + +o "dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented + when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the + scheduler or by irq. The number after the "/" is the interrupt + nesting depth when in dyntick-idle state, or one greater than + the interrupt-nesting depth otherwise. + + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels. + +o "dn" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented + when entering or leaving dynticks idle state via NMI. If both + the "dt" and "dn" values are even, then this CPU is in dynticks + idle mode and may be ignored by RCU. If either of these two + counters is odd, then RCU must be alert to the possibility of + an RCU read-side critical section running on this CPU. + + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels. + +o "df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a + quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being in + dynticks-idle state. + + This field is displayed only for CONFIG_NO_HZ kernels. + +o "of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a + quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being + offline. In a perfect world, this might neve happen, but it + turns out that offlining and onlining a CPU can take several grace + periods, and so there is likely to be an extended period of time + when RCU believes that the CPU is online when it really is not. + Please note that erring in the other direction (RCU believing a + CPU is offline when it is really alive and kicking) is a fatal + error, so it makes sense to err conservatively. + +o "ri" is the number of times that RCU has seen fit to send a + reschedule IPI to this CPU in order to get it to report a + quiescent state. + +o "ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on + this CPU. This is the total number of callbacks, regardless + of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to + start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke). + +o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number + of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will + be deferred. + + +The output of "cat rcu/rcugp" looks as follows: + +rcu: completed=33062 gpnum=33063 +rcu_bh: completed=464 gpnum=464 + +Again, this output is for both "rcu" and "rcu_bh". The fields are +taken from the rcu_state structure, and are as follows: + +o "completed" is the number of grace periods that have completed. + It is comparable to the "c" field from rcu/rcudata in that a + CPU whose "c" field matches the value of "completed" is aware + that the corresponding RCU grace period has completed. + +o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is + comparable to the "g" field from rcu/rcudata in that a CPU + whose "g" field matches the value of "gpnum" is aware that the + corresponding RCU grace period has started. + + If these two fields are equal (as they are for "rcu_bh" above), + then there is no grace period in progress, in other words, RCU + is idle. On the other hand, if the two fields differ (as they + do for "rcu" above), then an RCU grace period is in progress. + + +The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: + +c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 +1/1 0:127 ^0 +3/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3 +3/3f 0:5 ^0 2/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3 +rcu_bh: +c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 +0/1 0:127 ^0 +0/3 0:35 ^0 0/0 36:71 ^1 0/0 72:107 ^2 0/0 108:127 ^3 +0/3f 0:5 ^0 0/3 6:11 ^1 0/0 12:17 ^2 0/0 18:23 ^3 0/0 24:29 ^4 0/0 30:35 ^5 0/0 36:41 ^0 0/0 42:47 ^1 0/0 48:53 ^2 0/0 54:59 ^3 0/0 60:65 ^4 0/0 66:71 ^5 0/0 72:77 ^0 0/0 78:83 ^1 0/0 84:89 ^2 0/0 90:95 ^3 0/0 96:101 ^4 0/0 102:107 ^5 0/0 108:113 ^0 0/0 114:119 ^1 0/0 120:125 ^2 0/0 126:127 ^3 + +This is once again split into "rcu" and "rcu_bh" portions. The fields are +as follows: + +o "c" is exactly the same as "completed" under rcu/rcugp. + +o "g" is exactly the same as "gpnum" under rcu/rcugp. + +o "s" is the "signaled" state that drives force_quiescent_state()'s + state machine. + +o "jfq" is the number of jiffies remaining for this grace period + before force_quiescent_state() is invoked to help push things + along. Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode thoughout the grace + period will not report on their own, but rather must be check by + some other CPU via force_quiescent_state(). + +o "j" is the low-order four hex digits of the jiffies counter. + Yes, Paul did run into a number of problems that turned out to + be due to the jiffies counter no longer counting. Why do you ask? + +o "nfqs" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() since + boot. + +o "nfqsng" is the number of useless calls to force_quiescent_state(), + where there wasn't actually a grace period active. This can + happen due to races. The number in parentheses is the difference + between "nfqs" and "nfqsng", or the number of times that + force_quiescent_state() actually did some real work. + +o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that + exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above) + due to contention on ->fqslock. + +o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct + rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from + root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures + as forming yet another level after the leaves. Note that there + might be either one, two, or three levels of rcu_node structures, + depending on the relationship between CONFIG_RCU_FANOUT and + CONFIG_NR_CPUS. + + o The numbers separated by the "/" are the qsmask followed + by the qsmaskinit. The qsmask will have one bit + set for each entity in the next lower level that + has not yet checked in for the current grace period. + The qsmaskinit will have one bit for each entity that is + currently expected to check in during each grace period. + The value of qsmaskinit is assigned to that of qsmask + at the beginning of each grace period. + + For example, for "rcu", the qsmask of the first entry + of the lowest level is 0x14, meaning that we are still + waiting for CPUs 2 and 4 to check in for the current + grace period. + + o The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs + served by this struct rcu_node. This can be helpful + in working out how the hierarchy is wired together. + + For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows + "0:5", indicating that it covers CPUs 0 through 5. + + o The number after the "^" indicates the bit in the + next higher level rcu_node structure that this + rcu_node structure corresponds to. + + For example, the first entry at the lowest level shows + "^0", indicating that it corresponds to bit zero in + the first entry at the middle level. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a2ced6e173e0c93870f79856e97825f4e180891e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com" Date: Thu, 18 Dec 2008 11:41:33 -0800 Subject: x86: PAT: update documentation to cover pgprot and remap_pfn related changes - v3 Impact: Documentation only. Add documentation related to pgprot_* change. Signed-off-by: Venkatesh Pallipadi Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 24 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index c93ff5f4c0d..1784ff27699 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt @@ -80,6 +80,30 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- +Advanced APIs for drivers +------------------------- +A. Exporting pages to user with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range, +vm_insert_pfn + +Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace, do it by using mmap +interface and a combination of +1) pgprot_noncached() +2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vm_insert_pfn() + +With pat support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, driver can +continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or +pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2. + +In addition, step 2 internally tracks the region as UC or WC in memtype +list in order to ensure no conflicting mapping. + +Note that this set of APIs only work with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver +wants to export RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc() +as step 0 above and also track the usage of those pages and use set_memory_wb() +before the page is freed to free pool. + + + Notes: -- in the above table mean "Not suggested usage for the API". Some of the --'s -- cgit v1.2.3 From d62720ade82c5e5b8f9585e5ed02c89573ebf111 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mike Travis Date: Wed, 17 Dec 2008 14:14:30 -0800 Subject: sysfs: add documentation to cputopology.txt for system cpumasks Add information to cputopology.txt explaining the output of various system cpumask's. Signed-off-by: Mike Travis Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/cputopology.txt | 48 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 48 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cputopology.txt b/Documentation/cputopology.txt index bd699da2466..45932ec21ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/cputopology.txt +++ b/Documentation/cputopology.txt @@ -31,3 +31,51 @@ not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h: 2) core_id: 0 3) thread_siblings: just the given CPU 4) core_siblings: just the given CPU + +Additionally, cpu topology information is provided under +/sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files. The internal +source for the output is in brackets ("[]"). + + kernel_max: the maximum cpu index allowed by the kernel configuration. + [NR_CPUS-1] + + offline: cpus that are not online because they have been + HOTPLUGGED off (see cpu-hotplug.txt) or exceed the limit + of cpus allowed by the kernel configuration (kernel_max + above). [~cpu_online_mask + cpus >= NR_CPUS] + + online: cpus that are online and being scheduled [cpu_online_mask] + + possible: cpus that have been allocated resources and can be + brought online if they are present. [cpu_possible_mask] + + present: cpus that have been identified as being present in the + system. [cpu_present_mask] + +The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse() +[see ]. Some examples follow. + +In this example, there are 64 cpus in the system but cpus 32-63 exceed +the kernel max which is limited to 0..31 by the NR_CPUS config option +being 32. Note also that cpus 2 and 4-31 are not online but could be +brought online as they are both present and possible. + + kernel_max: 31 + offline: 2,4-31,32-63 + online: 0-1,3 + possible: 0-31 + present: 0-31 + +In this example, the NR_CPUS config option is 128, but the kernel was +started with possible_cpus=144. There are 4 cpus in the system and cpu2 +was manually taken offline (and is the only cpu that can be brought +online.) + + kernel_max: 127 + offline: 2,4-127,128-143 + online: 0-1,3 + possible: 0-127 + present: 0-3 + +See cpu-hotplug.txt for the possible_cpus=NUM kernel start parameter +as well as more information on the various cpumask's. -- cgit v1.2.3 From cae51176c1082ecb59706056910f8a217d433981 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 19 Dec 2008 08:36:53 +0100 Subject: ALSA: split HD-audio model list to HD-Audio-Models.txt Split the list of model option values to a separate file, HD-Audio-Models.txt, from ALSA-Configuration.txt. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 323 +--------------------- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt | 348 ++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 353 insertions(+), 318 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index d5b6b117103..a4f3a22caba 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -772,328 +772,15 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports multiple cards and autoprobe. + See Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt for more details about + HD-audio driver. + Each codec may have a model table for different configurations. If your machine isn't listed there, the default (usually minimal) configuration is set up. You can pass "model=" option to specify a certain model in such a case. There are different - models depending on the codec chip. - - See Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt for some details. - - Model name Description - ---------- ----------- - ALC880 - 3stack 3-jack in back and a headphone out - 3stack-digout 3-jack in back, a HP out and a SPDIF out - 5stack 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front - 5stack-digout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, a SPDIF out - 6stack 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front - 6stack-digout 6-jack with a SPDIF out - w810 3-jack - z71v 3-jack (HP shared SPDIF) - asus 3-jack (ASUS Mobo) - asus-w1v ASUS W1V - asus-dig ASUS with SPDIF out - asus-dig2 ASUS with SPDIF out (using GPIO2) - uniwill 3-jack - fujitsu Fujitsu Laptops (Pi1536) - F1734 2-jack - lg LG laptop (m1 express dual) - lg-lw LG LW20/LW25 laptop - tcl TCL S700 - clevo Clevo laptops (m520G, m665n) - medion Medion Rim 2150 - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can be - adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC260 - hp HP machines - hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) - hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 - fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 - acer Acer TravelMate - will Will laptops (PB V7900) - replacer Replacer 672V - basic fixed pin assignment (old default model) - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can - adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC262 - fujitsu Fujitsu Laptop - hp-bpc HP xw4400/6400/8400/9400 laptops - hp-bpc-d7000 HP BPC D7000 - hp-tc-t5735 HP Thin Client T5735 - hp-rp5700 HP RP5700 - benq Benq ED8 - benq-t31 Benq T31 - hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s - hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection - sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD - toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 - toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 - ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model - lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 - nec NEC Versa S9100 - basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC267/268 - quanta-il1 Quanta IL1 mini-notebook - 3stack 3-stack model - toshiba Toshiba A205 - acer Acer laptops - acer-dmic Acer laptops with digital-mic - acer-aspire Acer Aspire One - dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) - zepto Zepto laptops - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can - adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC269 - basic Basic preset - quanta Quanta FL1 - eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A - eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 - fujitsu FSC Amilo - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC662/663 - 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF - 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) - 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF - 6stack-dig 6-stack with SPDIF - lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop - eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 - eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 - ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo - m51va ASUS M51VA - g71v ASUS G71V - h13 ASUS H13 - g50v ASUS G50V - asus-mode1 ASUS - asus-mode2 ASUS - asus-mode3 ASUS - asus-mode4 ASUS - asus-mode5 ASUS - asus-mode6 ASUS - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC882/885 - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O - arima Arima W820Di1 - targa Targa T8, MSI-1049 T8 - asus-a7j ASUS A7J - asus-a7m ASUS A7M - macpro MacPro support - mbp3 Macbook Pro rev3 - imac24 iMac 24'' with jack detection - w2jc ASUS W2JC - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC883/888 - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O - 3stack-6ch 3-jack 6-channel - 3stack-6ch-dig 3-jack 6-channel with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig-demo 6-jack digital for Intel demo board - acer Acer laptops (Travelmate 3012WTMi, Aspire 5600, etc) - acer-aspire Acer Aspire 9810 - acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G - medion Medion Laptops - medion-md2 Medion MD2 - targa-dig Targa/MSI - targa-2ch-dig Targs/MSI with 2-channel - laptop-eapd 3-jack with SPDIF I/O and EAPD (Clevo M540JE, M550JE) - lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E - lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 - lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 - lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky - haier-w66 Haier W66 - 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) - 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) - mitac Mitac 8252D - clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series - fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 - fujitsu-xa3530 Fujitsu AMILO XA3530 - 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC861/660 - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF I/O - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660) - uniwill-m31 Uniwill M31 laptop - toshiba Toshiba laptop support - asus Asus laptop support - asus-laptop ASUS F2/F3 laptops - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - ALC861VD/660VD - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF OUT - 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF OUT - 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660VD) - 3stack-660-digout 3-jack with SPDIF OUT (for ALC660VD) - lenovo Lenovo 3000 C200 - dallas Dallas laptops - hp HP TX1000 - asus-v1s ASUS V1Sn - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - CMI9880 - minimal 3-jack in back - min_fp 3-jack in back, 2-jack in front - full 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front - full_dig 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF I/O - allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - AD1882 / AD1882A - 3stack 3-stack mode (default) - 6stack 6-stack mode - - AD1884A / AD1883 / AD1984A / AD1984B - desktop 3-stack desktop (default) - laptop laptop with HP jack sensing - mobile mobile devices with HP jack sensing - thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad X300 - - AD1884 - N/A - - AD1981 - basic 3-jack (default) - hp HP nx6320 - thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T60/X60/Z60 - toshiba Toshiba U205 - - AD1983 - N/A - - AD1984 - basic default configuration - thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T61/X61 - dell Dell T3400 - - AD1986A - 6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default) - 3stack 3-stack, shared surrounds - laptop 2-channel only (FSC V2060, Samsung M50) - laptop-eapd 2-channel with EAPD (ASUS A6J) - laptop-automute 2-channel with EAPD and HP-automute (Lenovo N100) - ultra 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung Ultra tablet PC) - samsung 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung R65) - - AD1988/AD1988B/AD1989A/AD1989B - 6stack 6-jack - 6stack-dig ditto with SPDIF - 3stack 3-jack - 3stack-dig ditto with SPDIF - laptop 3-jack with hp-jack automute - laptop-dig ditto with SPDIF - auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) - - Conexant 5045 - laptop-hpsense Laptop with HP sense (old model laptop) - laptop-micsense Laptop with Mic sense (old model fujitsu) - laptop-hpmicsense Laptop with HP and Mic senses - benq Benq R55E - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls - can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - - Conexant 5047 - laptop Basic Laptop config - laptop-hp Laptop config for some HP models (subdevice 30A5) - laptop-eapd Laptop config with EAPD support - test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls - can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with - $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y - - Conexant 5051 - laptop Basic Laptop config (default) - hp HP Spartan laptop - - STAC9200 - ref Reference board - dell-d21 Dell (unknown) - dell-d22 Dell (unknown) - dell-d23 Dell (unknown) - dell-m21 Dell Inspiron 630m, Dell Inspiron 640m - dell-m22 Dell Latitude D620, Dell Latitude D820 - dell-m23 Dell XPS M1710, Dell Precision M90 - dell-m24 Dell Latitude 120L - dell-m25 Dell Inspiron E1505n - dell-m26 Dell Inspiron 1501 - dell-m27 Dell Inspiron E1705/9400 - gateway Gateway laptops with EAPD control - panasonic Panasonic CF-74 - - STAC9205/9254 - ref Reference board - dell-m42 Dell (unknown) - dell-m43 Dell Precision - dell-m44 Dell Inspiron - - STAC9220/9221 - ref Reference board - 3stack D945 3stack - 5stack D945 5stack + SPDIF - intel-mac-v1 Intel Mac Type 1 - intel-mac-v2 Intel Mac Type 2 - intel-mac-v3 Intel Mac Type 3 - intel-mac-v4 Intel Mac Type 4 - intel-mac-v5 Intel Mac Type 5 - intel-mac-auto Intel Mac (detect type according to subsystem id) - macmini Intel Mac Mini (equivalent with type 3) - macbook Intel Mac Book (eq. type 5) - macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation (eq. type 3) - macbook-pro Intel Mac Book Pro 2nd generation (eq. type 3) - imac-intel Intel iMac (eq. type 2) - imac-intel-20 Intel iMac (newer version) (eq. type 3) - dell-d81 Dell (unknown) - dell-d82 Dell (unknown) - dell-m81 Dell (unknown) - dell-m82 Dell XPS M1210 - - STAC9202/9250/9251 - ref Reference board, base config - m2-2 Some Gateway MX series laptops - m6 Some Gateway NX series laptops - pa6 Gateway NX860 series - - STAC9227/9228/9229/927x - ref Reference board - ref-no-jd Reference board without HP/Mic jack detection - 3stack D965 3stack - 5stack D965 5stack + SPDIF - dell-3stack Dell Dimension E520 - dell-bios Fixes with Dell BIOS setup - - STAC92HD71B* - ref Reference board - dell-m4-1 Dell desktops - dell-m4-2 Dell desktops - dell-m4-3 Dell desktops - - STAC92HD73* - ref Reference board - no-jd BIOS setup but without jack-detection - dell-m6-amic Dell desktops/laptops with analog mics - dell-m6-dmic Dell desktops/laptops with digital mics - dell-m6 Dell desktops/laptops with both type of mics - - STAC9872 - vaio Setup for VAIO FE550G/SZ110 - vaio-ar Setup for VAIO AR + models depending on the codec chip. The list of available models + is found in HD-Audio-Models.txt The model name "genric" is treated as a special case. When this model is given, the driver uses the generic codec parser without diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4b7ac21ea9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -0,0 +1,348 @@ + Model name Description + ---------- ----------- +ALC880 +====== + 3stack 3-jack in back and a headphone out + 3stack-digout 3-jack in back, a HP out and a SPDIF out + 5stack 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front + 5stack-digout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, a SPDIF out + 6stack 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front + 6stack-digout 6-jack with a SPDIF out + w810 3-jack + z71v 3-jack (HP shared SPDIF) + asus 3-jack (ASUS Mobo) + asus-w1v ASUS W1V + asus-dig ASUS with SPDIF out + asus-dig2 ASUS with SPDIF out (using GPIO2) + uniwill 3-jack + fujitsu Fujitsu Laptops (Pi1536) + F1734 2-jack + lg LG laptop (m1 express dual) + lg-lw LG LW20/LW25 laptop + tcl TCL S700 + clevo Clevo laptops (m520G, m665n) + medion Medion Rim 2150 + test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can be + adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with + $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC260 +====== + hp HP machines + hp-3013 HP machines (3013-variant) + hp-dc7600 HP DC7600 + fujitsu Fujitsu S7020 + acer Acer TravelMate + will Will laptops (PB V7900) + replacer Replacer 672V + basic fixed pin assignment (old default model) + test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can + adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with + $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC262 +====== + fujitsu Fujitsu Laptop + hp-bpc HP xw4400/6400/8400/9400 laptops + hp-bpc-d7000 HP BPC D7000 + hp-tc-t5735 HP Thin Client T5735 + hp-rp5700 HP RP5700 + benq Benq ED8 + benq-t31 Benq T31 + hippo Hippo (ATI) with jack detection, Sony UX-90s + hippo_1 Hippo (Benq) with jack detection + sony-assamd Sony ASSAMD + toshiba-s06 Toshiba S06 + toshiba-rx1 Toshiba RX1 + ultra Samsung Q1 Ultra Vista model + lenovo-3000 Lenovo 3000 y410 + nec NEC Versa S9100 + basic fixed pin assignment w/o SPDIF + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC267/268 +========== + quanta-il1 Quanta IL1 mini-notebook + 3stack 3-stack model + toshiba Toshiba A205 + acer Acer laptops + acer-dmic Acer laptops with digital-mic + acer-aspire Acer Aspire One + dell Dell OEM laptops (Vostro 1200) + zepto Zepto laptops + test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls can + adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with + $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC269 +====== + basic Basic preset + quanta Quanta FL1 + eeepc-p703 ASUS Eeepc P703 P900A + eeepc-p901 ASUS Eeepc P901 S101 + fujitsu FSC Amilo + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC662/663 +========== + 3stack-dig 3-stack (2-channel) with SPDIF + 3stack-6ch 3-stack (6-channel) + 3stack-6ch-dig 3-stack (6-channel) with SPDIF + 6stack-dig 6-stack with SPDIF + lenovo-101e Lenovo laptop + eeepc-p701 ASUS Eeepc P701 + eeepc-ep20 ASUS Eeepc EP20 + ecs ECS/Foxconn mobo + m51va ASUS M51VA + g71v ASUS G71V + h13 ASUS H13 + g50v ASUS G50V + asus-mode1 ASUS + asus-mode2 ASUS + asus-mode3 ASUS + asus-mode4 ASUS + asus-mode5 ASUS + asus-mode6 ASUS + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC882/885 +========== + 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O + 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O + arima Arima W820Di1 + targa Targa T8, MSI-1049 T8 + asus-a7j ASUS A7J + asus-a7m ASUS A7M + macpro MacPro support + mbp3 Macbook Pro rev3 + imac24 iMac 24'' with jack detection + w2jc ASUS W2JC + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC883/888 +========== + 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O + 6stack-dig 6-jack digital with SPDIF I/O + 3stack-6ch 3-jack 6-channel + 3stack-6ch-dig 3-jack 6-channel with SPDIF I/O + 6stack-dig-demo 6-jack digital for Intel demo board + acer Acer laptops (Travelmate 3012WTMi, Aspire 5600, etc) + acer-aspire Acer Aspire 9810 + acer-aspire-4930g Acer Aspire 4930G + medion Medion Laptops + medion-md2 Medion MD2 + targa-dig Targa/MSI + targa-2ch-dig Targs/MSI with 2-channel + laptop-eapd 3-jack with SPDIF I/O and EAPD (Clevo M540JE, M550JE) + lenovo-101e Lenovo 101E + lenovo-nb0763 Lenovo NB0763 + lenovo-ms7195-dig Lenovo MS7195 + lenovo-sky Lenovo Sky + haier-w66 Haier W66 + 3stack-hp HP machines with 3stack (Lucknow, Samba boards) + 6stack-dell Dell machines with 6stack (Inspiron 530) + mitac Mitac 8252D + clevo-m720 Clevo M720 laptop series + fujitsu-pi2515 Fujitsu AMILO Pi2515 + fujitsu-xa3530 Fujitsu AMILO XA3530 + 3stack-6ch-intel Intel DG33* boards + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC861/660 +========== + 3stack 3-jack + 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF I/O + 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF I/O + 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660) + uniwill-m31 Uniwill M31 laptop + toshiba Toshiba laptop support + asus Asus laptop support + asus-laptop ASUS F2/F3 laptops + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +ALC861VD/660VD +============== + 3stack 3-jack + 3stack-dig 3-jack with SPDIF OUT + 6stack-dig 6-jack with SPDIF OUT + 3stack-660 3-jack (for ALC660VD) + 3stack-660-digout 3-jack with SPDIF OUT (for ALC660VD) + lenovo Lenovo 3000 C200 + dallas Dallas laptops + hp HP TX1000 + asus-v1s ASUS V1Sn + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +CMI9880 +======= + minimal 3-jack in back + min_fp 3-jack in back, 2-jack in front + full 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front + full_dig 6-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF I/O + allout 5-jack in back, 2-jack in front, SPDIF out + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +AD1882 / AD1882A +================ + 3stack 3-stack mode (default) + 6stack 6-stack mode + +AD1884A / AD1883 / AD1984A / AD1984B +==================================== + desktop 3-stack desktop (default) + laptop laptop with HP jack sensing + mobile mobile devices with HP jack sensing + thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad X300 + +AD1884 +====== + N/A + +AD1981 +====== + basic 3-jack (default) + hp HP nx6320 + thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T60/X60/Z60 + toshiba Toshiba U205 + +AD1983 +====== + N/A + +AD1984 +====== + basic default configuration + thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T61/X61 + dell Dell T3400 + +AD1986A +======= + 6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default) + 3stack 3-stack, shared surrounds + laptop 2-channel only (FSC V2060, Samsung M50) + laptop-eapd 2-channel with EAPD (ASUS A6J) + laptop-automute 2-channel with EAPD and HP-automute (Lenovo N100) + ultra 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung Ultra tablet PC) + samsung 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung R65) + +AD1988/AD1988B/AD1989A/AD1989B +============================== + 6stack 6-jack + 6stack-dig ditto with SPDIF + 3stack 3-jack + 3stack-dig ditto with SPDIF + laptop 3-jack with hp-jack automute + laptop-dig ditto with SPDIF + auto auto-config reading BIOS (default) + +Conexant 5045 +============= + laptop-hpsense Laptop with HP sense (old model laptop) + laptop-micsense Laptop with Mic sense (old model fujitsu) + laptop-hpmicsense Laptop with HP and Mic senses + benq Benq R55E + test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls + can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with + $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y + +Conexant 5047 +============= + laptop Basic Laptop config + laptop-hp Laptop config for some HP models (subdevice 30A5) + laptop-eapd Laptop config with EAPD support + test for testing/debugging purpose, almost all controls + can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with + $CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y + +Conexant 5051 +============= + laptop Basic Laptop config (default) + hp HP Spartan laptop + +STAC9200 +======== + ref Reference board + dell-d21 Dell (unknown) + dell-d22 Dell (unknown) + dell-d23 Dell (unknown) + dell-m21 Dell Inspiron 630m, Dell Inspiron 640m + dell-m22 Dell Latitude D620, Dell Latitude D820 + dell-m23 Dell XPS M1710, Dell Precision M90 + dell-m24 Dell Latitude 120L + dell-m25 Dell Inspiron E1505n + dell-m26 Dell Inspiron 1501 + dell-m27 Dell Inspiron E1705/9400 + gateway Gateway laptops with EAPD control + panasonic Panasonic CF-74 + +STAC9205/9254 +============= + ref Reference board + dell-m42 Dell (unknown) + dell-m43 Dell Precision + dell-m44 Dell Inspiron + +STAC9220/9221 +============= + ref Reference board + 3stack D945 3stack + 5stack D945 5stack + SPDIF + intel-mac-v1 Intel Mac Type 1 + intel-mac-v2 Intel Mac Type 2 + intel-mac-v3 Intel Mac Type 3 + intel-mac-v4 Intel Mac Type 4 + intel-mac-v5 Intel Mac Type 5 + intel-mac-auto Intel Mac (detect type according to subsystem id) + macmini Intel Mac Mini (equivalent with type 3) + macbook Intel Mac Book (eq. type 5) + macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation (eq. type 3) + macbook-pro Intel Mac Book Pro 2nd generation (eq. type 3) + imac-intel Intel iMac (eq. type 2) + imac-intel-20 Intel iMac (newer version) (eq. type 3) + dell-d81 Dell (unknown) + dell-d82 Dell (unknown) + dell-m81 Dell (unknown) + dell-m82 Dell XPS M1210 + +STAC9202/9250/9251 +================== + ref Reference board, base config + m2-2 Some Gateway MX series laptops + m6 Some Gateway NX series laptops + pa6 Gateway NX860 series + +STAC9227/9228/9229/927x +======================= + ref Reference board + ref-no-jd Reference board without HP/Mic jack detection + 3stack D965 3stack + 5stack D965 5stack + SPDIF + dell-3stack Dell Dimension E520 + dell-bios Fixes with Dell BIOS setup + +STAC92HD71B* +============ + ref Reference board + dell-m4-1 Dell desktops + dell-m4-2 Dell desktops + dell-m4-3 Dell desktops + +STAC92HD73* +=========== + ref Reference board + no-jd BIOS setup but without jack-detection + dell-m6-amic Dell desktops/laptops with analog mics + dell-m6-dmic Dell desktops/laptops with digital mics + dell-m6 Dell desktops/laptops with both type of mics + +STAC92HD83* +=========== + ref Reference board + +STAC9872 +======== + vaio Setup for VAIO FE550G/SZ110 + vaio-ar Setup for VAIO AR -- cgit v1.2.3 From 692f90421d3716ef0d0f120d9d2c9684009a4a01 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 19 Dec 2008 12:44:46 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Fix HD-Audio.txt reference of model list The model list is now in HD-Audio-Models.txt. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 642a2b01254..8d68fff7183 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -162,8 +162,8 @@ PCI SSID look-up. What `model` option values are available depends on the codec chip. Check your codec chip from the codec proc file (see "Codec Proc-File" section below). It will show the vendor/product name of your codec -chip. Then, see Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt -file, the section of HD-audio driver. You can find a list of codecs +chip. Then, see Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Modelstxt file, +the section of HD-audio driver. You can find a list of codecs and `model` options belonging to each codec. For example, for Realtek ALC262 codec chip, pass `model=ultra` for devices that are compatible with Samsung Q1 Ultra. -- cgit v1.2.3 From d4d9cd0338892e7f0d65f8a110473d175535cd5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Takashi Iwai Date: Fri, 19 Dec 2008 15:19:11 +0100 Subject: ALSA: hda - Add probe_only option Added probe_only module option to hd-audio driver. This option specifies whether the driver creates and initializes the codec-parser after probing. When this option is set, the driver skips the codec parsing and initialization but gives you proc and other accesses. It's useful to see the initial codec state for debugging. The default of this value is off, so the default behavior is as same as before. Signed-off-by: Takashi Iwai --- Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index a4f3a22caba..ee45454c50b 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -757,6 +757,8 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. model - force the model name position_fix - Fix DMA pointer (0 = auto, 1 = use LPIB, 2 = POSBUF) probe_mask - Bitmask to probe codecs (default = -1, meaning all slots) + probe_only - Only probing and no codec initialization (default=off); + Useful to check the initial codec status for debugging bdl_pos_adj - Specifies the DMA IRQ timing delay in samples. Passing -1 will make the driver to choose the appropriate value based on the controller chip. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 67bac792cd0c05b4b6e0393c32605b028b8dd533 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com" Date: Fri, 19 Dec 2008 13:47:30 -0800 Subject: x86: PAT: pfnmap documentation update changes Impact: Documentation only. Documentation updates as per Randy Dunlap's comments. Signed-off-by: Venkatesh Pallipadi Signed-off-by: Suresh Siddha Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin --- Documentation/x86/pat.txt | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt index 1784ff27699..cf08c9fff3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.txt @@ -82,23 +82,23 @@ pci proc | -- | -- | WC | Advanced APIs for drivers ------------------------- -A. Exporting pages to user with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range, +A. Exporting pages to users with remap_pfn_range, io_remap_pfn_range, vm_insert_pfn -Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace, do it by using mmap +Drivers wanting to export some pages to userspace do it by using mmap interface and a combination of 1) pgprot_noncached() 2) io_remap_pfn_range() or remap_pfn_range() or vm_insert_pfn() -With pat support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, driver can +With PAT support, a new API pgprot_writecombine is being added. So, drivers can continue to use the above sequence, with either pgprot_noncached() or pgprot_writecombine() in step 1, followed by step 2. In addition, step 2 internally tracks the region as UC or WC in memtype list in order to ensure no conflicting mapping. -Note that this set of APIs only work with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver -wants to export RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc() +Note that this set of APIs only works with IO (non RAM) regions. If driver +wants to export a RAM region, it has to do set_memory_uc() or set_memory_wc() as step 0 above and also track the usage of those pages and use set_memory_wb() before the page is freed to free pool. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 776d6c298aad42c2b8f191fa9ad826075e4d588c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Mundt Date: Thu, 11 Dec 2008 19:15:14 +0900 Subject: sh: Kill off remaining CONFIG_SH_KGDB bits. Now that we use the generic stub, kill off all of the left over references. Signed-off-by: Paul Mundt --- Documentation/sh/kgdb.txt | 179 ---------------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 179 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 Documentation/sh/kgdb.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/sh/kgdb.txt b/Documentation/sh/kgdb.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 05b4ba89d28..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/sh/kgdb.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,179 +0,0 @@ - -This file describes the configuration and behavior of KGDB for the SH -kernel. Based on a description from Henry Bell , it -has been modified to account for quirks in the current implementation. - -Version -======= - -This version of KGDB was written for 2.4.xx kernels for the SH architecture. -Further documentation is available from the linux-sh project website. - - -Debugging Setup: Host -====================== - -The two machines will be connected together via a serial line - this -should be a null modem cable i.e. with a twist. - -On your DEVELOPMENT machine, go to your kernel source directory and -build the kernel, enabling KGDB support in the "kernel hacking" section. -This includes the KGDB code, and also makes the kernel be compiled with -the "-g" option set -- necessary for debugging. - -To install this new kernel, use the following installation procedure. - -Decide on which tty port you want the machines to communicate, then -cable them up back-to-back using the null modem. On the DEVELOPMENT -machine, you may wish to create an initialization file called .gdbinit -(in the kernel source directory or in your home directory) to execute -commonly-used commands at startup. - -A minimal .gdbinit might look like this: - - file vmlinux - set remotebaud 115200 - target remote /dev/ttyS0 - -Change the "target" definition so that it specifies the tty port that -you intend to use. Change the "remotebaud" definition to match the -data rate that you are going to use for the com line (115200 is the -default). - -Debugging Setup: Target -======================== - -By default, the KGDB stub will communicate with the host GDB using -ttySC1 at 115200 baud, 8 databits, no parity; these defaults can be -changed in the kernel configuration. As the kernel starts up, KGDB will -initialize so that breakpoints, kernel segfaults, and so forth will -generally enter the debugger. - -This behavior can be modified by including the "kgdb" option in the -kernel command line; this option has the general form: - - kgdb=, - -The indicates the port to use, and can optionally specify -baud, parity and databits -- e.g. "ttySC0,9600N8" or "ttySC1,19200". - -The can be "halt" or "disabled". The "halt" action enters the -debugger via a breakpoint as soon as kgdb is initialized; the "disabled" -action causes kgdb to ignore kernel segfaults and such until explicitly -entered by a breakpoint in the code or by external action (sysrq or NMI). - -(Both and can appear alone, w/o the separating comma.) - -For example, if you wish to debug early in kernel startup code, you -might specify the halt option: - - kgdb=halt - -Boot the TARGET machine, which will appear to hang. - -On your DEVELOPMENT machine, cd to the source directory and run the gdb -program. (This is likely to be a cross GDB which runs on your host but -is built for an SH target.) If everything is working correctly you -should see gdb print out a few lines indicating that a breakpoint has -been taken. It will actually show a line of code in the target kernel -inside the gdbstub activation code. - -NOTE: BE SURE TO TERMINATE OR SUSPEND any other host application which -may be using the same serial port (for example, a terminal emulator you -have been using to connect to the target boot code.) Otherwise, data -from the target may not all get to GDB! - -You can now use whatever gdb commands you like to set breakpoints. -Enter "continue" to start your target machine executing again. At this -point the target system will run at full speed until it encounters -your breakpoint or gets a segment violation in the kernel, or whatever. - -Serial Ports: KGDB, Console -============================ - -This version of KGDB may not gracefully handle conflict with other -drivers in the kernel using the same port. If KGDB is configured on the -same port (and with the same parameters) as the kernel console, or if -CONFIG_SH_KGDB_CONSOLE is configured, things should be fine (though in -some cases console messages may appear twice through GDB). But if the -KGDB port is not the kernel console and used by another serial driver -which assumes different serial parameters (e.g. baud rate) KGDB may not -recover. - -Also, when KGDB is entered via sysrq-g (requires CONFIG_KGDB_SYSRQ) and -the kgdb port uses the same port as the console, detaching GDB will not -restore the console to working order without the port being re-opened. - -Another serious consequence of this is that GDB currently CANNOT break -into KGDB externally (e.g. via ^C or ); unless a breakpoint or -error is encountered, the only way to enter KGDB after the initial halt -(see above) is via NMI (CONFIG_KGDB_NMI) or sysrq-g (CONFIG_KGDB_SYSRQ). - -Code is included for the basic Hitachi Solution Engine boards to allow -the use of ttyS0 for KGDB if desired; this is less robust, but may be -useful in some cases. (This cannot be selected using the config file, -but only through the kernel command line, e.g. "kgdb=ttyS0", though the -configured defaults for baud rate etc. still apply if not overridden.) - -If gdbstub Does Not Work -======================== - -If it doesn't work, you will have to troubleshoot it. Do the easy -things first like double checking your cabling and data rates. You -might try some non-kernel based programs to see if the back-to-back -connection works properly. Just something simple like cat /etc/hosts -/dev/ttyS0 on one machine and cat /dev/ttyS0 on the other will tell you -if you can send data from one machine to the other. There is no point -in tearing out your hair in the kernel if the line doesn't work. - -If you need to debug the GDB/KGDB communication itself, the gdb commands -"set debug remote 1" and "set debug serial 1" may be useful, but be -warned: they produce a lot of output. - -Threads -======= - -Each process in a target machine is seen as a gdb thread. gdb thread related -commands (info threads, thread n) can be used. CONFIG_KGDB_THREAD must -be defined for this to work. - -In this version, kgdb reports PID_MAX (32768) as the process ID for the -idle process (pid 0), since GDB does not accept 0 as an ID. - -Detaching (exiting KGDB) -========================= - -There are two ways to resume full-speed target execution: "continue" and -"detach". With "continue", GDB inserts any specified breakpoints in the -target code and resumes execution; the target is still in "gdb mode". -If a breakpoint or other debug event (e.g. NMI) happens, the target -halts and communicates with GDB again, which is waiting for it. - -With "detach", GDB does *not* insert any breakpoints; target execution -is resumed and GDB stops communicating (does not wait for the target). -In this case, the target is no longer in "gdb mode" -- for example, -console messages no longer get sent separately to the KGDB port, or -encapsulated for GDB. If a debug event (e.g. NMI) occurs, the target -will re-enter "gdb mode" and will display this fact on the console; you -must give a new "target remote" command to gdb. - -NOTE: TO AVOID LOSSING CONSOLE MESSAGES IN CASE THE KERNEL CONSOLE AND -KGDB USING THE SAME PORT, THE TARGET WAITS FOR ANY INPUT CHARACTER ON -THE KGDB PORT AFTER A DETACH COMMAND. For example, after the detach you -could start a terminal emulator on the same host port and enter a ; -however, this program must then be terminated or suspended in order to -use GBD again if KGDB is re-entered. - - -Acknowledgements -================ - -This code was mostly generated by Henry Bell ; -largely from KGDB by Amit S. Kale - extracts from -code by Glenn Engel, Jim Kingdon, David Grothe , Tigran -Aivazian , William Gatliff , Ben -Lee, Steve Chamberlain and Benoit Miller are also -included. - -Jeremy Siegel - -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8a655053ca1593dd160dac2a4ee638fdec037d86 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Mundt Date: Wed, 17 Dec 2008 15:06:54 +0900 Subject: doc: Update sh cpufreq documentation. The sh cpufreq driver is no longer limited to just the SH-3 and SH-4, update the documentation to reflect this fact accordingly. Signed-off-by: Paul Mundt --- Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt index 4f3f3840320..e3443ddcfb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/user-guide.txt @@ -93,10 +93,8 @@ Several "PowerBook" and "iBook2" notebooks are supported. 1.5 SuperH ---------- -The following SuperH processors are supported by cpufreq: - -SH-3 -SH-4 +All SuperH processors supporting rate rounding through the clock +framework are supported by cpufreq. 1.6 Blackfin ------------ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2b1a61f0a8c714c96277bf16a823a84bafa1397d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Heiko Carstens Date: Thu, 25 Dec 2008 13:39:23 +0100 Subject: [S390] cpu topology: introduce kernel parameter Introduce a topology=[on|off] kernel parameter which allows to switch cpu topology on/off. Default will be off, since it looks like that for some workloards this doesn't behave very well (on s390). Signed-off-by: Heiko Carstens Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index c9115c1b672..09ede6c90ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2252,6 +2252,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file See comment before function dc390_setup() in drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c. + topology= [S390] + Format: {off | on} + Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu + topology informations if the hardware supports these. + The scheduler will make use of these informations and + e.g. base its process migration decisions on it. + Default is off. + tp720= [HW,PS2] trix= [HW,OSS] MediaTrix AudioTrix Pro -- cgit v1.2.3 From cef7125def4dd104769f400c941199614da0aca1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hendrik Brueckner Date: Thu, 25 Dec 2008 13:39:55 +0100 Subject: [S390] provide documentation for hvc_iucv kernel parameter. Signed-off-by: Hendrik Brueckner Signed-off-by: Martin Schwidefsky --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 09ede6c90ad..12f0fb6faaf 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -814,6 +814,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file hlt [BUGS=ARM,SH] + hvc_iucv= [S390] Number of z/VM IUCV Hypervisor console (HVC) + back-ends. Valid parameters: 0..8 + i8042.debug [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from -- cgit v1.2.3 From 42364690992e592c05f85c76fda4055820b48c1b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nikanth Karthikesan Date: Mon, 24 Nov 2008 10:46:29 +0100 Subject: Documentation: remove reference to ll_rw_blk.c and moved drivers/block/elevator.c The drivers/block/ll_rw_block.c has been split and organized in the block/ directory, and also drivers/block/elevator.c has been moved to the block/ directory. Update Documentation/block/biodoc.txt accordingly Signed-off-by: Nikanth Karthikesan Signed-off-by: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/block/biodoc.txt | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index 4dbb8be1c99..3c5434c83da 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ I/O scheduler, a.k.a. elevator, is implemented in two layers. Generic dispatch queue and specific I/O schedulers. Unless stated otherwise, elevator is used to refer to both parts and I/O scheduler to specific I/O schedulers. -Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in ll_rw_blk.c and elevator.c. +Block layer implements generic dispatch queue in block/*.c. The generic dispatch queue is responsible for properly ordering barrier requests, requeueing, handling non-fs requests and all other subtleties. @@ -926,8 +926,8 @@ be built inside the kernel. Each queue can choose different one and can also change to another one dynamically. A block layer call to the i/o scheduler follows the convention elv_xxx(). This -calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (drivers/block/elevator.c). Oh, -xxx and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator +calls elevator_xxx_fn in the elevator switch (block/elevator.c). Oh, xxx +and xxx might not match exactly, but use your imagination. If an elevator doesn't implement a function, the switch does nothing or some minimal house keeping work. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5bfb4093be6ac7b6c06c8e6461d85241654acc61 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Miao Date: Thu, 25 Dec 2008 17:19:02 +0800 Subject: [ARM] pxa: add document on the MFP design and how to use it Signed-off-by: Eric Miao --- Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt | 286 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 286 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a179e5bc02c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,286 @@ + MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors + + Eric Miao + +MFP stands for Multi-Function Pin, which is the pin-mux logic on PXA3xx and +later PXA series processors. This document describes the existing MFP API, +and how board/platform driver authors could make use of it. + + Basic Concept +=============== + +Unlike the GPIO alternate function settings on PXA25x and PXA27x, a new MFP +mechanism is introduced from PXA3xx to completely move the pin-mux functions +out of the GPIO controller. In addition to pin-mux configurations, the MFP +also controls the low power state, driving strength, pull-up/down and event +detection of each pin. Below is a diagram of internal connections between +the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals: + + +--------+ + | |--(GPIO19)--+ + | GPIO | | + | |--(GPIO...) | + +--------+ | + | +---------+ + +--------+ +------>| | + | PWM2 |--(PWM_OUT)-------->| MFP | + +--------+ +------>| |-------> to external PAD + | +---->| | + +--------+ | | +-->| | + | SSP2 |---(TXD)----+ | | +---------+ + +--------+ | | + | | + +--------+ | | + | Keypad |--(MKOUT4)----+ | + +--------+ | + | + +--------+ | + | UART2 |---(TXD)--------+ + +--------+ + +NOTE: the external pad is named as MFP_PIN_GPIO19, it doesn't necessarily +mean it's dedicated for GPIO19, only as a hint that internally this pin +can be routed from GPIO19 of the GPIO controller. + +To better understand the change from PXA25x/PXA27x GPIO alternate function +to this new MFP mechanism, here are several key points: + + 1. GPIO controller on PXA3xx is now a dedicated controller, same as other + internal controllers like PWM, SSP and UART, with 128 internal signals + which can be routed to external through one or more MFPs (e.g. GPIO<0> + can be routed through either MFP_PIN_GPIO0 as well as MFP_PIN_GPIO0_2, + see arch/arm/mach-pxa/mach/include/mfp-pxa300.h) + + 2. Alternate function configuration is removed from this GPIO controller, + the remaining functions are pure GPIO-specific, i.e. + + - GPIO signal level control + - GPIO direction control + - GPIO level change detection + + 3. Low power state for each pin is now controlled by MFP, this means the + PGSRx registers on PXA2xx are now useless on PXA3xx + + 4. Wakeup detection is now controlled by MFP, PWER does not control the + wakeup from GPIO(s) any more, depending on the sleeping state, ADxER + (as defined in pxa3xx-regs.h) controls the wakeup from MFP + +NOTE: with such a clear separation of MFP and GPIO, by GPIO we normally +mean it is a GPIO signal, and by MFP or pin xxx, we mean a physical +pad (or ball). + + MFP API Usage +=============== + +For board code writers, here are some guidelines: + +1. include ONE of the following header files in your .c: + + - #include + - #include + - #include + - #include + - #include + + NOTE: only one file in your .c, depending on the processors used, + because pin configuration definitions may conflict in these file (i.e. + same name, different meaning and settings on different processors). E.g. + for zylonite platform, which support both PXA300/PXA310 and PXA320, two + separate files are introduced: zylonite_pxa300.c and zylonite_pxa320.c + (in addition to handle MFP configuration differences, they also handle + the other differences between the two combinations). + + NOTE: PXA300 and PXA310 are almost identical in pin configurations (with + PXA310 supporting some additional ones), thus the difference is actually + covered in a single mfp-pxa300.h. + +2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.: + + static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = { + /* Chip Select */ + GPIO15_nCS_1, + + /* LCD - 16bpp Active TFT */ + GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP, + GPIO16_PWM0_OUT, /* Backlight */ + + /* MMC */ + GPIO32_MMC_CLK, + GPIO112_MMC_CMD, + GPIO92_MMC_DAT_0, + GPIO109_MMC_DAT_1, + GPIO110_MMC_DAT_2, + GPIO111_MMC_DAT_3, + + ... + + /* GPIO */ + GPIO1_GPIO | WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH, + }; + + a) once the pin configurations are passed to pxa{2xx,3xx}_mfp_config(), + and written to the actual registers, they are useless and may discard, + adding '__initdata' will help save some additional bytes here. + + b) when there is only one possible pin configurations for a component, + some simplified definitions can be used, e.g. GPIOxx_TFT_LCD_16BPP on + PXA25x and PXA27x processors + + c) if by board design, a pin can be configured to wake up the system + from low power state, it can be 'OR'ed with any of: + + WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH + WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_RISE + WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_FALL + WAKEUP_ON_LEVEL_HIGH - specifically for enabling of keypad GPIOs, + + to indicate that this pin has the capability of wake-up the system, + and on which edge(s). This, however, doesn't necessarily mean the + pin _will_ wakeup the system, it will only when set_irq_wake() is + invoked with the corresponding GPIO IRQ (GPIO_IRQ(xx) or gpio_to_irq()) + and eventually calls gpio_set_wake() for the actual register setting. + + d) although PXA3xx MFP supports edge detection on each pin, the + internal logic will only wakeup the system when those specific bits + in ADxER registers are set, which can be well mapped to the + corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with + the peripheral IRQ to enable the wakeup. + + + MFP on PXA3xx +=============== + +Every external I/O pad on PXA3xx (excluding those for special purpose) has +one MFP logic associated, and is controlled by one MFP register (MFPR). + +The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320): + + 31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + +-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+ + | RESERVED |PS|PU|PD| DRIVE |SS|SD|SO|EC|EF|ER|--| AF_SEL | + +-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+ + + Bit 3: RESERVED + Bit 4: EDGE_RISE_EN - enable detection of rising edge on this pin + Bit 5: EDGE_FALL_EN - enable detection of falling edge on this pin + Bit 6: EDGE_CLEAR - disable edge detection on this pin + Bit 7: SLEEP_OE_N - enable outputs during low power modes + Bit 8: SLEEP_DATA - output data on the pin during low power modes + Bit 9: SLEEP_SEL - selection control for low power modes signals + Bit 13: PULLDOWN_EN - enable the internal pull-down resistor on this pin + Bit 14: PULLUP_EN - enable the internal pull-up resistor on this pin + Bit 15: PULL_SEL - pull state controlled by selected alternate function + (0) or by PULL{UP,DOWN}_EN bits (1) + + Bit 0 - 2: AF_SEL - alternate function selection, 8 possibilities, from 0-7 + Bit 10-12: DRIVE - drive strength and slew rate + 0b000 - fast 1mA + 0b001 - fast 2mA + 0b002 - fast 3mA + 0b003 - fast 4mA + 0b004 - slow 6mA + 0b005 - fast 6mA + 0b006 - slow 10mA + 0b007 - fast 10mA + + MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx +============================== + +Due to the difference of pin-mux handling between PXA2xx and PXA3xx, a unified +MFP API is introduced to cover both series of processors. + +The basic idea of this design is to introduce definitions for all possible pin +configurations, these definitions are processor and platform independent, and +the actual API invoked to convert these definitions into register settings and +make them effective there-after. + + Files Involved + -------------- + + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp.h + + for + 1. Unified pin definitions - enum constants for all configurable pins + 2. processor-neutral bit definitions for a possible MFP configuration + + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa3xx.h + + for PXA3xx specific MFPR register bit definitions and PXA3xx common pin + configurations + + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa2xx.h + + for PXA2xx specific definitions and PXA25x/PXA27x common pin configurations + + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa25x.h + arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa27x.h + arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa300.h + arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa320.h + arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp-pxa930.h + + for processor specific definitions + + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa3xx.c + - arch/arm/mach-pxa/mfp-pxa2xx.c + + for implementation of the pin configuration to take effect for the actual + processor. + + Pin Configuration + ----------------- + + The following comments are copied from mfp.h (see the actual source code + for most updated info) + + /* + * a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer + * + * bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum) + * bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection + * bit 13..15 - Drive Strength + * bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State + * bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection + * bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State + * + * to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided + * + * MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with + * alternate function = 0, + * drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X) + * low power mode = default + * edge detection = none + * + * MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function + * MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and + * pin drive strength + * MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and + * low power mode + * MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function, + * pin drive strength and low power mode + */ + + Examples of pin configurations are: + + #define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT) + + which reads GPIO94 can be configured as SSP3_RXD, with alternate function + selection of 1, driving strength of 0b101, and a float state in low power + modes. + + NOTE: this is the default setting of this pin being configured as SSP3_RXD + which can be modified a bit in board code, though it is not recommended to + do so, simply because this default setting is usually carefully encoded, + and is supposed to work in most cases. + + Register Settings + ----------------- + + Register settings on PXA3xx for a pin configuration is actually very + straight-forward, most bits can be converted directly into MFPR value + in a easier way. Two sets of MFPR values are calculated: the run-time + ones and the low power mode ones, to allow different settings. + + The conversion from a generic pin configuration to the actual register + settings on PXA2xx is a bit complicated: many registers are involved, + including GAFRx, GPDRx, PGSRx, PWER, PKWR, PFER and PRER. Please see + mfp-pxa2xx.c for how the conversion is made. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 77e196752bdd76a0c58ab082658d28c6a90fa40e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Miao Date: Tue, 16 Dec 2008 11:54:34 +0800 Subject: [ARM] pxafb: allow video memory size to be configurable The amount of video memory size is decided according to the following order: 1. x x by default, which is the backward compatible way 2. size specified in platform data 3. size specified in module parameter 'options' string or specified in kernel boot command line (see updated Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt) And now since the memory is allocated from system memory, the pxafb_mmap can be removed and the default fb_mmap() should be working all right. Also, since we now have introduced the 'struct pxafb_dma_buff' for DMA descriptors and palettes, the allocation can be separated cleanly. NOTE: the LCD DMA actually supports chained transfer (i.e. page-based transfers), to simplify the logic and keep the performance (with less TLB misses when accessing from memory mapped user space), the memory is allocated by alloc_pages_*() to ensures it's physical contiguous. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Signed-off-by: Eric Miao --- Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt | 8 ++++++-- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt index db9b8500b43..ad94b5ca009 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt @@ -5,9 +5,13 @@ The driver supports the following options, either via options= when modular or video=pxafb: when built in. For example: - modprobe pxafb options=mode:640x480-8,passive + modprobe pxafb options=vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive or on the kernel command line - video=pxafb:mode:640x480-8,passive + video=pxafb:vmem:2M,mode:640x480-8,passive + +vmem: VIDEO_MEM_SIZE + Amount of video memory to allocate (can be suffixed with K or M + for kilobytes or megabytes) mode:XRESxYRES[-BPP] XRES == LCCR1_PPL + 1 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 198fc108ee4c2cd3f08954eae6a819c81c03214b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Miao Date: Tue, 23 Dec 2008 17:49:43 +0800 Subject: [ARM] pxafb: add support for overlay1 and overlay2 as framebuffer devices PXA27x and later processors support overlay1 and overlay2 on-top of the base framebuffer (although under-neath the base is also possible). They support palette and no-palette RGB formats, as well as YUV formats (only available on overlay2). These overlays have dedicated DMA channels and behave in a similar way as a framebuffer. This heavily simplified and re-structured work is based on the original pxafb_overlay.c (which is pending for mainline merge for a long time). The major problems with this pxafb_overlay.c are (if you are interested in the history): 1. heavily redundant (the control logics for overlay1 and overlay2 are actually identical except for some small operations, which are now abstracted into a 'pxafb_layer_ops' structure) 2. a lot of useless and un-tested code (two workarounds which are now fixed on mature silicons) 3. cursorfb is actually useless, hardware cursor should not be used this way, and the code was actually un-tested for a long time. The code in this patch should be self-explanatory, I tried to add minimum comments. As said, this is basically simplified, there are several things still on the pending list: 1. palette mode is un-supported and un-tested (although re-using the palette code of the base framebuffer is actually very easy now with previous clean-up patches) 2. fb_pan_display for overlay(s) is un-supported 3. the base framebuffer can actually be abstracted by 'pxafb_layer' as well, which will help further re-use of the code and keep a better and consistent structure. (This is the reason I named it 'pxafb_layer' instead of 'pxafb_overlay' or something alike) See Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt for additional usage information. Signed-off-by: Eric Miao Cc: Rodolfo Giometti Signed-off-by: Eric Miao --- Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt | 84 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 84 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt index ad94b5ca009..d143a0a749f 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/pxafb.txt @@ -56,3 +56,87 @@ outputen:POLARITY pixclockpol:POLARITY pixel clock polarity 0 => falling edge, 1 => rising edge + + +Overlay Support for PXA27x and later LCD controllers +==================================================== + + PXA27x and later processors support overlay1 and overlay2 on-top of the + base framebuffer (although under-neath the base is also possible). They + support palette and no-palette RGB formats, as well as YUV formats (only + available on overlay2). These overlays have dedicated DMA channels and + behave in a similar way as a framebuffer. + + However, there are some differences between these overlay framebuffers + and normal framebuffers, as listed below: + + 1. overlay can start at a 32-bit word aligned position within the base + framebuffer, which means they have a start (x, y). This information + is encoded into var->nonstd (no, var->xoffset and var->yoffset are + not for such purpose). + + 2. overlay framebuffer is allocated dynamically according to specified + 'struct fb_var_screeninfo', the amount is decided by: + + var->xres_virtual * var->yres_virtual * bpp + + bpp = 16 -- for RGB565 or RGBT555 + = 24 -- for YUV444 packed + = 24 -- for YUV444 planar + = 16 -- for YUV422 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/2 Cb + 1/2 Cr) + = 12 -- for YUV420 planar (1 pixel = 1 Y + 1/4 Cb + 1/4 Cr) + + NOTE: + + a. overlay does not support panning in x-direction, thus + var->xres_virtual will always be equal to var->xres + + b. line length of overlay(s) must be on a 32-bit word boundary, + for YUV planar modes, it is a requirement for the component + with minimum bits per pixel, e.g. for YUV420, Cr component + for one pixel is actually 2-bits, it means the line length + should be a multiple of 16-pixels + + c. starting horizontal position (XPOS) should start on a 32-bit + word boundary, otherwise the fb_check_var() will just fail. + + d. the rectangle of the overlay should be within the base plane, + otherwise fail + + Applications should follow the sequence below to operate an overlay + framebuffer: + + a. open("/dev/fb[1-2]", ...) + b. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_VSCREENINFO, ...) + c. modify 'var' with desired parameters: + 1) var->xres and var->yres + 2) larger var->yres_virtual if more memory is required, + usually for double-buffering + 3) var->nonstd for starting (x, y) and color format + 4) var->{red, green, blue, transp} if RGB mode is to be used + d. ioctl(fd, FBIOPUT_VSCREENINFO, ...) + e. ioctl(fd, FBIOGET_FSCREENINFO, ...) + f. mmap + g. ... + + 3. for YUV planar formats, these are actually not supported within the + framebuffer framework, application has to take care of the offsets + and lengths of each component within the framebuffer. + + 4. var->nonstd is used to pass starting (x, y) position and color format, + the detailed bit fields are shown below: + + 31 23 20 10 0 + +-----------------+---+----------+----------+ + | ... unused ... |FOR| XPOS | YPOS | + +-----------------+---+----------+----------+ + + FOR - color format, as defined by OVERLAY_FORMAT_* in pxafb.h + 0 - RGB + 1 - YUV444 PACKED + 2 - YUV444 PLANAR + 3 - YUV422 PLANAR + 4 - YUR420 PLANAR + + XPOS - starting horizontal position + YPOS - starting vertical position -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2b1b945f88537a110f018f6a50b1f01bbb23fb7e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Fri, 24 Oct 2008 23:13:57 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9370): Update README.cx88 with the current status README.cx88 were outdated since a long time. Update it with the current status. Cc: Rafael Diniz Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 | 8 +++----- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 index 166d5960b1a..35fae23f883 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cx88 @@ -1,4 +1,3 @@ - cx8800 release notes ==================== @@ -10,21 +9,20 @@ current status video - Basically works. - - Some minor image quality glitches. - - For now only capture, overlay support isn't completed yet. + - For now, only capture and read(). Overlay isn't supported. audio - The chip specs for the on-chip TV sound decoder are next to useless :-/ - Neverless the builtin TV sound decoder starts working now, - at least for PAL-BG. Other TV norms need other code ... + at least for some standards. FOR ANY REPORTS ON THIS PLEASE MENTION THE TV NORM YOU ARE USING. - Most tuner chips do provide mono sound, which may or may not be useable depending on the board design. With the Hauppauge cards it works, so there is mono sound available as fallback. - audio data dma (i.e. recording without loopback cable to the - sound card) should be possible, but there is no code yet ... + sound card) is supported via cx88-alsa. vbi - Code present. Works for NTSC closed caption. PAL and other -- cgit v1.2.3 From bc13ae11227b06d2397cea1a8eb22fc2ca64e22f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Patrice Levesque Date: Sun, 2 Nov 2008 16:37:35 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9529): cx88: add a second PCI ID for ATI TV Wonder Pro There's a second PCI identifier for the ATI TV WONDER PRO card (0x1002:0x00f9). Attached is a patch to kernel 2.6.27 that adds autodetection for this version. Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index a5227e308f4..12e600d7424 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ 1 -> Hauppauge WinTV 34xxx models [0070:3400,0070:3401] 2 -> GDI Black Gold [14c7:0106,14c7:0107] 3 -> PixelView [1554:4811] - 4 -> ATI TV Wonder Pro [1002:00f8] + 4 -> ATI TV Wonder Pro [1002:00f8,1002:00f9] 5 -> Leadtek Winfast 2000XP Expert [107d:6611,107d:6613] 6 -> AverTV Studio 303 (M126) [1461:000b] 7 -> MSI TV-@nywhere Master [1462:8606] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4b29631db33292d416dc395c56122ea865e7635c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Igor M. Liplianin" Date: Sun, 9 Nov 2008 15:25:31 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9533): cx88: Add support for TurboSight TBS8910 DVB-S PCI card The card based on stv0299 or stv0288 demodulators. Signed-off-by: Igor M. Liplianin Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index 12e600d7424..dc8da94061a 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -74,3 +74,5 @@ 73 -> TeVii S420 DVB-S [d420:9022] 74 -> Prolink Pixelview Global Extreme [1554:4976] 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033] + 76 -> SATTRADE ST4200 DVB-S/S2 [b200:4200] + 77 -> TBS 8910 DVB-S [8910:8888] -- cgit v1.2.3 From cd3cde1271c6c597c16e4c22810449949c675092 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Igor M. Liplianin" Date: Sun, 9 Nov 2008 15:26:25 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9534): cx88: Add support for Prof 6200 DVB-S PCI card The card based on stv0299 or stv0288 demodulators. Signed-off-by: Igor M. Liplianin Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index dc8da94061a..0d08f1edcf6 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -76,3 +76,4 @@ 75 -> PROF 7300 DVB-S/S2 [B033:3033] 76 -> SATTRADE ST4200 DVB-S/S2 [b200:4200] 77 -> TBS 8910 DVB-S [8910:8888] + 78 -> Prof 6200 DVB-S [b022:3022] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 917118745a610765e98621c4a81d7744806e4954 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Tue, 28 Oct 2008 08:00:23 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9553): gspca: Webcam 145f:013a added in pac207. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 004818fab04..2a23fe31e0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -263,6 +263,7 @@ etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA zc3xx 10fd:0128 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128 spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k +pac207 145f:013a Trust WB-1300N spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC -- cgit v1.2.3 From 864ec0b7a03c8401e6e49f9e480489478ea14cb5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Devin Heitmueller Date: Wed, 12 Nov 2008 02:05:28 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9590): Add registration for Pinnacle 80e ATSC tuner Add registration for Pinnacle 80e ATSC tuner Register the em2874 based Pinnacle 80e device. Note that support for this device also requires the new drx-j driver (which is not available yet) Thanks for Ray Lu from Empia for providing the em2874 datasheet. Thanks to Joerg Schindler from Pinnacle for providing sample hardware. Thanks to Rainer Miethling from Pinnacle for providing engineering support. Signed-off-by: Devin Heitmueller Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 187cc48d092..ea537f5ae40 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -57,3 +57,4 @@ 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] + 59 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Mini (em2874) [2304:023f] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 05583625710dfd75880a6cbb68292929d1d4c33c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Dirk Heer Date: Fri, 21 Nov 2008 19:00:55 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9677): bttv: fix some entries on Phytec boards and add missing ones This Patch does modify the bttv-cards.c and bttc.h so that the driver supports VD-011, VD-012, VD-012-X1 and VD-012-X2 Framegrabber from Phytec Messtechnik GmbH. Signed-off-by: Dirk Heer Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv | 7 +++++-- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv index 60ba6683603..0d93fa1ac25 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv @@ -104,8 +104,8 @@ 103 -> Grand X-Guard / Trust 814PCI [0304:0102] 104 -> Nebula Electronics DigiTV [0071:0101] 105 -> ProVideo PV143 [aa00:1430,aa00:1431,aa00:1432,aa00:1433,aa03:1433] -106 -> PHYTEC VD-009-X1 MiniDIN (bt878) -107 -> PHYTEC VD-009-X1 Combi (bt878) +106 -> PHYTEC VD-009-X1 VD-011 MiniDIN (bt878) +107 -> PHYTEC VD-009-X1 VD-011 Combi (bt878) 108 -> PHYTEC VD-009 MiniDIN (bt878) 109 -> PHYTEC VD-009 Combi (bt878) 110 -> IVC-100 [ff00:a132] @@ -151,3 +151,6 @@ 150 -> Geovision GV-600 [008a:763c] 151 -> Kozumi KTV-01C 152 -> Encore ENL TV-FM-2 [1000:1801] +153 -> PHYTEC VD-012 (bt878) +154 -> PHYTEC VD-012-X1 (bt878) +155 -> PHYTEC VD-012-X2 (bt878) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6e4ae872c580d6a388a52ddfdfc93b4215af1180 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Sat, 22 Nov 2008 05:35:49 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9713): gspca: Add the ov534 webcams in the gspca documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 2a23fe31e0e..4c96adc0ba5 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -169,6 +169,8 @@ spca500 06bd:0404 Agfa CL20 spca500 06be:0800 Optimedia sunplus 06d6:0031 Trust 610 LCD PowerC@m Zoom spca506 06e1:a190 ADS Instant VCD +ov534 06f8:3002 Hercules Blog Webcam +ov534 06f8:3003 Hercules Dualpix HD Weblog spca508 0733:0110 ViewQuest VQ110 spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043 spca501 0733:0401 Intel Create and Share @@ -263,6 +265,7 @@ etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA zc3xx 10fd:0128 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128 spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k +ov534 1415:2000 Sony HD Eye for PS3 (SLEH 00201) pac207 145f:013a Trust WB-1300N spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2966af73e70dee461c256b5eb877b2ff757f8c82 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rusty Russell Date: Tue, 30 Dec 2008 09:25:58 -0600 Subject: virtio: use LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN instead of relying on pagesize This doesn't really matter, since lguest is i386 only at the moment, but we could actually choose a different value. (lguest doesn't have a guarenteed ABI). Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell --- Documentation/lguest/lguest.c | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index 804520633fc..aa2574ca94c 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -1030,7 +1030,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) /* Zero out the virtqueues. */ for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { memset(vq->vring.desc, 0, - vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize())); + vring_size(vq->config.num, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN)); lg_last_avail(vq) = 0; } } else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) { @@ -1211,7 +1211,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, void *p; /* First we need some memory for this virtqueue. */ - pages = (vring_size(num_descs, getpagesize()) + getpagesize() - 1) + pages = (vring_size(num_descs, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN) + getpagesize() - 1) / getpagesize(); p = get_pages(pages); @@ -1228,7 +1228,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, vq->config.pfn = to_guest_phys(p) / getpagesize(); /* Initialize the vring. */ - vring_init(&vq->vring, num_descs, p, getpagesize()); + vring_init(&vq->vring, num_descs, p, LGUEST_VRING_ALIGN); /* Append virtqueue to this device's descriptor. We use * device_config() to get the end of the device's current virtqueues; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 58a24566449892dda409b9ad92c2e56c76c5670c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Matias Zabaljauregui Date: Mon, 29 Sep 2008 01:40:07 -0300 Subject: lguest: move the initial guest page table creation code to the host This patch moves the initial guest page table creation code to the host, so the launcher keeps working with PAE enabled configs. Signed-off-by: Matias Zabaljauregui Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell --- Documentation/lguest/lguest.c | 60 +++++-------------------------------------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 54 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index aa2574ca94c..f2dbbf3bdea 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -481,51 +481,6 @@ static unsigned long load_initrd(const char *name, unsigned long mem) /* We return the initrd size. */ return len; } - -/* Once we know how much memory we have we can construct simple linear page - * tables which set virtual == physical which will get the Guest far enough - * into the boot to create its own. - * - * We lay them out of the way, just below the initrd (which is why we need to - * know its size here). */ -static unsigned long setup_pagetables(unsigned long mem, - unsigned long initrd_size) -{ - unsigned long *pgdir, *linear; - unsigned int mapped_pages, i, linear_pages; - unsigned int ptes_per_page = getpagesize()/sizeof(void *); - - mapped_pages = mem/getpagesize(); - - /* Each PTE page can map ptes_per_page pages: how many do we need? */ - linear_pages = (mapped_pages + ptes_per_page-1)/ptes_per_page; - - /* We put the toplevel page directory page at the top of memory. */ - pgdir = from_guest_phys(mem) - initrd_size - getpagesize(); - - /* Now we use the next linear_pages pages as pte pages */ - linear = (void *)pgdir - linear_pages*getpagesize(); - - /* Linear mapping is easy: put every page's address into the mapping in - * order. PAGE_PRESENT contains the flags Present, Writable and - * Executable. */ - for (i = 0; i < mapped_pages; i++) - linear[i] = ((i * getpagesize()) | PAGE_PRESENT); - - /* The top level points to the linear page table pages above. */ - for (i = 0; i < mapped_pages; i += ptes_per_page) { - pgdir[i/ptes_per_page] - = ((to_guest_phys(linear) + i*sizeof(void *)) - | PAGE_PRESENT); - } - - verbose("Linear mapping of %u pages in %u pte pages at %#lx\n", - mapped_pages, linear_pages, to_guest_phys(linear)); - - /* We return the top level (guest-physical) address: the kernel needs - * to know where it is. */ - return to_guest_phys(pgdir); -} /*:*/ /* Simple routine to roll all the commandline arguments together with spaces @@ -548,13 +503,13 @@ static void concat(char *dst, char *args[]) /*L:185 This is where we actually tell the kernel to initialize the Guest. We * saw the arguments it expects when we looked at initialize() in lguest_user.c: - * the base of Guest "physical" memory, the top physical page to allow, the - * top level pagetable and the entry point for the Guest. */ -static int tell_kernel(unsigned long pgdir, unsigned long start) + * the base of Guest "physical" memory, the top physical page to allow and the + * entry point for the Guest. */ +static int tell_kernel(unsigned long start) { unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_INITIALIZE, (unsigned long)guest_base, - guest_limit / getpagesize(), pgdir, start }; + guest_limit / getpagesize(), start }; int fd; verbose("Guest: %p - %p (%#lx)\n", @@ -1941,7 +1896,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { /* Memory, top-level pagetable, code startpoint and size of the * (optional) initrd. */ - unsigned long mem = 0, pgdir, start, initrd_size = 0; + unsigned long mem = 0, start, initrd_size = 0; /* Two temporaries and the /dev/lguest file descriptor. */ int i, c, lguest_fd; /* The boot information for the Guest. */ @@ -2040,9 +1995,6 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) boot->hdr.type_of_loader = 0xFF; } - /* Set up the initial linear pagetables, starting below the initrd. */ - pgdir = setup_pagetables(mem, initrd_size); - /* The Linux boot header contains an "E820" memory map: ours is a * simple, single region. */ boot->e820_entries = 1; @@ -2064,7 +2016,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* We tell the kernel to initialize the Guest: this returns the open * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */ - lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start); + lguest_fd = tell_kernel(start); /* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the * input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the Waker, and -- cgit v1.2.3 From 26d5f3a3fe917232cb77e2e3450f7d7f8698259c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Date: Sun, 7 Dec 2008 13:19:29 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9772): saa7134: Add support for Kworld Plus TV Analog Lite PCI Thanks to Sistema Fenix (http://www.sistemafenix.com.br/) for sponsoring this development. Signed-off-by: Gilberto Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index dc67eef38ff..dd979dca8af 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -151,3 +151,4 @@ 150 -> Zogis Real Angel 220 151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] 152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857] +153 -> Kworld Plus TV Analog Lite PCI [17de:7128] -- cgit v1.2.3 From f89bc32974a4376e8393001484af28d8c3350ab4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Date: Mon, 1 Dec 2008 21:01:04 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9793): em28xx: Add specific entry for WinTV-HVR 850 Added specific entry for WinTV-HVR 850 Signed-off-by: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index ea537f5ae40..a6734eb7bf7 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821] 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) - 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] + 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] 18 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (R2) (em2880) [2040:6502] 19 -> PointNix Intra-Oral Camera (em2860) @@ -58,3 +58,4 @@ 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] 59 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Mini (em2874) [2304:023f] + 60 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 850 (em2883) [2040:651f] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9bb1b7e879091f09fc677dca10c5e132b68a9da3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Igor M. Liplianin" Date: Sun, 23 Nov 2008 14:11:16 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9795): Add Compro VideoMate E650F (DVB-T part only). Add Compro VideoMate E650F (DVB-T part only). The card based on cx23885 PCI-Express chip, xc3028 tuner and ce6353 demodulator. Cc: Steven Toth Signed-off-by: Igor M. Liplianin Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index 64823ccacd6..35ea130e989 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -11,3 +11,4 @@ 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618] 11 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express [18ac:db78] 12 -> Leadtek Winfast PxDVR3200 H [107d:6681] + 13 -> Compro VideoMate E650F [185b:e800] -- cgit v1.2.3 From a5525685eeaec8e720323180530181ffe69a24f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hermann Pitton Date: Fri, 5 Dec 2008 19:49:34 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9798): saa7134: add analog and DVB-T support for Medion/Creatix CTX946 How to enable the mpeg encoder is not found yet. The card comes up with gpio 0x0820000 for DVB-T. Signed-off-by: Hermann Pitton Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index dd979dca8af..335aef4dcae 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ 9 -> Medion 5044 10 -> Kworld/KuroutoShikou SAA7130-TVPCI 11 -> Terratec Cinergy 600 TV [153b:1143] - 12 -> Medion 7134 [16be:0003] + 12 -> Medion 7134 [16be:0003,16be:5000] 13 -> Typhoon TV+Radio 90031 14 -> ELSA EX-VISION 300TV [1048:226b] 15 -> ELSA EX-VISION 500TV [1048:226a] -- cgit v1.2.3 From b1f1d76ef7cc96541b6a16bff7082e9033f0ba08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Patrick Boettcher Date: Wed, 10 Dec 2008 18:27:39 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9812): [PATCH] short help for Technisat cards to select the right configuration This patch adds a short help for Technisat cards to help the user selecting the right configuration for his card(s). Signed-off-by: Uwe Bugla Signed-off-by: Patrick Boettcher Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt | 69 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 69 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt b/Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cdf6ee4b2da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dvb/technisat.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +How to set up the Technisat devices +=================================== + +1) Find out what device you have +================================ + +First start your linux box with a shipped kernel: +lspci -vvv for a PCI device (lsusb -vvv for an USB device) will show you for example: +02:0b.0 Network controller: Techsan Electronics Co Ltd B2C2 FlexCopII DVB chip / Technisat SkyStar2 DVB card (rev 02) + +dmesg | grep frontend may show you for example: +DVB: registering frontend 0 (Conexant CX24123/CX24109)... + +2) Kernel compilation: +====================== + +If the Technisat is the only TV device in your box get rid of unnecessary modules and check this one: +"Multimedia devices" => "Customise analog and hybrid tuner modules to build" +In this directory uncheck every driver which is activated there. + +Then please activate: +2a) Main module part: + +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC PCI" in case of a PCI card OR +c.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 Air/Sky/Cable2PC USB" in case of an USB 1.1 adapter +d.)"Multimedia devices" => "DVB/ATSC adapters" => "Technisat/B2C2 FlexcopII(b) and FlexCopIII adapters" => "Enable debug for the B2C2 FlexCop drivers" +Notice: d.) is helpful for troubleshooting + +2b) Frontend module part: + +1.) Revision 2.3: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink VP310/MT312/ZL10313 based" + +2.) Revision 2.6: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0299 based" + +3.) Revision 2.7: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Samsung S5H1420 based" +c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Integrant ITD1000 Zero IF tuner for DVB-S/DSS" +d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller" + +4.) Revision 2.8: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24113/CX24128 tuner for DVB-S/DSS" +c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Conexant CX24123 based" +d.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ISL6421 SEC controller" + +5.) DVB-T card: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Zarlink MT352 based" + +6.) DVB-C card: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "ST STV0297 based" + +7.) ATSC card 1st generation: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Broadcom BCM3510" + +8.) ATSC card 2nd generation: +a.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "Customise the frontend modules to build" +b.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "NxtWave Communications NXT2002/NXT2004 based" +c.)"Multimedia devices" => "Customise DVB frontends" => "LG Electronics LGDT3302/LGDT3303 based" + +Author: Uwe Bugla December 2008 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2a1fcdf08230522bd5024f91da24aaa6e8d81f59 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Sat, 29 Nov 2008 21:36:58 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9820): v4l2: add v4l2_device and v4l2_subdev structs to the v4l2 framework. Start implementing a proper v4l2 framework as discussed during the Linux Plumbers Conference 2008. Introduces v4l2_device (for device instances) and v4l2_subdev (representing sub-device instances). Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Reviewed-by: Laurent Pinchart Reviewed-by: Guennadi Liakhovetski Reviewed-by: Andy Walls Reviewed-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 362 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 362 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..60eaf54e7ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +Overview of the V4L2 driver framework +===================================== + +This text documents the various structures provided by the V4L2 framework and +their relationships. + + +Introduction +------------ + +The V4L2 drivers tend to be very complex due to the complexity of the +hardware: most devices have multiple ICs, export multiple device nodes in +/dev, and create also non-V4L2 devices such as DVB, ALSA, FB, I2C and input +(IR) devices. + +Especially the fact that V4L2 drivers have to setup supporting ICs to +do audio/video muxing/encoding/decoding makes it more complex than most. +Usually these ICs are connected to the main bridge driver through one or +more I2C busses, but other busses can also be used. Such devices are +called 'sub-devices'. + +For a long time the framework was limited to the video_device struct for +creating V4L device nodes and video_buf for handling the video buffers +(note that this document does not discuss the video_buf framework). + +This meant that all drivers had to do the setup of device instances and +connecting to sub-devices themselves. Some of this is quite complicated +to do right and many drivers never did do it correctly. + +There is also a lot of common code that could never be refactored due to +the lack of a framework. + +So this framework sets up the basic building blocks that all drivers +need and this same framework should make it much easier to refactor +common code into utility functions shared by all drivers. + + +Structure of a driver +--------------------- + +All drivers have the following structure: + +1) A struct for each device instance containing the device state. + +2) A way of initializing and commanding sub-devices (if any). + +3) Creating V4L2 device nodes (/dev/videoX, /dev/vbiX, /dev/radioX and + /dev/vtxX) and keeping track of device-node specific data. + +4) Filehandle-specific structs containing per-filehandle data. + +This is a rough schematic of how it all relates: + + device instances + | + +-sub-device instances + | + \-V4L2 device nodes + | + \-filehandle instances + + +Structure of the framework +-------------------------- + +The framework closely resembles the driver structure: it has a v4l2_device +struct for the device instance data, a v4l2_subdev struct to refer to +sub-device instances, the video_device struct stores V4L2 device node data +and in the future a v4l2_fh struct will keep track of filehandle instances +(this is not yet implemented). + + +struct v4l2_device +------------------ + +Each device instance is represented by a struct v4l2_device (v4l2-device.h). +Very simple devices can just allocate this struct, but most of the time you +would embed this struct inside a larger struct. + +You must register the device instance: + + v4l2_device_register(struct device *dev, struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev); + +Registration will initialize the v4l2_device struct and link dev->driver_data +to v4l2_dev. Registration will also set v4l2_dev->name to a value derived from +dev (driver name followed by the bus_id, to be precise). You may change the +name after registration if you want. + +You unregister with: + + v4l2_device_unregister(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev); + +Unregistering will also automatically unregister all subdevs from the device. + +Sometimes you need to iterate over all devices registered by a specific +driver. This is usually the case if multiple device drivers use the same +hardware. E.g. the ivtvfb driver is a framebuffer driver that uses the ivtv +hardware. The same is true for alsa drivers for example. + +You can iterate over all registered devices as follows: + +static int callback(struct device *dev, void *p) +{ + struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = dev_get_drvdata(dev); + + /* test if this device was inited */ + if (v4l2_dev == NULL) + return 0; + ... + return 0; +} + +int iterate(void *p) +{ + struct device_driver *drv; + int err; + + /* Find driver 'ivtv' on the PCI bus. + pci_bus_type is a global. For USB busses use usb_bus_type. */ + drv = driver_find("ivtv", &pci_bus_type); + /* iterate over all ivtv device instances */ + err = driver_for_each_device(drv, NULL, p, callback); + put_driver(drv); + return err; +} + +Sometimes you need to keep a running counter of the device instance. This is +commonly used to map a device instance to an index of a module option array. + +The recommended approach is as follows: + +static atomic_t drv_instance = ATOMIC_INIT(0); + +static int __devinit drv_probe(struct pci_dev *dev, + const struct pci_device_id *pci_id) +{ + ... + state->instance = atomic_inc_return(&drv_instance) - 1; +} + + +struct v4l2_subdev +------------------ + +Many drivers need to communicate with sub-devices. These devices can do all +sort of tasks, but most commonly they handle audio and/or video muxing, +encoding or decoding. For webcams common sub-devices are sensors and camera +controllers. + +Usually these are I2C devices, but not necessarily. In order to provide the +driver with a consistent interface to these sub-devices the v4l2_subdev struct +(v4l2-subdev.h) was created. + +Each sub-device driver must have a v4l2_subdev struct. This struct can be +stand-alone for simple sub-devices or it might be embedded in a larger struct +if more state information needs to be stored. Usually there is a low-level +device struct (e.g. i2c_client) that contains the device data as setup +by the kernel. It is recommended to store that pointer in the private +data of v4l2_subdev using v4l2_set_subdevdata(). That makes it easy to go +from a v4l2_subdev to the actual low-level bus-specific device data. + +You also need a way to go from the low-level struct to v4l2_subdev. For the +common i2c_client struct the i2c_set_clientdata() call is used to store a +v4l2_subdev pointer, for other busses you may have to use other methods. + +From the bridge driver perspective you load the sub-device module and somehow +obtain the v4l2_subdev pointer. For i2c devices this is easy: you call +i2c_get_clientdata(). For other busses something similar needs to be done. +Helper functions exists for sub-devices on an I2C bus that do most of this +tricky work for you. + +Each v4l2_subdev contains function pointers that sub-device drivers can +implement (or leave NULL if it is not applicable). Since sub-devices can do +so many different things and you do not want to end up with a huge ops struct +of which only a handful of ops are commonly implemented, the function pointers +are sorted according to category and each category has its own ops struct. + +The top-level ops struct contains pointers to the category ops structs, which +may be NULL if the subdev driver does not support anything from that category. + +It looks like this: + +struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops { + int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_chip_ident *chip); + int (*log_status)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd); + int (*init)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, u32 val); + ... +}; + +struct v4l2_subdev_tuner_ops { + ... +}; + +struct v4l2_subdev_audio_ops { + ... +}; + +struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops { + ... +}; + +struct v4l2_subdev_ops { + const struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops *core; + const struct v4l2_subdev_tuner_ops *tuner; + const struct v4l2_subdev_audio_ops *audio; + const struct v4l2_subdev_video_ops *video; +}; + +The core ops are common to all subdevs, the other categories are implemented +depending on the sub-device. E.g. a video device is unlikely to support the +audio ops and vice versa. + +This setup limits the number of function pointers while still making it easy +to add new ops and categories. + +A sub-device driver initializes the v4l2_subdev struct using: + + v4l2_subdev_init(subdev, &ops); + +Afterwards you need to initialize subdev->name with a unique name and set the +module owner. This is done for you if you use the i2c helper functions. + +A device (bridge) driver needs to register the v4l2_subdev with the +v4l2_device: + + int err = v4l2_device_register_subdev(device, subdev); + +This can fail if the subdev module disappeared before it could be registered. +After this function was called successfully the subdev->dev field points to +the v4l2_device. + +You can unregister a sub-device using: + + v4l2_device_unregister_subdev(subdev); + +Afterwards the subdev module can be unloaded and subdev->dev == NULL. + +You can call an ops function either directly: + + err = subdev->ops->core->g_chip_ident(subdev, &chip); + +but it is better and easier to use this macro: + + err = v4l2_subdev_call(subdev, core, g_chip_ident, &chip); + +The macro will to the right NULL pointer checks and returns -ENODEV if subdev +is NULL, -ENOIOCTLCMD if either subdev->core or subdev->core->g_chip_ident is +NULL, or the actual result of the subdev->ops->core->g_chip_ident ops. + +It is also possible to call all or a subset of the sub-devices: + + v4l2_device_call_all(dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip); + +Any subdev that does not support this ops is skipped and error results are +ignored. If you want to check for errors use this: + + err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip); + +Any error except -ENOIOCTLCMD will exit the loop with that error. If no +errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occured, then 0 is returned. + +The second argument to both calls is a group ID. If 0, then all subdevs are +called. If non-zero, then only those whose group ID match that value will +be called. Before a bridge driver registers a subdev it can set subdev->grp_id +to whatever value it wants (it's 0 by default). This value is owned by the +bridge driver and the sub-device driver will never modify or use it. + +The group ID gives the bridge driver more control how callbacks are called. +For example, there may be multiple audio chips on a board, each capable of +changing the volume. But usually only one will actually be used when the +user want to change the volume. You can set the group ID for that subdev to +e.g. AUDIO_CONTROLLER and specify that as the group ID value when calling +v4l2_device_call_all(). That ensures that it will only go to the subdev +that needs it. + +The advantage of using v4l2_subdev is that it is a generic struct and does +not contain any knowledge about the underlying hardware. So a driver might +contain several subdevs that use an I2C bus, but also a subdev that is +controlled through GPIO pins. This distinction is only relevant when setting +up the device, but once the subdev is registered it is completely transparent. + + +I2C sub-device drivers +---------------------- + +Since these drivers are so common, special helper functions are available to +ease the use of these drivers (v4l2-common.h). + +The recommended method of adding v4l2_subdev support to an I2C driver is to +embed the v4l2_subdev struct into the state struct that is created for each +I2C device instance. Very simple devices have no state struct and in that case +you can just create a v4l2_subdev directly. + +A typical state struct would look like this (where 'chipname' is replaced by +the name of the chip): + +struct chipname_state { + struct v4l2_subdev sd; + ... /* additional state fields */ +}; + +Initialize the v4l2_subdev struct as follows: + + v4l2_i2c_subdev_init(&state->sd, client, subdev_ops); + +This function will fill in all the fields of v4l2_subdev and ensure that the +v4l2_subdev and i2c_client both point to one another. + +You should also add a helper inline function to go from a v4l2_subdev pointer +to a chipname_state struct: + +static inline struct chipname_state *to_state(struct v4l2_subdev *sd) +{ + return container_of(sd, struct chipname_state, sd); +} + +Use this to go from the v4l2_subdev struct to the i2c_client struct: + + struct i2c_client *client = v4l2_get_subdevdata(sd); + +And this to go from an i2c_client to a v4l2_subdev struct: + + struct v4l2_subdev *sd = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + +Finally you need to make a command function to make driver->command() +call the right subdev_ops functions: + +static int subdev_command(struct i2c_client *client, unsigned cmd, void *arg) +{ + return v4l2_subdev_command(i2c_get_clientdata(client), cmd, arg); +} + +If driver->command is never used then you can leave this out. Eventually the +driver->command usage should be removed from v4l. + +Make sure to call v4l2_device_unregister_subdev(sd) when the remove() callback +is called. This will unregister the sub-device from the bridge driver. It is +safe to call this even if the sub-device was never registered. + + +The bridge driver also has some helper functions it can use: + +struct v4l2_subdev *sd = v4l2_i2c_new_subdev(adapter, "module_foo", "chipid", 0x36); + +This loads the given module (can be NULL if no module needs to be loaded) and +calls i2c_new_device() with the given i2c_adapter and chip/address arguments. +If all goes well, then it registers the subdev with the v4l2_device. It gets +the v4l2_device by calling i2c_get_adapdata(adapter), so you should make sure +that adapdata is set to v4l2_device when you setup the i2c_adapter in your +driver. + +You can also use v4l2_i2c_new_probed_subdev() which is very similar to +v4l2_i2c_new_subdev(), except that it has an array of possible I2C addresses +that it should probe. Internally it calls i2c_new_probed_device(). + +Both functions return NULL if something went wrong. + + +struct video_device +------------------- + +Not yet documented. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3319dc98a742d445a660268a6ce3426ad0922e2a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Mon, 1 Dec 2008 14:44:02 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9848): gspca: Webcam 06f8:3004 added in sonixj. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 4c96adc0ba5..8d0210b2403 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -171,6 +171,7 @@ sunplus 06d6:0031 Trust 610 LCD PowerC@m Zoom spca506 06e1:a190 ADS Instant VCD ov534 06f8:3002 Hercules Blog Webcam ov534 06f8:3003 Hercules Dualpix HD Weblog +sonixj 06f8:3004 Hercules Classic Silver spca508 0733:0110 ViewQuest VQ110 spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043 spca501 0733:0401 Intel Create and Share -- cgit v1.2.3 From d7bb7317d4caca55de72e5bd2229d68ed7cce7af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Tue, 2 Dec 2008 06:56:47 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9849): gspca: Add the webcam 0c45:613a in the gspca documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 8d0210b2403..acf6c9f8e76 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -257,6 +257,7 @@ sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000 +sonixj 0c45:613a Microdia Sonix PC Camera sonixj 0c45:613b Surfer SN-206 sonixj 0c45:613c Sonix Pccam168 sonixj 0c45:6143 Sonix Pccam168 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 121520a7084b48cb26437c6e89d4b491c3e4d4d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Wed, 3 Dec 2008 07:19:22 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9853): gspca: Webcam 093a:2622 added in pac7311. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index acf6c9f8e76..72d31bd649c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -217,6 +217,7 @@ pac7311 093a:2608 Trust WB-3300p pac7311 093a:260e Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 pac7311 093a:260f SnakeCam pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x +pac7311 093a:2622 Genius Eye 312 pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 pac7311 093a:262a Webcam 300k -- cgit v1.2.3 From a9da98a4336df020e5f089b963295373c6c3e6b9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Wed, 3 Dec 2008 07:29:26 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9854): gspca: Add the webcam 0c45:60fe in the gspca documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 72d31bd649c..a38c87246da 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -253,6 +253,7 @@ sonixj 0c45:60c0 Sangha Sn535 sonixj 0c45:60ec SN9C105+MO4000 sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300 +sonixj 0c45:60fe Microdia Audio sonixj 0c45:6128 Microdia/Sonix SNP325 sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8852153548b31abb99c1c0772d03f92054f1f80d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Wed, 10 Dec 2008 05:06:13 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9870): gspca - vc032x: Webcam 15b8:6002 and sensor po1200 added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index a38c87246da..81d7d891c15 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -271,6 +271,7 @@ spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k ov534 1415:2000 Sony HD Eye for PS3 (SLEH 00201) pac207 145f:013a Trust WB-1300N +vc032x 15b8:6002 HP 2.0 Megapixel rz406aa spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC -- cgit v1.2.3 From c665f4dd99a584036c2bd79a6baa25b06cae42f8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Devin Heitmueller Date: Tue, 16 Dec 2008 23:35:23 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9922): em28xx: don't assume every eb1a:2820 reference design is a Prolink PlayTV USB2 Don't operate under the assumption that every device that uses the em2820 default USB ID is a Prolink PlayTV USB. We have an eeprom hash, so use that, since otherwise we cannot support other devices with the 2820 default USB ID (such as the ADS Tech Instant TV USB USBAV-704) Signed-off-by: Devin Heitmueller Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index a6734eb7bf7..0c4c721daba 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] - 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2821] + 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] -- cgit v1.2.3 From a47ddf1425554ca0b1e9b16b20a9d631e5daaaa8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Fri, 19 Dec 2008 10:20:22 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9943): v4l2: document video_device. Add the missing video_device documentation to v4l2-framework.txt. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 160 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 159 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 60eaf54e7ef..eeae76c22a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -86,6 +86,9 @@ to v4l2_dev. Registration will also set v4l2_dev->name to a value derived from dev (driver name followed by the bus_id, to be precise). You may change the name after registration if you want. +The first 'dev' argument is normally the struct device pointer of a pci_dev, +usb_device or platform_device. + You unregister with: v4l2_device_unregister(struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev); @@ -359,4 +362,159 @@ Both functions return NULL if something went wrong. struct video_device ------------------- -Not yet documented. +The actual device nodes in the /dev directory are created using the +video_device struct (v4l2-dev.h). This struct can either be allocated +dynamically or embedded in a larger struct. + +To allocate it dynamically use: + + struct video_device *vdev = video_device_alloc(); + + if (vdev == NULL) + return -ENOMEM; + + vdev->release = video_device_release; + +If you embed it in a larger struct, then you must set the release() +callback to your own function: + + struct video_device *vdev = &my_vdev->vdev; + + vdev->release = my_vdev_release; + +The release callback must be set and it is called when the last user +of the video device exits. + +The default video_device_release() callback just calls kfree to free the +allocated memory. + +You should also set these fields: + +- parent: set to the parent device (same device as was used to register + v4l2_device). +- name: set to something descriptive and unique. +- fops: set to the file_operations struct. +- ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance + (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the + future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. + +If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set .unlocked_ioctl to +__video_ioctl2 or .ioctl to video_ioctl2 in your file_operations struct. + + +video_device registration +------------------------- + +Next you register the video device: this will create the character device +for you. + + err = video_register_device(vdev, VFL_TYPE_GRABBER, -1); + if (err) { + video_device_release(vdev); // or kfree(my_vdev); + return err; + } + +Which device is registered depends on the type argument. The following +types exist: + +VFL_TYPE_GRABBER: videoX for video input/output devices +VFL_TYPE_VBI: vbiX for vertical blank data (i.e. closed captions, teletext) +VFL_TYPE_RADIO: radioX for radio tuners +VFL_TYPE_VTX: vtxX for teletext devices (deprecated, don't use) + +The last argument gives you a certain amount of control over the device +kernel number used (i.e. the X in videoX). Normally you will pass -1 to +let the v4l2 framework pick the first free number. But if a driver creates +many devices, then it can be useful to have different video devices in +separate ranges. For example, video capture devices start at 0, video +output devices start at 16. + +So you can use the last argument to specify a minimum kernel number and +the v4l2 framework will try to pick the first free number that is equal +or higher to what you passed. If that fails, then it will just pick the +first free number. + +Whenever a device node is created some attributes are also created for you. +If you look in /sys/class/video4linux you see the devices. Go into e.g. +video0 and you will see 'name' and 'index' attributes. The 'name' attribute +is the 'name' field of the video_device struct. The 'index' attribute is +a device node index that can be assigned by the driver, or that is calculated +for you. + +If you call video_register_device(), then the index is just increased by +1 for each device node you register. The first video device node you register +always starts off with 0. + +Alternatively you can call video_register_device_index() which is identical +to video_register_device(), but with an extra index argument. Here you can +pass a specific index value (between 0 and 31) that should be used. + +Users can setup udev rules that utilize the index attribute to make fancy +device names (e.g. 'mpegX' for MPEG video capture device nodes). + +After the device was successfully registered, then you can use these fields: + +- vfl_type: the device type passed to video_register_device. +- minor: the assigned device minor number. +- num: the device kernel number (i.e. the X in videoX). +- index: the device index number (calculated or set explicitly using + video_register_device_index). + +If the registration failed, then you need to call video_device_release() +to free the allocated video_device struct, or free your own struct if the +video_device was embedded in it. The vdev->release() callback will never +be called if the registration failed, nor should you ever attempt to +unregister the device if the registration failed. + + +video_device cleanup +-------------------- + +When the video device nodes have to be removed, either during the unload +of the driver or because the USB device was disconnected, then you should +unregister them: + + video_unregister_device(vdev); + +This will remove the device nodes from sysfs (causing udev to remove them +from /dev). + +After video_unregister_device() returns no new opens can be done. + +However, in the case of USB devices some application might still have one +of these device nodes open. You should block all new accesses to read, +write, poll, etc. except possibly for certain ioctl operations like +queueing buffers. + +When the last user of the video device node exits, then the vdev->release() +callback is called and you can do the final cleanup there. + + +video_device helper functions +----------------------------- + +There are a few useful helper functions: + +You can set/get driver private data in the video_device struct using: + +void *video_get_drvdata(struct video_device *dev); +void video_set_drvdata(struct video_device *dev, void *data); + +Note that you can safely call video_set_drvdata() before calling +video_register_device(). + +And this function: + +struct video_device *video_devdata(struct file *file); + +returns the video_device belonging to the file struct. + +The final helper function combines video_get_drvdata with +video_devdata: + +void *video_drvdata(struct file *file); + +You can go from a video_device struct to the v4l2_device struct using: + +struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = dev_get_drvdata(vdev->parent); + -- cgit v1.2.3 From ca8959bb07f27514f811200b4f71669b1783dc54 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Mon, 15 Dec 2008 04:12:57 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9984): gspca - pac7311: Webcam 093a:262c added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 81d7d891c15..a5545945648 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -221,6 +221,7 @@ pac7311 093a:2622 Genius Eye 312 pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 pac7311 093a:262a Webcam 300k +pac7311 093a:262c Philips SPC 230 NC zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 87945895bf14b0b4dacbcef6dc08f284177affc8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans de Goede Date: Sat, 20 Dec 2008 14:30:58 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9992): gspca - pac207: Webcam 093a:2461 added. Signed-off-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index a5545945648..ec00740e6c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -202,7 +202,8 @@ sunplus 08ca:2050 Medion MD 41437 sunplus 08ca:2060 Aiptek PocketDV5300 tv8532 0923:010f ICM532 cams mars 093a:050f Mars-Semi Pc-Camera -pac207 093a:2460 PAC207 Qtec Webcam 100 +pac207 093a:2460 Qtec Webcam 100 +pac207 093a:2461 HP Webcam pac207 093a:2463 Philips SPC 220 NC pac207 093a:2464 Labtec Webcam 1200 pac207 093a:2468 PAC207 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 88a40cfbf25d82758237250a04d9bed51266215c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Fabio Rossi Date: Fri, 26 Dec 2008 14:41:48 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (9999): gspca - zc3xx: Webcam 046d:089d added. Signed-off-by: Fabio Rossi Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index ec00740e6c4..f34155f33a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ zc3xx 0461:0a00 MicroInnovation WebCam320 spca500 046d:0890 Logitech QuickCam traveler vc032x 046d:0892 Logitech Orbicam vc032x 046d:0896 Logitech Orbicam +zc3xx 046d:089d Logitech QuickCam E2500 zc3xx 046d:08a0 Logitech QC IM zc3xx 046d:08a1 Logitech QC IM 0x08A1 +sound zc3xx 046d:08a2 Labtec Webcam Pro -- cgit v1.2.3 From 71d50f30724c901c3d8cc7a19bdb3c33e1ee5463 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans de Goede Date: Sat, 27 Dec 2008 03:43:53 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10044): gspca - pac7311: Webcam 093a:2620 added. Signed-off-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index f34155f33a2..5daf2c80167 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -218,6 +218,7 @@ pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 pac7311 093a:2608 Trust WB-3300p pac7311 093a:260e Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 pac7311 093a:260f SnakeCam +pac7311 093a:2620 Apollo AC-905 pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x pac7311 093a:2622 Genius Eye 312 pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4c98834addfee3fdd42c505c37569261bf669d94 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Erik Andren Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 07:35:23 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10048): gspca - stv06xx: New subdriver. Signed-off-by: Erik Andren Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 5daf2c80167..f54281d78c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -50,6 +50,9 @@ ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam spca508 0461:0815 Micro Innovation IC200 sunplus 0461:0821 Fujifilm MV-1 zc3xx 0461:0a00 MicroInnovation WebCam320 +stv06xx 046d:0840 QuickCam Express +stv06xx 046d:0850 LEGO cam / QuickCam Web +stv06xx 046d:0870 Dexxa WebCam USB spca500 046d:0890 Logitech QuickCam traveler vc032x 046d:0892 Logitech Orbicam vc032x 046d:0896 Logitech Orbicam -- cgit v1.2.3 From da3bcb5d909925397715dff4a7584f21f9857bfa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Francois Moine Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 09:06:09 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10050): gspca - vc032x: Webcam 046d:0897 added. Signed-off-by: Jean-Francois Moine Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index f54281d78c1..1c58a763014 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ stv06xx 046d:0870 Dexxa WebCam USB spca500 046d:0890 Logitech QuickCam traveler vc032x 046d:0892 Logitech Orbicam vc032x 046d:0896 Logitech Orbicam +vc032x 046d:0897 Logitech QuickCam for Dell notebooks zc3xx 046d:089d Logitech QuickCam E2500 zc3xx 046d:08a0 Logitech QC IM zc3xx 046d:08a1 Logitech QC IM 0x08A1 +sound -- cgit v1.2.3 From 1e1addd57bdf56c51dbc292d7760ea3d207fe833 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Date: Sat, 27 Dec 2008 21:38:14 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10055): em28xx: Add entry for PixelView PlayTV Box 4 Added board PixelView PlayTV Box 4 Thanks to Vildenei Negrao Pereira for testing and data collection. Signed-off-by: Douglas Schilling Landgraf Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 0c4c721daba..96b1eb8ac87 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -59,3 +59,4 @@ 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] 59 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Mini (em2874) [2304:023f] 60 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 850 (em2883) [2040:651f] + 61 -> Pixelview PlayTV Box 4 USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) -- cgit v1.2.3 From e890759220759dfe4f3bea91a2deafb565ec10e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Devin Heitmueller Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 22:34:35 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10120): em28xx: remove redundant Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 100 profile The DVC 100 profile is redundant since we already have an existing identical profile named "Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100" Signed-off-by: Devin Heitmueller Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 96b1eb8ac87..79fd7f97a36 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -27,7 +27,6 @@ 26 -> Hercules Smart TV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 27 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (Philips FM1216ME) (em2820/em2840) 28 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II Deluxe (em2820/em2840) - 29 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0 (em2820/em2840) 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9 (em2821) 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV (em2821) -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7ed3a7a3113a5399a4591fdf1f2a07c9cd954853 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Devin Heitmueller Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 22:39:42 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10121): em28xx: remove worthless Pinnacle PCTV HD Mini 80e device profile The Pinnacle 80e cannot be supported since Micronas yanked their driver support for the drx-j chipset at the last minute. Remove the device profile since it cannot work without the drx driver and it being there is only likely to confuse people into thinking the device is supported but not working. Signed-off-by: Devin Heitmueller Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx | 1 - 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 79fd7f97a36..75bded8a4aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -56,6 +56,5 @@ 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] - 59 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Mini (em2874) [2304:023f] 60 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 850 (em2883) [2040:651f] 61 -> Pixelview PlayTV Box 4 USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) -- cgit v1.2.3 From aa16c10a347e887ec9505de9eacf3675938be722 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: =?UTF-8?q?N=C3=A9meth=20M=C3=A1rton?= Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 16:37:14 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10128): modify V4L documentation to be a valid XHTML MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Modify Documentation/video4linux/API.html to be a valid XHTML 1.0 Strict. The result was verified using the http://validator.w3.org/ service. Signed-off-by: Márton Németh Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/API.html | 43 ++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------- 1 file changed, 27 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/API.html b/Documentation/video4linux/API.html index afbe9ae7ee9..d749d41f647 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/API.html +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/API.html @@ -1,16 +1,27 @@ -V4L API -

Video For Linux APIs

- - - -
- -V4L original API - -Obsoleted by V4L2 API -
- -V4L2 API - -Should be used for new projects -
+ + + + + V4L API + + +

Video For Linux APIs

+ + + + + + + + + +
+ V4L original API + + Obsoleted by V4L2 API +
+ V4L2 API + Should be used for new projects +
+ + -- cgit v1.2.3 From c3673464ebc004a3d82063cd41b9cf74d1b55db2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karen Xie Date: Tue, 9 Dec 2008 14:15:32 -0800 Subject: [SCSI] cxgb3i: Add cxgb3i iSCSI driver. This patch implements the cxgb3i iscsi connection acceleration for the open-iscsi initiator. The cxgb3i driver offers the iscsi PDU based offload: - digest insertion and verification - payload direct-placement into host memory buffer. Signed-off-by: Karen Xie Signed-off-by: James Bottomley --- Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt | 85 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 85 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt b/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8141fa01978 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/cxgb3i.txt @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +Chelsio S3 iSCSI Driver for Linux + +Introduction +============ + +The Chelsio T3 ASIC based Adapters (S310, S320, S302, S304, Mezz cards, etc. +series of products) supports iSCSI acceleration and iSCSI Direct Data Placement +(DDP) where the hardware handles the expensive byte touching operations, such +as CRC computation and verification, and direct DMA to the final host memory +destination: + + - iSCSI PDU digest generation and verification + + On transmitting, Chelsio S3 h/w computes and inserts the Header and + Data digest into the PDUs. + On receiving, Chelsio S3 h/w computes and verifies the Header and + Data digest of the PDUs. + + - Direct Data Placement (DDP) + + S3 h/w can directly place the iSCSI Data-In or Data-Out PDU's + payload into pre-posted final destination host-memory buffers based + on the Initiator Task Tag (ITT) in Data-In or Target Task Tag (TTT) + in Data-Out PDUs. + + - PDU Transmit and Recovery + + On transmitting, S3 h/w accepts the complete PDU (header + data) + from the host driver, computes and inserts the digests, decomposes + the PDU into multiple TCP segments if necessary, and transmit all + the TCP segments onto the wire. It handles TCP retransmission if + needed. + + On receving, S3 h/w recovers the iSCSI PDU by reassembling TCP + segments, separating the header and data, calculating and verifying + the digests, then forwards the header to the host. The payload data, + if possible, will be directly placed into the pre-posted host DDP + buffer. Otherwise, the payload data will be sent to the host too. + +The cxgb3i driver interfaces with open-iscsi initiator and provides the iSCSI +acceleration through Chelsio hardware wherever applicable. + +Using the cxgb3i Driver +======================= + +The following steps need to be taken to accelerates the open-iscsi initiator: + +1. Load the cxgb3i driver: "modprobe cxgb3i" + + The cxgb3i module registers a new transport class "cxgb3i" with open-iscsi. + + * in the case of recompiling the kernel, the cxgb3i selection is located at + Device Drivers + SCSI device support ---> + [*] SCSI low-level drivers ---> + Chelsio S3xx iSCSI support + +2. Create an interface file located under /etc/iscsi/ifaces/ for the new + transport class "cxgb3i". + + The content of the file should be in the following format: + iface.transport_name = cxgb3i + iface.net_ifacename = + iface.ipaddress = + + * if iface.ipaddress is specified, needs to be either the + same as the ethX's ip address or an address on the same subnet. Make + sure the ip address is unique in the network. + +3. edit /etc/iscsi/iscsid.conf + The default setting for MaxRecvDataSegmentLength (131072) is too big, + replace "node.conn[0].iscsi.MaxRecvDataSegmentLength" to be a value no + bigger than 15360 (for example 8192): + + node.conn[0].iscsi.MaxRecvDataSegmentLength = 8192 + + * The login would fail for a normal session if MaxRecvDataSegmentLength is + too big. A error message in the format of + "cxgb3i: ERR! MaxRecvSegmentLength too big. Need to be <= ." + would be logged to dmesg. + +4. To direct open-iscsi traffic to go through cxgb3i's accelerated path, + "-I " option needs to be specified with most of the + iscsiadm command. is the transport interface file created + in step 2. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 94409d6e1088517b6d6c8e669c604cc86d08ac1b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Anton Vorontsov Date: Thu, 18 Dec 2008 19:37:23 +0300 Subject: powerpc: Add device tree bindings for BCSR GPIO banks The patch adds bindings for BCSR GPIO banks, the bindings are used to describe particular BCSR registers that act as simple GPIO controllers. These GPIO banks might control power switches, SPI chip-selects, LEDs, etc. While at it, also fix "length" spelling error in the PIXIS FPGA bindings. Signed-off-by: Anton Vorontsov Signed-off-by: Kumar Gala --- Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt | 32 +++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 31 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt index 81a917ef96e..6c974d28eeb 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA. Required properities: - compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis". -- reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register +- reg : should contain the address and the length of the FPPGA register set. Example (MPC8610HPCD): @@ -27,3 +27,33 @@ Example (MPC8610HPCD): compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis"; reg = <0xe8000000 32>; }; + +* Freescale BCSR GPIO banks + +Some BCSR registers act as simple GPIO controllers, each such +register can be represented by the gpio-controller node. + +Required properities: +- compatible : Should be "fsl,-bcsr-gpio". +- reg : Should contain the address and the length of the GPIO bank + register. +- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the + second cell is used to specify optional paramters (currently unused). +- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller. + +Example: + + bcsr@1,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr"; + reg = <1 0 0x8000>; + ranges = <0 1 0 0x8000>; + + bcsr13: gpio-controller@d { + #gpio-cells = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr-gpio"; + reg = <0xd 1>; + gpio-controller; + }; + }; -- cgit v1.2.3 From 80736d41f895bc472b2433a1c27fa6d4afe6ca35 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Artem Bityutskiy Date: Tue, 30 Dec 2008 17:44:02 +0200 Subject: UBIFS: fix numerous spelling mistakes Signed-off-by: Artem Bityutskiy --- Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index 2d0db5482d2..84da2a4ba25 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to of this option is that corruption of the contents of a file can go unnoticed. chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes -compr=none override defoult comressor and set it to "none" -compr=lzo override defoult comressor and set it to "lzo" -compr=zlib override defoult comressor and set it to "zlib" +compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none" +compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo" +compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib" Quick usage instructions -- cgit v1.2.3 From 277d342fc423fca5e66e677fe629d1b2f8f1b9e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Moore Date: Wed, 31 Dec 2008 12:54:11 -0500 Subject: selinux: Deprecate and schedule the removal of the the compat_net functionality This patch is the first step towards removing the old "compat_net" code from the kernel. Secmark, the "compat_net" replacement was first introduced in 2.6.18 (September 2006) and the major Linux distributions with SELinux support have transitioned to Secmark so it is time to start deprecating the "compat_net" mechanism. Testing a patched version of 2.6.28-rc6 with the initial release of Fedora Core 5 did not show any problems when running in enforcing mode. This patch adds an entry to the feature-removal-schedule.txt file and removes the SECURITY_SELINUX_ENABLE_SECMARK_DEFAULT configuration option, forcing Secmark on by default although it can still be disabled at runtime. The patch also makes the Secmark permission checks "dynamic" in the sense that they are only executed when Secmark is configured; this should help prevent problems with older distributions that have not yet migrated to Secmark. Signed-off-by: Paul Moore Acked-by: James Morris --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 12 ++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index dc7c681e532..a0ed3964a21 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -324,3 +324,15 @@ When: 2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely) Why: Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use i2c_driver->probe() and ->remove() instead. Who: Jean Delvare + +--------------------------- + +What: SELinux "compat_net" functionality +When: 2.6.30 at the earliest +Why: In 2.6.18 the Secmark concept was introduced to replace the "compat_net" + network access control functionality of SELinux. Secmark offers both + better performance and greater flexibility than the "compat_net" + mechanism. Now that the major Linux distributions have moved to + Secmark, it is time to deprecate the older mechanism and start the + process of removing the old code. +Who: Paul Moore -- cgit v1.2.3 From be42c4c433c2c0d3f1583c08908fead00d36d222 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Zhaolei Date: Mon, 1 Dec 2008 14:34:58 -0800 Subject: correct wrong function name of d_put in kernel document and source comment no function named d_put(), it should be dput(). Impact: fix document and comment, no functionality changed Signed-off-by: Zhao Lei Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Al Viro --- Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 5579bda58a6..041cb771d50 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ manipulate dentries: d_lookup: look up a dentry given its parent and path name component It looks up the child of that given name from the dcache hash table. If it is found, the reference count is incremented - and the dentry is returned. The caller must use d_put() + and the dentry is returned. The caller must use dput() to free the dentry when it finishes using it. For further information on dentry locking, please refer to the document -- cgit v1.2.3 From fd659fd6275d3426d7967da1f0e3638bbbd2fedb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Eric Dumazet Date: Wed, 10 Dec 2008 09:35:45 -0800 Subject: fix f_count description in Documentation/filesystems/files.txt Documentation/filesystems/files.txt was not updated when f_count became an atomic_long_t. atomic_long_inc_not_zero() is now used instead of atomic_inc_not_zero() Signed-off-by: Al Viro --- Documentation/filesystems/files.txt | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt index bb0142f6108..ac2facc50d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt @@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ the fdtable structure - 5. Handling of the file structures is special. Since the look-up of the fd (fget()/fget_light()) are lock-free, it is possible that look-up may race with the last put() operation on the - file structure. This is avoided using atomic_inc_not_zero() + file structure. This is avoided using atomic_long_inc_not_zero() on ->f_count : rcu_read_lock(); file = fcheck_files(files, fd); if (file) { - if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count)) + if (atomic_long_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count)) *fput_needed = 1; else /* Didn't get the reference, someone's freed */ @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ the fdtable structure - .... return file; - atomic_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or + atomic_long_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or goes to zero during increment. If it does, we fail fget()/fget_light(). -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6badd79bd002788aaec27b50a74ab69ef65ab8ee Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Al Viro Date: Fri, 26 Dec 2008 00:57:40 -0500 Subject: kill ->dir_notify() Remove the hopelessly misguided ->dir_notify(). The only instance (cifs) has been broken by design from the very beginning; the objects it creates are never destroyed, keep references to struct file they can outlive, nothing that could possibly evict them exists on close(2) path *and* no locking whatsoever is done to prevent races with close(), should the previous, er, deficiencies someday be dealt with. Signed-off-by: Al Viro --- Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 2 -- Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt | 3 --- 2 files changed, 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 23d2f4460de..ccec5539438 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -394,7 +394,6 @@ prototypes: unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); int (*check_flags)(int); - int (*dir_notify)(struct file *, unsigned long); }; locking rules: @@ -424,7 +423,6 @@ sendfile: no sendpage: no get_unmapped_area: no check_flags: no -dir_notify: no ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 041cb771d50..ef19afa186a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -733,7 +733,6 @@ struct file_operations { ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t, loff_t *, int); unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); int (*check_flags)(int); - int (*dir_notify)(struct file *filp, unsigned long arg); int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, size_t, unsigned int); ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int); @@ -800,8 +799,6 @@ otherwise noted. check_flags: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_SETFL command - dir_notify: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_NOTIFY command - flock: called by the flock(2) system call splice_write: called by the VFS to splice data from a pipe to a file. This -- cgit v1.2.3 From 93c164af19f608c5f737eb9bed8cb4de3a872329 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: FUJITA Tomonori Date: Fri, 2 Jan 2009 16:12:51 +0100 Subject: remove ide-scsi As planed, this removes ide-scsi. The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which eliminates the need for ide-scsi. ide-scsi has been unmaintained and marked as deprecated. Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori Cc: James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 9 --------- 1 file changed, 9 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index dc7c681e532..df18d87c483 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -310,15 +310,6 @@ Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki --------------------------- -What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI) -When: 2.6.29 -Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which - eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more - efficient in every way. -Who: FUJITA Tomonori - ---------------------------- - What: i2c_attach_client(), i2c_detach_client(), i2c_driver->detach_client() When: 2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely) Why: Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use -- cgit v1.2.3 From 784c4d8b1b1e66f8c45e8b889613f4982f525b2b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sukadev Bhattiprolu Date: Fri, 2 Jan 2009 13:42:34 +0000 Subject: Document usage of multiple-instances of devpts Changelog [v2]: - Add note indicating strict isolation is not possible unless all mounts of devpts use the 'newinstance' mount option. Signed-off-by: Sukadev Bhattiprolu Signed-off-by: Alan Cox Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt | 132 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 132 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..68dffd87f9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + +To support containers, we now allow multiple instances of devpts filesystem, +such that indices of ptys allocated in one instance are independent of indices +allocated in other instances of devpts. + +To preserve backward compatibility, this support for multiple instances is +enabled only if: + + - CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y, and + - '-o newinstance' mount option is specified while mounting devpts + +IOW, devpts now supports both single-instance and multi-instance semantics. + +If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=n, there is no change in behavior and +this referred to as the "legacy" mode. In this mode, the new mount options +(-o newinstance and -o ptmxmode) will be ignored with a 'bogus option' message +on console. + +If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and devpts is mounted without the +'newinstance' option (as in current start-up scripts) the new mount binds +to the initial kernel mount of devpts. This mode is referred to as the +'single-instance' mode and the current, single-instance semantics are +preserved, i.e PTYs are common across the system. + +The only difference between this single-instance mode and the legacy mode +is the presence of new, '/dev/pts/ptmx' node with permissions 0000, which +can safely be ignored. + +If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and 'newinstance' option is specified, +the mount is considered to be in the multi-instance mode and a new instance +of the devpts fs is created. Any ptys created in this instance are independent +of ptys in other instances of devpts. Like in the single-instance mode, the +/dev/pts/ptmx node is present. To effectively use the multi-instance mode, +open of /dev/ptmx must be a redirected to '/dev/pts/ptmx' using a symlink or +bind-mount. + +Eg: A container startup script could do the following: + + $ chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx + $ rm /dev/ptmx + $ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx + $ ns_exec -cm /bin/bash + + # We are now in new container + + $ umount /dev/pts + $ mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts + $ sshd -p 1234 + +where 'ns_exec -cm /bin/bash' calls clone() with CLONE_NEWNS flag and execs +/bin/bash in the child process. A pty created by the sshd is not visible in +the original mount of /dev/pts. + +User-space changes +------------------ + +In multi-instance mode (i.e '-o newinstance' mount option is specified at least +once), following user-space issues should be noted. + +1. If -o newinstance mount option is never used, /dev/pts/ptmx can be ignored + and no change is needed to system-startup scripts. + +2. To effectively use multi-instance mode (i.e -o newinstance is specified) + administrators or startup scripts should "redirect" open of /dev/ptmx to + /dev/pts/ptmx using either a bind mount or symlink. + + $ mount -t devpts -o newinstance devpts /dev/pts + + followed by either + + $ rm /dev/ptmx + $ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx + $ chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx + or + $ mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx + +3. The '/dev/ptmx -> pts/ptmx' symlink is the preferred method since it + enables better error-reporting and treats both single-instance and + multi-instance mounts similarly. + + But this method requires that system-startup scripts set the mode of + /dev/pts/ptmx correctly (default mode is 0000). The scripts can set the + mode by, either + + - adding ptmxmode mount option to devpts entry in /etc/fstab, or + - using 'chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx' + +4. If multi-instance mode mount is needed for containers, but the system + startup scripts have not yet been updated, container-startup scripts + should bind mount /dev/ptmx to /dev/pts/ptmx to avoid breaking single- + instance mounts. + + Or, in general, container-startup scripts should use: + + mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0666 devpts /dev/pts + if [ ! -L /dev/ptmx ]; then + mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx + fi + + When all devpts mounts are multi-instance, /dev/ptmx can permanently be + a symlink to pts/ptmx and the bind mount can be ignored. + +5. A multi-instance mount that is not accompanied by the /dev/ptmx to + /dev/pts/ptmx redirection would result in an unusable/unreachable pty. + + mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts + + immediately followed by: + + open("/dev/ptmx") + + would create a pty, say /dev/pts/7, in the initial kernel mount. + But /dev/pts/7 would be invisible in the new mount. + +6. The permissions for /dev/pts/ptmx node should be specified when mounting + /dev/pts, using the '-o ptmxmode=%o' mount option (default is 0000). + + mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0644 devpts /dev/pts + + The permissions can be later be changed as usual with 'chmod'. + + chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx + +7. A mount of devpts without the 'newinstance' option results in binding to + initial kernel mount. This behavior while preserving legacy semantics, + does not provide strict isolation in a container environment. i.e by + mounting devpts without the 'newinstance' option, a container could + get visibility into the 'host' or root container's devpts. + + To workaround this and have strict isolation, all mounts of devpts, + including the mount in the root container, should use the newinstance + option. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 50a2a8b35edec09aff900a9b1c629776e11c5c88 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Mon, 22 Dec 2008 09:13:11 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10133): v4l2-framework: use correct comment style. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index eeae76c22a9..ba9344294d6 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -410,7 +410,7 @@ for you. err = video_register_device(vdev, VFL_TYPE_GRABBER, -1); if (err) { - video_device_release(vdev); // or kfree(my_vdev); + video_device_release(vdev); /* or kfree(my_vdev); */ return err; } -- cgit v1.2.3 From dfa9a5ae679ff2d23caa995d0f55a19abaf0596e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Tue, 23 Dec 2008 12:17:23 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10134): v4l2 doc: set v4l2_dev instead of parent. Update the documentation now that the v4l2_dev field is in. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index ba9344294d6..38d054aa0e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -390,8 +390,7 @@ allocated memory. You should also set these fields: -- parent: set to the parent device (same device as was used to register - v4l2_device). +- v4l2_dev: set to the v4l2_device parent device. - name: set to something descriptive and unique. - fops: set to the file_operations struct. - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance @@ -516,5 +515,4 @@ void *video_drvdata(struct file *file); You can go from a video_device struct to the v4l2_device struct using: -struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = dev_get_drvdata(vdev->parent); - +struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = vdev->v4l2_dev; -- cgit v1.2.3 From c7dd09dabc278b03980c8e93d0eee3843b5ad514 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Tue, 23 Dec 2008 13:42:25 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10136): v4l2 doc: update v4l2-framework.txt Mention the new v4l2_file_operations struct. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 38d054aa0e0..3b483c1e012 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -392,13 +392,16 @@ You should also set these fields: - v4l2_dev: set to the v4l2_device parent device. - name: set to something descriptive and unique. -- fops: set to the file_operations struct. +- fops: set to the v4l2_file_operations struct. - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. -If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set .unlocked_ioctl to -__video_ioctl2 or .ioctl to video_ioctl2 in your file_operations struct. +If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set either .unlocked_ioctl or +.ioctl to video_ioctl2 in your v4l2_file_operations struct. + +The v4l2_file_operations struct is a subset of file_operations. The main +difference is that the inode argument is omitted since it is never used. video_device registration -- cgit v1.2.3 From aecde8b53b8ee1330a5a8206200f0d6b8845a6e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans Verkuil Date: Tue, 30 Dec 2008 07:14:19 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10141): v4l2: debugging API changed to match against driver name instead of ID. Since the i2c driver ID will be removed in the near future we have to modify the v4l2 debugging API to use the driver name instead of driver ID. Note that this API is not used in applications other than v4l2-dbg.cpp as it is for debugging and testing only. Should anyone use the old VIDIOC_G_CHIP_IDENT, then this will be logged with a warning that it is deprecated and will be removed in 2.6.30. Signed-off-by: Hans Verkuil Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 3b483c1e012..ff124374e9b 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ may be NULL if the subdev driver does not support anything from that category. It looks like this: struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops { - int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_chip_ident *chip); + int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_dbg_chip_ident *chip); int (*log_status)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd); int (*init)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, u32 val); ... -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6a2d802ca01bd83b860145e7497a7a049c354cd7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Pham Thanh Nam Date: Tue, 30 Dec 2008 23:26:09 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10156): saa7134: Add support for Avermedia AVer TV GO 007 FM Plus This patch adds support for Avermedia AVer TV GO 007 FM Plus (M15C) on saa7134 driver (PCI ID 1461:f31d). Signed-off-by: Pham Thanh Nam Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 335aef4dcae..b8d470596b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -152,3 +152,4 @@ 151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV [1421:0380] 152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00 [1043:4857] 153 -> Kworld Plus TV Analog Lite PCI [17de:7128] +154 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM Plus [1461:f31d] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5e6de7d9a1a373414a41a7441100f90b71c6119f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Lord Date: Wed, 3 Dec 2008 15:26:15 -0300 Subject: V4L/DVB (10157): Add USB ID for the Sil4701 radio from DealExtreme Signed-off-by: Mark Lord Cc: Greg KH Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton [tobias.lorenz@gmx.net: Code beautifications and documentation added] Signed-off-by: Tobias Lorenz Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab --- Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt index 11c5fd22a33..49679e6aaa7 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt @@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ chips are known to work: - 10c4:818a: Silicon Labs USB FM Radio Reference Design - 06e1:a155: ADS/Tech FM Radio Receiver (formerly Instant FM Music) (RDX-155-EF) - 1b80:d700: KWorld USB FM Radio SnapMusic Mobile 700 (FM700) +- 10c5:819a: DealExtreme USB Radio Software -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2af238e455ef5fd31c2f7a06c2db3f13d843b9bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Fri, 29 Feb 2008 14:21:53 -0800 Subject: kbuild: make *config usage docs Create a kconfig user assistance guide, with a few tips and hints about using menuconfig, xconfig, and gconfig. Mostly contains user interface, environment variables, and search topics, along with mini.config/custom.config usage. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Sam Ravnborg --- Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX | 2 + Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt | 188 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 190 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX index 11464428545..54a118a20f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX @@ -4,5 +4,7 @@ kconfig-language.txt - specification of Config Language, the language in Kconfig files makefiles.txt - developer information for linux kernel makefiles +kconfig.txt + - usage help for make *config modules.txt - how to build modules and to install them diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..26a7c0a9319 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +This file contains some assistance for using "make *config". + +Use "make help" to list all of the possible configuration targets. + +The xconfig ('qconf') and menuconfig ('mconf') programs also +have embedded help text. Be sure to check it for navigation, +search, and other general help text. + +====================================================================== +General +-------------------------------------------------- + +New kernel releases often introduce new config symbols. Often more +important, new kernel releases may rename config symbols. When +this happens, using a previously working .config file and running +"make oldconfig" won't necessarily produce a working new kernel +for you, so you may find that you need to see what NEW kernel +symbols have been introduced. + +To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use + + cp user/some/old.config .config + yes "" | make oldconfig >conf.new + +and the config program will list as (NEW) any new symbols that have +unknown values. Of course, the .config file is also updated with +new (default) values, so you can use: + + grep "(NEW)" conf.new + +to see the new config symbols or you can 'diff' the previous and +new .config files to see the differences: + + diff .config.old .config | less + +(Yes, we need something better here.) + + +====================================================================== +menuconfig +-------------------------------------------------- + +SEARCHING for CONFIG symbols + +Searching in menuconfig: + + The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol + names, so you have to know something close to what you are + looking for. + + Example: + /hotplug + This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug", + e.g., HOTPLUG, HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG. + + For search help, enter / followed TAB-TAB-TAB (to highlight + ) and Enter. This will tell you that you can also use + regular expressions (regexes) in the search string, so if you + are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try + + /^hotplug + + +______________________________________________________________________ +Color Themes for 'menuconfig' + +It is possible to select different color themes using the variable +MENUCONFIG_COLOR. To select a theme use: + + make MENUCONFIG_COLOR= menuconfig + +Available themes are: + mono => selects colors suitable for monochrome displays + blackbg => selects a color scheme with black background + classic => theme with blue background. The classic look + bluetitle => a LCD friendly version of classic. (default) + +______________________________________________________________________ +Environment variables in 'menuconfig' + +KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG +-------------------------------------------------- +(partially based on lkml email from/by Rob Landley, re: miniconfig) +-------------------------------------------------- +The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can +also use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a +filename that contains config symbols that the user requires to be +set to a specific value. If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a +filename, "make *config" checks for a file named +"all{yes/mod/no/random}.config" (corresponding to the *config command +that was used) for symbol values that are to be forced. If this file +is not found, it checks for a file named "all.config" to contain forced +values. + +This enables you to create "miniature" config (miniconfig) or custom +config files containing just the config symbols that you are interested +in. Then the kernel config system generates the full .config file, +including dependencies of your miniconfig file, based on the miniconfig +file. + +This 'KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG' file is a config file which contains +(usually a subset of all) preset config symbols. These variable +settings are still subject to normal dependency checks. + +Examples: + KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=custom-notebook.config make allnoconfig +or + KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config make allnoconfig +or + make KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config allnoconfig + +These examples will disable most options (allnoconfig) but enable or +disable the options that are explicitly listed in the specified +mini-config files. + +KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE +-------------------------------------------------- +If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel +config udpates (requires explicit updates). + +KCONFIG_CONFIG +-------------------------------------------------- +This environment variable can be used to specify a default kernel config +file name to override the default name of ".config". + +KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG +-------------------------------------------------- +If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not +break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else. + +KCONFIG_NOTIMESTAMP +-------------------------------------------------- +If this environment variable exists and is non-null, the timestamp line +in generated .config files is omitted. + +KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG +-------------------------------------------------- +This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the +"auto.conf" file. Its default value is "include/config/auto.conf". + +KCONFIG_AUTOHEADER +-------------------------------------------------- +This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the +"autoconf.h" (header) file. Its default value is "include/linux/autoconf.h". + +______________________________________________________________________ +menuconfig User Interface Options +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +MENUCONFIG_MODE +-------------------------------------------------- +This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree. + +Example: + MENUCONFIG_MODE=single_menu make menuconfig + +====================================================================== +xconfig +-------------------------------------------------- + +Searching in xconfig: + + The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol + names, so you have to know something close to what you are + looking for. + + Example: + Ctrl-F hotplug + or + Menu: File, Search, hotplug + + lists all config symbol entries that contain "hotplug" in + the symbol name. In this Search dialog, you may change the + config setting for any of the entries that are not grayed out. + You can also enter a different search string without having + to return to the main menu. + + +====================================================================== +gconfig +-------------------------------------------------- + +Searching in gconfig: + + None (gconfig isn't maintained as well as xconfig or menuconfig); + however, gconfig does have a few more viewing choices than + xconfig does. + +### -- cgit v1.2.3 From acc08b516f25b79cfcff310e51d95048bfcf7b0d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sam Ravnborg Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 13:45:52 +0100 Subject: kbuild: document environment variables Add kbuild.txt to Documentation/kbuild More stuff can be added later - at least we have som of the varous environment variables documented now. Signed-off-by: Sam Ravnborg --- Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX | 8 ++- Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 126 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 131 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX index 54a118a20f2..e8d2b6d83a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX @@ -1,10 +1,12 @@ 00-INDEX - - this file: info on the kernel build process + - this file: info on the kernel build process +kbuild.txt + - developer information on kbuild +kconfig.txt + - usage help for make *config kconfig-language.txt - specification of Config Language, the language in Kconfig files makefiles.txt - developer information for linux kernel makefiles -kconfig.txt - - usage help for make *config modules.txt - how to build modules and to install them diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..51771847e81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +Environment variables + +KCPPFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional options to pass when preprocessing. The preprocessing options +will be used in all cases where kbuild do preprocessing including +building C files and assembler files. + +KAFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional options to the assembler. + +KCFLAGS +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional options to the C compiler. + +KBUILD_VERBOSE +-------------------------------------------------- +Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assinged same values as "V=...". +See make help for the full list. +Setting "V=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_VERBOSE. + +KBUILD_EXTMOD +-------------------------------------------------- +Set the directory to look for the kernel source when building external +modules. +The directory can be specified in several ways: +1) Use "M=..." on the command line +2) Environmnet variable KBUILD_EXTMOD +3) Environmnet variable SUBDIRS +The possibilities are listed in the order they take precedence. +Using "M=..." will always override the others. + +KBUILD_OUTPUT +-------------------------------------------------- +Specify the output directory when building the kernel. +The output directory can also be specificed using "O=...". +Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT + +ARCH +-------------------------------------------------- +Set ARCH to the architecture to be built. +In most cases the name of the architecture is the same as the +directory name found in the arch/ directory. +But some architectures suach as x86 and sparc has aliases. +x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit +sparc: sparc for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit + +CROSS_COMPILE +-------------------------------------------------- +Specify an optional fixed part of the binutils filename. +CROSS_COMPILE can be a part of the filename or the full path. + +CROSS_COMPILE is also used for ccache is some setups. + +CF +-------------------------------------------------- +Additional options for sparse. +CF is often used on the command-line like this: + + make CF=-Wbitwise C=2 + +INSTALL_PATH +-------------------------------------------------- +INSTALL_PATH specifies where to place the updated kernel and system map +images. Default is /boot, but you can set it to other values + + +MODLIB +-------------------------------------------------- +Specify where to install modules. +The default value is: + + $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE) + +The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored. + +INSTALL_MOD_PATH +-------------------------------------------------- +INSTALL_MOD_PATH specifies a prefix to MODLIB for module directory +relocations required by build roots. This is not defined in the +makefile but the argument can be passed to make if needed. + +INSTALL_MOD_STRIP +-------------------------------------------------- +INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be +stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then +the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, +INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command. + +INSTALL_FW_PATH +-------------------------------------------------- +INSTALL_FW_PATH specify where to install the firmware blobs. +The default value is: + + $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/firmware + +The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored. + +INSTALL_HDR_PATH +-------------------------------------------------- +INSTALL_HDR_PATH specify where to install user space headers when +executing "make headers_*". +The default value is: + + $(objtree)/usr + +$(objtree) is the directory where output files are saved. +The output directory is often set using "O=..." on the commandline. + +The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored. + +KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN +-------------------------------------------------- +KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN can be set to avoid error out in case of undefined +symbols in the final module linking stage. + +KBUILD_MODPOST_FINAL +-------------------------------------------------- +KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL can be set to skip the final link of modules. +This is solely usefull to speed up test compiles. + +KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS +-------------------------------------------------- +For modules use symbols from another modules. +See more details in modules.txt. -- cgit v1.2.3 From c31910672376dfb8d020e32afa7249763bcd924a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 11:14:25 -0500 Subject: ext4: Remove code to create the journal inode This code has been obsolete in quite some time, since the supported method for adding a journal inode is to use tune2fs (or to creating new filesystem with a journal via mke2fs or mkfs.ext4). Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 4 ---- 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index e3fcbea3ec8..9ec29d86ff8 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -149,10 +149,6 @@ journal_async_commit Commit block can be written to disk without waiting journal=update Update the ext4 file system's journal to the current format. -journal=inum When a journal already exists, this option is ignored. - Otherwise, it specifies the number of the inode which - will represent the ext4 file system's journal file. - journal_dev=devnum When the external journal device's major/minor numbers have changed, this option allows the user to specify the new journal location. The journal device is -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2ec220e27f5040aec1e88901c1b6ea3d135787ad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ken Chen Date: Mon, 10 Nov 2008 11:26:08 +0300 Subject: proc: add /proc/*/stack /proc/*/stack adds the ability to query a task's stack trace. It is more useful than /proc/*/wchan as it provides full stack trace instead of single depth. Example output: $ cat /proc/self/stack [] save_stack_trace_tsk+0x17/0x35 [] proc_pid_stack+0x4a/0x76 [] proc_single_show+0x4a/0x5e [] seq_read+0xf3/0x29f [] vfs_read+0x6d/0x91 [] sys_read+0x3b/0x60 [] syscall_call+0x7/0xb [] 0xffffffff [add save_stack_trace_tsk() on mips, ACK Ralf --adobriyan] Signed-off-by: Ken Chen Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 71df353e367..334ef2f983f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -140,6 +140,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc statm Process memory status information status Process status in human readable form wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan + stack Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE smaps Extension based on maps, the rss size for each mapped file .............................................................................. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a68979b857283daf4acc405e476dcc8812a3ff2b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tiger Yang Date: Fri, 14 Nov 2008 11:17:52 +0800 Subject: ocfs2: add mount option and Kconfig option for acl This patch adds the Kconfig option "CONFIG_OCFS2_FS_POSIX_ACL" and mount options "acl" to enable acls in Ocfs2. Signed-off-by: Tiger Yang Signed-off-by: Mark Fasheh --- Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 67310fbbb7d..c2a0871280a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -31,7 +31,6 @@ Features which OCFS2 does not support yet: - quotas - Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY) - Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease) - - POSIX ACLs Mount options ============= @@ -79,3 +78,5 @@ inode64 Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at bits of significance. user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes. nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. +acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. +noacl (*) Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support. -- cgit v1.2.3 From b3881f74b31b7d47d0f1c4d89ac3e7f0b9c05e3e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Mon, 5 Jan 2009 22:46:26 -0500 Subject: ext4: Add mount option to set kjournald's I/O priority Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" Cc: Jens Axboe --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 9ec29d86ff8..8938949b201 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -308,6 +308,13 @@ min_batch_time=usec This parameter sets the commit time (as multi-threaded, synchronous workloads on very fast disks, at the cost of increasing latency. +journal_ioprio=prio The I/O priority (from 0 to 7, where 0 is the + highest priorty) which should be used for I/O + operations submitted by kjournald2 during a + commit operation. This defaults to 3, which is + a slightly higher priority than the default I/O + priority. + Data Mode ========= There are 3 different data modes: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 025dfdafe77f20b3890981a394774baab7b9c827 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Frederik Schwarzer Date: Thu, 16 Oct 2008 19:02:37 +0200 Subject: trivial: fix then -> than typos in comments and documentation - (better, more, bigger ...) then -> (...) than Signed-off-by: Frederik Schwarzer Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet | 6 +++--- Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt | 2 +- Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc | 2 +- 3 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet index aef5a9b3684..4d184f2db0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ a sensor. Notice that some banks have both a read and a write address this is how the uGuru determines if a read from or a write to the bank is taking place, thus when reading you should always use the read address and when writing the -write address. The write address is always one (1) more then the read address. +write address. The write address is always one (1) more than the read address. uGuru ready @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW) Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold (R) Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold (R) Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold (R) -Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW) +Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds (RW) Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold (RW) * This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Byte 0: Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour. Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold (RW) Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW) -Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW) +Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds (RW) Byte 1: min threshold (scale as bank 0x26) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt index c3669a3fb4a..60d05eb77c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt @@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ A client would issue an operation by: MSG_MORE should be set in msghdr::msg_flags on all but the last part of the request. Multiple requests may be made simultaneously. - If a call is intended to go to a destination other then the default + If a call is intended to go to a destination other than the default specified through connect(), then msghdr::msg_name should be set on the first request message of that call. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index ae3f962a7cf..ff19a52fe00 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ Changes from 20040920 to 20041018 I/O completion path a little more, especially taking care of fast-pathing the non-error case. Also removes tons of dead members and defines from lpfc_scsi.h - e.g. lpfc_target is down - to nothing more then the lpfc_nodelist pointer. + to nothing more than the lpfc_nodelist pointer. * Added binary sysfs file to issue mbox commands * Replaced #if __BIG_ENDIAN with #if __BIG_ENDIAN_BITFIELD for compatibility with the user space applications. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0211a9c8508b2183e0e539509aad60414f1c3813 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Frederik Schwarzer Date: Mon, 29 Dec 2008 22:14:56 +0100 Subject: trivial: fix an -> a typos in documentation and comments It is always "an" if there is a vowel _spoken_ (not written). So it is: "an hour" (spoken vowel) but "a uniform" (spoken 'j') Signed-off-by: Frederik Schwarzer Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/dell_rbu.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt | 2 +- Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt | 2 +- 3 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt index 2c0d631de0c..c11b931f8f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt +++ b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt @@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded. Also echoing either mono ,packet or init in to image_type will free up the memory allocated by the driver. -If an user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2; -it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries to disappear. +If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2; +it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear. The entries can be recreated by doing the following echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type NOTE: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 71f0fe1fc1b..898b4987bb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -1475,7 +1475,7 @@ Sysfs interface changelog: 0x020100: Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling support. If you must, use it to know you should not - start an userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when + start a userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when NVRAM is compiled out by the user because it is unneeded/undesired in the first place). 0x020101: Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt index 839cbb71388..c0aab985bad 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ As mentioned above, main purpose of TUN/TAP driver is tunneling. It is used by VTun (http://vtun.sourceforge.net). Another interesting application using TUN/TAP is pipsecd -(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), an userspace IPSec +(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), a userspace IPSec implementation that can use complete kernel routing (unlike FreeS/WAN). 3. How does Virtual network device actually work ? -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8b5b8f4cea18cb30f748baa913234c62cdc64541 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Nick Andrew Date: Sat, 3 Jan 2009 19:00:37 +1100 Subject: trivial: Fix misspelling of "firmware" in docs for ncr53c8xx/sym53c8xx Fix misspelling of "firmware" in docs for ncr53c8xx/sym53c8xx It's spelled "firmware". Signed-off-by: Nick Andrew Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina --- Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx | 2 +- Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx | 2 +- 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx index a9f721aeb11..8b278c10edf 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version ncr53c8xx-3.4.1 - - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC. + - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC. - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs. Sun Jul 09 16:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx index ef985ec348e..02ffbc1e8a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version sym53c8xx-1.7.1 - - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC. + - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC. - Download of on-chip SRAM using memcpy_toio() doesn't work on PPC. Restore previous method (MEMORY MOVE from SCRIPTS). - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 02c84bde234eee4f2089ac3587d138607aaec777 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 17:21:00 +0100 Subject: ide: update warm-plug HOWTO MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Reported-by: Bruno Prémont Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz --- Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt index d5885468b07..98152bcd515 100644 --- a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt @@ -11,3 +11,8 @@ unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s) # echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan done + +NOTE: please make sure that partitions are unmounted and that there are +no other active references to devices before doing "delete_devices" step, +also do not attempt "scan" step on devices currently in use -- otherwise +results may be unpredictable and lead to data loss if you're unlucky -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0732b49c8c40c56033cff8986dbad55aa54a5d40 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Rusty Russell Date: Tue, 9 Dec 2008 08:32:14 +1030 Subject: kobject: Make Documentation/kobject.txt a little more coherent. While reading Documentation/kobject.txt: Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking and serialization. I expect better: You never see me hard with time word making sentence coherent stuff. Ever. Signed-off-by: Rusty Russell Acked-by: Eric W. Biederman Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kobject.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt index f5d2aad65a6..b2e374586bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kobject.txt +++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename(): int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name); -Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of -what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking +kobject_rename does not perform any locking or have a solid notion of +what names are valid so the caller must provide their own sanity checking and serialization. There is a function called kobject_set_name() but that is legacy cruft and -- cgit v1.2.3 From a2ab3d30005cdce45c2c7e31ad6743ad7975609a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Hans J. Koch" Date: Sat, 6 Dec 2008 02:25:13 +0100 Subject: UIO: Documentation for UIO ioport info handling This patch updates UIO documentation with the changes introduced by previous UIO patch. Signed-off-by: Hans J. Koch Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl | 97 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 97 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index df87d1b9360..6116b93608d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -41,6 +41,12 @@ GPL version 2. + + 0.6 + 2008-12-05 + hjk + Added description of portio sysfs attributes. + 0.5 2008-05-22 @@ -318,6 +324,54 @@ interested in translating it, please email me offset = N * getpagesize(); + + Sometimes there is hardware with memory-like regions that can not be + mapped with the technique described here, but there are still ways to + access them from userspace. The most common example are x86 ioports. + On x86 systems, userspace can access these ioports using + ioperm(), iopl(), + inb(), outb(), and similar + functions. + + + Since these ioport regions can not be mapped, they will not appear under + /sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/ like the normal memory + described above. Without information about the port regions a hardware + has to offer, it becomes difficult for the userspace part of the + driver to find out which ports belong to which UIO device. + + + To address this situation, the new directory + /sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/ was added. It only + exists if the driver wants to pass information about one or more port + regions to userspace. If that is the case, subdirectories named + port0, port1, and so on, + will appear underneath + /sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/. + + + Each portX/ directory contains three read-only + files that show start, size, and type of the port region: + + + + + start: The first port of this region. + + + + + size: The number of ports in this region. + + + + + porttype: A string describing the type of port. + + + + + @@ -355,6 +409,13 @@ mapping you need to fill one of the uio_mem structures. See the description below for details. + +struct uio_port port[ MAX_UIO_PORTS_REGIONS ]: Required +if you want to pass information about ioports to userspace. For each port +region you need to fill one of the uio_port structures. +See the description below for details. + + long irq: Required. If your hardware generates an interrupt, it's your modules task to determine the irq number during @@ -448,6 +509,42 @@ Please do not touch the kobj element of struct uio_mem! It is used by the UIO framework to set up sysfs files for this mapping. Simply leave it alone. + + +Sometimes, your device can have one or more port regions which can not be +mapped to userspace. But if there are other possibilities for userspace to +access these ports, it makes sense to make information about the ports +available in sysfs. For each region, you have to set up a +struct uio_port in the port[] array. +Here's a description of the fields of struct uio_port: + + + + +char *porttype: Required. Set this to one of the predefined +constants. Use UIO_PORT_X86 for the ioports found in x86 +architectures. + + + +unsigned long start: Required if the port region is used. +Fill in the number of the first port of this region. + + + +unsigned long size: Fill in the number of ports in this +region. If size is zero, the region is considered unused. +Note that you must initialize size +with zero for all unused regions. + + + + +Please do not touch the portio element of +struct uio_port! It is used internally by the UIO +framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone. + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From b8ac9fc0e8cda9f9776019c5b0464b0c6d2d4c90 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Stephen Rothwell Date: Fri, 12 Dec 2008 11:44:21 +0100 Subject: uio: make uio_info's name and version const These are only ever assigned constant strings and never modified. This was noticed because Wolfram Sang needed to cast the result of of_get_property() in order to assign it to the name field of a struct uio_info. Signed-off-by: Stephen Rothwell Signed-off-by: Hans J. Koch Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 6116b93608d..b787e4721c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -393,12 +393,12 @@ offset = N * getpagesize(); -char *name: Required. The name of your driver as +const char *name: Required. The name of your driver as it will appear in sysfs. I recommend using the name of your module for this. -char *version: Required. This string appears in +const char *version: Required. This string appears in /sys/class/uio/uioX/version. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 83982b6f47201c4c7767210d24d7d8c99567a0b3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Theodore Ts'o Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:53:16 -0500 Subject: ext4: Remove "extents" mount option This mount option is largely superfluous, and in fact the way it was implemented was buggy; if a filesystem which did not have the extents feature flag was mounted -o extents, the filesystem would attempt to create and use extents-based file even though the extents feature flag was not eabled. The simplest thing to do is to nuke the mount option entirely. It's not all that useful to force the non-creation of new extent-based files if the filesystem can support it. Signed-off-by: "Theodore Ts'o" --- Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt | 5 ----- 1 file changed, 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 8938949b201..cec829bc729 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -131,11 +131,6 @@ ro Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will mount options "ro,noload" can be used to prevent writes to the filesystem. -extents (*) ext4 will use extents to address file data. The - file system will no longer be mountable by ext3. - -noextents ext4 will not use extents for newly created files - journal_checksum Enable checksumming of the journal transactions. This will allow the recovery code in e2fsck and the kernel to detect corruption in the kernel. It is a -- cgit v1.2.3 From c04fc586c1a480ba198f03ae7b6cbd7b57380b91 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Gary Hade Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:39:14 -0800 Subject: mm: show node to memory section relationship with symlinks in sysfs Show node to memory section relationship with symlinks in sysfs Add /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY symlinks for all the memory sections located on nodeX. For example: /sys/devices/system/node/node1/memory135 -> ../../memory/memory135 indicates that memory section 135 resides on node1. Also revises documentation to cover this change as well as updating Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory to include descriptions of memory hotremove files 'phys_device', 'phys_index', and 'state' that were previously not described there. In addition to it always being a good policy to provide users with the maximum possible amount of physical location information for resources that can be hot-added and/or hot-removed, the following are some (but likely not all) of the user benefits provided by this change. Immediate: - Provides information needed to determine the specific node on which a defective DIMM is located. This will reduce system downtime when the node or defective DIMM is swapped out. - Prevents unintended onlining of a memory section that was previously offlined due to a defective DIMM. This could happen during node hot-add when the user or node hot-add assist script onlines _all_ offlined sections due to user or script inability to identify the specific memory sections located on the hot-added node. The consequences of reintroducing the defective memory could be ugly. - Provides information needed to vary the amount and distribution of memory on specific nodes for testing or debugging purposes. Future: - Will provide information needed to identify the memory sections that need to be offlined prior to physical removal of a specific node. Symlink creation during boot was tested on 2-node x86_64, 2-node ppc64, and 2-node ia64 systems. Symlink creation during physical memory hot-add tested on a 2-node x86_64 system. Signed-off-by: Gary Hade Signed-off-by: Badari Pulavarty Acked-by: Ingo Molnar Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory | 51 +++++++++++++++++++++++++- Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt | 16 ++++++-- 2 files changed, 63 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory index 7a16fe1e227..9fe91c02ee4 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory @@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Description: internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove operations. - Users: hotplug memory add/remove tools https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/ @@ -19,6 +18,56 @@ Description: This is useful for a user-level agent to determine identify removable sections of the memory before attempting potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation +Users: hotplug memory remove tools + https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/ + +What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device +Date: September 2008 +Contact: Badari Pulavarty +Description: + The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device + is read-only and is designed to show the name of physical + memory device. Implementation is currently incomplete. +What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index +Date: September 2008 +Contact: Badari Pulavarty +Description: + The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index + is read-only and contains the section ID in hexadecimal + which is equivalent to decimal X contained in the + memory section directory name. + +What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state +Date: September 2008 +Contact: Badari Pulavarty +Description: + The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state + is read-write. When read, it's contents show the + online/offline state of the memory section. When written, + root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable + memory section (see removable file description above) + using the following commands. + # echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state + # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state + + For example, if /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/removable + contains a value of 1 and + /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state contains the + string "online" the following command can be executed by + by root to offline that section. + # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state Users: hotplug memory remove tools https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/ + +What: /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY +Date: September 2008 +Contact: Gary Hade +Description: + When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled + /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY is a symbolic link that + points to the corresponding /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryY + memory section directory. For example, the following symbolic + link is created for memory section 9 on node0. + /sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9 + diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt index 168117bd6ee..4c2ecf537a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ config options. This option can be kernel module too. -------------------------------- -3 sysfs files for memory hotplug +4 sysfs files for memory hotplug -------------------------------- All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as @@ -138,11 +138,12 @@ For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at (0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4) This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000) -Under each section, you can see 3 files. +Under each section, you can see 4 files. /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable 'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX. 'state' : read-write @@ -150,10 +151,20 @@ Under each section, you can see 3 files. at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command 'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device. This is not well implemented now. +'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating + whether the memory section is removable or not + removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory + section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that + it is not removable. NOTE: These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase. +If CONFIG_NUMA is enabled the +/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX memory section +directories can also be accessed via symbolic links located in +the /sys/devices/system/node/node* directories. For example: +/sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9 -------------------------------- 4. Physical memory hot-add phase @@ -365,7 +376,6 @@ node if necessary. - allowing memory hot-add to ZONE_MOVABLE. maybe we need some switch like sysctl or new control file. - showing memory section and physical device relationship. - - showing memory section and node relationship (maybe good for NUMA) - showing memory section is under ZONE_MOVABLE or not - test and make it better memory offlining. - support HugeTLB page migration and offlining. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2da02997e08d3efe8174c7a47696e6f7cbe69ba9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Rientjes Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:39:31 -0800 Subject: mm: add dirty_background_bytes and dirty_bytes sysctls This change introduces two new sysctls to /proc/sys/vm: dirty_background_bytes and dirty_bytes. dirty_background_bytes is the counterpart to dirty_background_ratio and dirty_bytes is the counterpart to dirty_ratio. With growing memory capacities of individual machines, it's no longer sufficient to specify dirty thresholds as a percentage of the amount of dirtyable memory over the entire system. dirty_background_bytes and dirty_bytes specify quantities of memory, in bytes, that represent the dirty limits for the entire system. If either of these values is set, its value represents the amount of dirty memory that is needed to commence either background or direct writeback. When a `bytes' or `ratio' file is written, its counterpart becomes a function of the written value. For example, if dirty_bytes is written to be 8096, 8K of memory is required to commence direct writeback. dirty_ratio is then functionally equivalent to 8K / the amount of dirtyable memory: dirtyable_memory = free pages + mapped pages + file cache dirty_background_bytes = dirty_background_ratio * dirtyable_memory -or- dirty_background_ratio = dirty_background_bytes / dirtyable_memory AND dirty_bytes = dirty_ratio * dirtyable_memory -or- dirty_ratio = dirty_bytes / dirtyable_memory Only one of dirty_background_bytes and dirty_background_ratio may be specified at a time, and only one of dirty_bytes and dirty_ratio may be specified. When one sysctl is written, the other appears as 0 when read. The `bytes' files operate on a page size granularity since dirty limits are compared with ZVC values, which are in page units. Prior to this change, the minimum dirty_ratio was 5 as implemented by get_dirty_limits() although /proc/sys/vm/dirty_ratio would show any user written value between 0 and 100. This restriction is maintained, but dirty_bytes has a lower limit of only one page. Also prior to this change, the dirty_background_ratio could not equal or exceed dirty_ratio. This restriction is maintained in addition to restricting dirty_background_bytes. If either background threshold equals or exceeds that of the dirty threshold, it is implicitly set to half the dirty threshold. Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra Cc: Dave Chinner Cc: Christoph Lameter Signed-off-by: David Rientjes Cc: Andrea Righi Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 26 +++++++++++++++++++++++++- Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt | 3 ++- 2 files changed, 27 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 71df353e367..32e94635484 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1385,6 +1385,15 @@ swapcache reclaim. Decreasing vfs_cache_pressure causes the kernel to prefer to retain dentry and inode caches. Increasing vfs_cache_pressure beyond 100 causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes. +dirty_background_bytes +---------------------- + +Contains the amount of dirty memory at which the pdflush background writeback +daemon will start writeback. + +If dirty_background_bytes is written, dirty_background_ratio becomes a function +of its value (dirty_background_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory). + dirty_background_ratio ---------------------- @@ -1393,14 +1402,29 @@ pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of pages at which the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out dirty data. +If dirty_background_ratio is written, dirty_background_bytes becomes a function +of its value (dirty_background_ratio * the amount of dirtyable system memory). + +dirty_bytes +----------- + +Contains the amount of dirty memory at which a process generating disk writes +will itself start writeback. + +If dirty_bytes is written, dirty_ratio becomes a function of its value +(dirty_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory). + dirty_ratio ------------------ +----------- Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of pages at which a process which is generating disk writes will itself start writing out dirty data. +If dirty_ratio is written, dirty_bytes becomes a function of its value +(dirty_ratio * the amount of dirtyable system memory). + dirty_writeback_centisecs ------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index d79eeda7a69..cd05994a49e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -41,7 +41,8 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm: ============================================================== -dirty_ratio, dirty_background_ratio, dirty_expire_centisecs, +dirty_bytes, dirty_ratio, dirty_background_bytes, +dirty_background_ratio, dirty_expire_centisecs, dirty_writeback_centisecs, highmem_is_dirtyable, vfs_cache_pressure, laptop_mode, block_dump, swap_token_timeout, drop-caches, hugepages_treat_as_movable: -- cgit v1.2.3 From 63d6c5ad7fc27455ce5cb4706884671fb7e0df08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hugh Dickins Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:39:38 -0800 Subject: mm: remove try_to_munlock from vmscan An unfortunate feature of the Unevictable LRU work was that reclaiming an anonymous page involved an extra scan through the anon_vma: to check that the page is evictable before allocating swap, because the swap could not be freed reliably soon afterwards. Now try_to_free_swap() has replaced remove_exclusive_swap_page(), that's not an issue any more: remove try_to_munlock() call from shrink_page_list(), leaving it to try_to_munmap() to discover if the page is one to be culled to the unevictable list - in which case then try_to_free_swap(). Update unevictable-lru.txt to remove comments on the try_to_munlock() in shrink_page_list(), and shorten some lines over 80 columns. Signed-off-by: Hugh Dickins Cc: Lee Schermerhorn Acked-by: Rik van Riel Cc: Nick Piggin Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Robin Holt Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt | 63 +++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 45 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt index 125eed560e5..0706a7282a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt @@ -137,13 +137,6 @@ shrink_page_list() where they will be detected when vmscan walks the reverse map in try_to_unmap(). If try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, shrink_page_list() will cull the page at that point. -Note that for anonymous pages, shrink_page_list() attempts to add the page to -the swap cache before it tries to unmap the page. To avoid this unnecessary -consumption of swap space, shrink_page_list() calls try_to_munlock() to check -whether any VM_LOCKED vmas map the page without attempting to unmap the page. -If try_to_munlock() returns SWAP_MLOCK, shrink_page_list() will cull the page -without consuming swap space. try_to_munlock() will be described below. - To "cull" an unevictable page, vmscan simply puts the page back on the lru list using putback_lru_page()--the inverse operation to isolate_lru_page()-- after dropping the page lock. Because the condition which makes the page @@ -190,8 +183,8 @@ several places: in the VM_LOCKED flag being set for the vma. 3) in the fault path, if mlocked pages are "culled" in the fault path, and when a VM_LOCKED stack segment is expanded. -4) as mentioned above, in vmscan:shrink_page_list() with attempting to - reclaim a page in a VM_LOCKED vma--via try_to_unmap() or try_to_munlock(). +4) as mentioned above, in vmscan:shrink_page_list() when attempting to + reclaim a page in a VM_LOCKED vma via try_to_unmap(). Mlocked pages become unlocked and rescued from the unevictable list when: @@ -260,9 +253,9 @@ mlock_fixup() filters several classes of "special" vmas: 2) vmas mapping hugetlbfs page are already effectively pinned into memory. We don't need nor want to mlock() these pages. However, to preserve the - prior behavior of mlock()--before the unevictable/mlock changes--mlock_fixup() - will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs vma range to allocate the - huge pages and populate the ptes. + prior behavior of mlock()--before the unevictable/mlock changes-- + mlock_fixup() will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs vma range + to allocate the huge pages and populate the ptes. 3) vmas with VM_DONTEXPAND|VM_RESERVED are generally user space mappings of kernel pages, such as the vdso page, relay channel pages, etc. These pages @@ -322,7 +315,7 @@ __mlock_vma_pages_range()--the same function used to mlock a vma range-- passing a flag to indicate that munlock() is being performed. Because the vma access protections could have been changed to PROT_NONE after -faulting in and mlocking some pages, get_user_pages() was unreliable for visiting +faulting in and mlocking pages, get_user_pages() was unreliable for visiting these pages for munlocking. Because we don't want to leave pages mlocked(), get_user_pages() was enhanced to accept a flag to ignore the permissions when fetching the pages--all of which should be resident as a result of previous @@ -416,8 +409,8 @@ Mlocked Pages: munmap()/exit()/exec() System Call Handling When unmapping an mlocked region of memory, whether by an explicit call to munmap() or via an internal unmap from exit() or exec() processing, we must munlock the pages if we're removing the last VM_LOCKED vma that maps the pages. -Before the unevictable/mlock changes, mlocking did not mark the pages in any way, -so unmapping them required no processing. +Before the unevictable/mlock changes, mlocking did not mark the pages in any +way, so unmapping them required no processing. To munlock a range of memory under the unevictable/mlock infrastructure, the munmap() hander and task address space tear down function call @@ -517,12 +510,10 @@ couldn't be mlocked. Mlocked pages: try_to_munlock() Reverse Map Scan TODO/FIXME: a better name might be page_mlocked()--analogous to the -page_referenced() reverse map walker--especially if we continue to call this -from shrink_page_list(). See related TODO/FIXME below. +page_referenced() reverse map walker. -When munlock_vma_page()--see "Mlocked Pages: munlock()/munlockall() System -Call Handling" above--tries to munlock a page, or when shrink_page_list() -encounters an anonymous page that is not yet in the swap cache, they need to +When munlock_vma_page()--see "Mlocked Pages: munlock()/munlockall() +System Call Handling" above--tries to munlock a page, it needs to determine whether or not the page is mapped by any VM_LOCKED vma, without actually attempting to unmap all ptes from the page. For this purpose, the unevictable/mlock infrastructure introduced a variant of try_to_unmap() called @@ -535,10 +526,7 @@ for VM_LOCKED vmas. When such a vma is found for anonymous pages and file pages mapped in linear VMAs, as in the try_to_unmap() case, the functions attempt to acquire the associated mmap semphore, mlock the page via mlock_vma_page() and return SWAP_MLOCK. This effectively undoes the -pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page() and informs -shrink_page_list() that the anonymous page should be culled rather than added -to the swap cache in preparation for a try_to_unmap() that will almost -certainly fail. +pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page. If try_to_unmap() is unable to acquire a VM_LOCKED vma's associated mmap semaphore, it will return SWAP_AGAIN. This will allow shrink_page_list() @@ -557,10 +545,7 @@ However, the scan can terminate when it encounters a VM_LOCKED vma and can successfully acquire the vma's mmap semphore for read and mlock the page. Although try_to_munlock() can be called many [very many!] times when munlock()ing a large region or tearing down a large address space that has been -mlocked via mlockall(), overall this is a fairly rare event. In addition, -although shrink_page_list() calls try_to_munlock() for every anonymous page that -it handles that is not yet in the swap cache, on average anonymous pages will -have very short reverse map lists. +mlocked via mlockall(), overall this is a fairly rare event. Mlocked Page: Page Reclaim in shrink_*_list() @@ -588,8 +573,8 @@ Some examples of these unevictable pages on the LRU lists are: munlock_vma_page() was forced to let the page back on to the normal LRU list for vmscan to handle. -shrink_inactive_list() also culls any unevictable pages that it finds -on the inactive lists, again diverting them to the appropriate zone's unevictable +shrink_inactive_list() also culls any unevictable pages that it finds on +the inactive lists, again diverting them to the appropriate zone's unevictable lru list. shrink_inactive_list() should only see SHM_LOCKed pages that became SHM_LOCKed after shrink_active_list() had moved them to the inactive list, or pages mapped into VM_LOCKED vmas that munlock_vma_page() couldn't isolate from @@ -597,19 +582,7 @@ the lru to recheck via try_to_munlock(). shrink_inactive_list() won't notice the latter, but will pass on to shrink_page_list(). shrink_page_list() again culls obviously unevictable pages that it could -encounter for similar reason to shrink_inactive_list(). As already discussed, -shrink_page_list() proactively looks for anonymous pages that should have -PG_mlocked set but don't--these would not be detected by page_evictable()--to -avoid adding them to the swap cache unnecessarily. File pages mapped into +encounter for similar reason to shrink_inactive_list(). Pages mapped into VM_LOCKED vmas but without PG_mlocked set will make it all the way to -try_to_unmap(). shrink_page_list() will divert them to the unevictable list when -try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, as discussed above. - -TODO/FIXME: If we can enhance the swap cache to reliably remove entries -with page_count(page) > 2, as long as all ptes are mapped to the page and -not the swap entry, we can probably remove the call to try_to_munlock() in -shrink_page_list() and just remove the page from the swap cache when -try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK. Currently, remove_exclusive_swap_page() -doesn't seem to allow that. - - +try_to_unmap(). shrink_page_list() will divert them to the unevictable list +when try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, as discussed above. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5f820f648c92a5ecc771a96b3c29aa6e90013bba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Tejun Heo Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:40:59 -0800 Subject: poll: allow f_op->poll to sleep f_op->poll is the only vfs operation which is not allowed to sleep. It's because poll and select implementation used task state to synchronize against wake ups, which doesn't have to be the case anymore as wait/wake interface can now use custom wake up functions. The non-sleep restriction can be a bit tricky because ->poll is not called from an atomic context and the result of accidentally sleeping in ->poll only shows up as temporary busy looping when the timing is right or rather wrong. This patch converts poll/select to use custom wake up function and use separate triggered variable to synchronize against wake up events. The only added overhead is an extra function call during wake up and negligible. This patch removes the one non-sleep exception from vfs locking rules and is beneficial to userland filesystem implementations like FUSE, 9p or peculiar fs like spufs as it's very difficult for those to implement non-sleeping poll method. While at it, make the following cosmetic changes to make poll.h and select.c checkpatch friendly. * s/type * symbol/type *symbol/ : three places in poll.h * remove blank line before EXPORT_SYMBOL() : two places in select.c Oleg: spotted missing barrier in poll_schedule_timeout() Davide: spotted missing write barrier in pollwake() Signed-off-by: Tejun Heo Cc: Eric Van Hensbergen Cc: Ron Minnich Cc: Ingo Molnar Cc: Christoph Hellwig Signed-off-by: Miklos Szeredi Cc: Davide Libenzi Cc: Brad Boyer Cc: Al Viro Cc: Roland McGrath Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Cc: Davide Libenzi Cc: Oleg Nesterov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index ccec5539438..cfbfa15a46b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ prototypes: }; locking rules: - All except ->poll() may block. + All may block. BKL llseek: no (see below) read: no -- cgit v1.2.3 From 89fac11cb3e7c5860c425dba14845c09ccede39d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: "Darrick J. Wong" Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:41:34 -0800 Subject: adt7470: make automatic fan control really work It turns out that the adt7470's automatic fan control algorithm only works when the temperature sensors get updated. This in turn happens only when someone tells the chip to read its temperature sensors. Regrettably, this means that we have to drive the chip periodically. Signed-off-by: Darrick J. Wong Cc: Jean Delvare Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 | 19 ++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 index 75d13ca147c..8ce4aa0a0f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 @@ -31,15 +31,11 @@ Each of the measured inputs (temperature, fan speed) has corresponding high/low limit values. The ADT7470 will signal an ALARM if any measured value exceeds either limit. -The ADT7470 DOES NOT sample all inputs continuously. A single pin on the -ADT7470 is connected to a multitude of thermal diodes, but the chip must be -instructed explicitly to read the multitude of diodes. If you want to use -automatic fan control mode, you must manually read any of the temperature -sensors or the fan control algorithm will not run. The chip WILL NOT DO THIS -AUTOMATICALLY; this must be done from userspace. This may be a bug in the chip -design, given that many other AD chips take care of this. The driver will not -read the registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further, -configuration data is only read once per minute. +The ADT7470 samples all inputs continuously. A kernel thread is started up for +the purpose of periodically querying the temperature sensors, thus allowing the +automatic fan pwm control to set the fan speed. The driver will not read the +registers more often than once every 5 seconds. Further, configuration data is +only read once per minute. Special Features ---------------- @@ -72,5 +68,6 @@ pwm#_auto_point2_temp. Notes ----- -As stated above, the temperature inputs must be read periodically from -userspace in order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run. +The temperature inputs no longer need to be read periodically from userspace in +order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run. This was the case for earlier +versions of the driver. -- cgit v1.2.3 From e8386a0cb22f4a2d439384212c494ad0bda848fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Masami Hiramatsu Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:41:52 -0800 Subject: kprobes: support probing module __exit function Allows kprobes to probe __exit routine. This adds flags member to struct kprobe. When module is freed(kprobes hooks module_notifier to get this event), kprobes which probe the functions in that module are set to "Gone" flag to the flags member. These "Gone" probes are never be enabled. Users can check the GONE flag through debugfs. This also removes mod_refcounted, because we couldn't free a module if kprobe incremented the refcount of that module. [akpm@linux-foundation.org: document some locking] [mhiramat@redhat.com: bugfix: pass aggr_kprobe to arch_remove_kprobe] [mhiramat@redhat.com: bugfix: release old_p's insn_slot before error return] Signed-off-by: Masami Hiramatsu Acked-by: Ananth N Mavinakayanahalli Cc: Anil S Keshavamurthy Signed-off-by: Masami Hiramatsu Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kprobes.txt | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt index a79633d702b..48b3de90eb1 100644 --- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt +++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt @@ -497,7 +497,10 @@ The first column provides the kernel address where the probe is inserted. The second column identifies the type of probe (k - kprobe, r - kretprobe and j - jprobe), while the third column specifies the symbol+offset of the probe. If the probed function belongs to a module, the module name -is also specified. +is also specified. Following columns show probe status. If the probe is on +a virtual address that is no longer valid (module init sections, module +virtual addresses that correspond to modules that've been unloaded), +such probes are marked with [GONE]. /debug/kprobes/enabled: Turn kprobes ON/OFF -- cgit v1.2.3 From d78dd070ccda6384efeae142b116bc174f0cd9fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:40 -0800 Subject: docs: document how to write @varargs in kernel-doc Add documentation on how to use kernel-doc for function parameters that are "..." (varargs). Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Rusty Russell Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index c6841eee959..4115a4a80eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -71,6 +71,11 @@ The @argument descriptions must begin on the very next line following this opening short function description line, with no intervening empty comment lines. +If a function parameter is "..." (varargs), it should be listed in +kernel-doc notation as: + * @...: description + + Example kernel-doc data structure comment. /** -- cgit v1.2.3 From 07983f0e36eab01a5385117e55154a2aa796eafc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:41 -0800 Subject: documentation: update header file paths Update several Documentation/ files and a few sub-dir files (only one change in each) to reflect changed header files locations. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt | 2 +- Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt | 8 ++++---- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++-- Documentation/magic-number.txt | 6 +++--- Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README | 2 +- Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt | 2 +- Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt | 2 +- 7 files changed, 13 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt index c74fec8c235..b2a4d6d244d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ mapped only for the time they are actually used and unmapped after the DMA transfer. The following API will work of course even on platforms where no such -hardware exists, see e.g. include/asm-i386/pci.h for how it is implemented on +hardware exists, see e.g. arch/x86/include/asm/pci.h for how it is implemented on top of the virt_to_bus interface. First of all, you should make sure diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 82469917443..f1d63990332 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'B' C0-FF advanced bbus 'C' all linux/soundcard.h -'D' all asm-s390/dasd.h +'D' all arch/s390/include/asm/dasd.h 'E' all linux/input.h 'F' all linux/fb.h 'H' all linux/hiddev.h @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'S' 80-81 scsi/scsi_ioctl.h conflict! 'S' 82-FF scsi/scsi.h conflict! 'T' all linux/soundcard.h conflict! -'T' all asm-i386/ioctls.h conflict! +'T' all arch/x86/include/asm/ioctls.h conflict! 'U' 00-EF linux/drivers/usb/usb.h 'V' all linux/vt.h 'W' 00-1F linux/watchdog.h conflict! @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict! -'c' 80-9F asm-s390/chsc.h +'c' 80-9F arch/s390/include/asm/chsc.h 'd' 00-FF linux/char/drm/drm/h conflict! 'd' 00-DF linux/video_decoder.h conflict! 'd' F0-FF linux/digi1.h @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 0x80 00-1F linux/fb.h 0x81 00-1F linux/videotext.h -0x89 00-06 asm-i386/sockios.h +0x89 00-06 arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h 0x89 0B-DF linux/sockios.h 0x89 E0-EF linux/sockios.h SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range 0x89 F0-FF linux/sockios.h SIOCDEVPRIVATE range diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index a2d8805c03d..7f0b694e02e 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file clearcpuid=BITNUM [X86] Disable CPUID feature X for the kernel. See - include/asm-x86/cpufeature.h for the valid bit numbers. - Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily + arch/x86/include/asm/cpufeature.h for the valid bit + numbers. Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily stable over kernel options, but the vendor specific ones should be. Also note that user programs calling CPUID directly diff --git a/Documentation/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/magic-number.txt index 95070028d15..505f1960754 100644 --- a/Documentation/magic-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/magic-number.txt @@ -125,14 +125,14 @@ TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E trident_card sound/oss/trident.c ROUTER_MAGIC 0x524d4157 wan_device include/linux/wanrouter.h SCC_MAGIC 0x52696368 gs_port drivers/char/scc.h SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1 0x53415645 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c -GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda include/asm-mips64/sn/gda.h +GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h RED_MAGIC1 0x5a2cf071 (any) mm/slab.c STL_PORTMAGIC 0x5a7182c9 stlport include/linux/stallion.h EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE 0x5ab478d2 lanai_dev drivers/atm/lanai.c HDLCDRV_MAGIC 0x5ac6e778 hdlcdrv_state include/linux/hdlcdrv.h EPCA_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel include/linux/epca.h PCXX_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel drivers/char/pcxx.h -KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s include/asm-mips64/sn/klkernvars.h +KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h I810_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 i810_state sound/oss/i810_audio.c TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 trient_state sound/oss/trident.c M3_CARD_MAGIC 0x646e6f50 m3_card sound/oss/maestro3.c @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ CCB_MAGIC 0xf2691ad2 ccb drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE 0xf7e1c9a3 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c QUEUE_MAGIC_USED 0xf7e1cc33 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c HTB_CMAGIC 0xFEFAFEF1 htb_class net/sched/sch_htb.c -NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s include/asm-mips64/sn/nmi.h +NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h Note that there are also defined special per-driver magic numbers in sound memory management. See include/sound/sndmagic.h for complete list of them. Many diff --git a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README index 25a6ed1aaa5..f54962aea84 100644 --- a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README +++ b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATABILITY Two files are introduced: - a) 'include/asm-mips/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h' + a) 'arch/mips/include/asm/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h' containes : struct _auide_hwif timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4 timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2 diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt index 472739880e8..ffa4183fdb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ anyways). After detecting the processor type, the kernel patches out sections of code that shouldn't be used by writing nop's over it. Using cpufeatures requires -just 2 macros (found in include/asm-ppc/cputable.h), as seen in head.S +just 2 macros (found in arch/powerpc/include/asm/cputable.h), as seen in head.S transfer_to_handler: #ifdef CONFIG_ALTIVEC diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt index 169ad423a3d..4f913857b8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly are in: - include/asm-x86/bootparam.h + arch/x86/include/asm/bootparam.h Offset Proto Name Meaning -- cgit v1.2.3 From 58cc855c395fc22db996cc893134c4c690f0f0dc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:42 -0800 Subject: documentation: update s390 header file paths Update Documentation/s390/ files to reflect changed header files locations. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Martin Schwidefsky Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt | 2 +- Documentation/s390/cds.txt | 2 +- Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt | 2 +- 3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt index d30a281c570..10711d9f078 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt @@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Syscalls are implemented on Linux for S390 by the Supervisor call instruction (S possibilities of these as the instruction is made up of a 0xA opcode & the second byte being the syscall number. They are traced using the simple command. TR SVC -the syscalls are defined in linux/include/asm-s390/unistd.h +the syscalls are defined in linux/arch/s390/include/asm/unistd.h e.g. to trace all file opens just do TR SVC 5 ( as this is the syscall number of open ) diff --git a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt index c4b7b2bd369..480a78ef5a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ platform. Some of the interface routines are specific to Linux/390 and some of them can be found on other Linux platforms implementations too. Miscellaneous function prototypes, data declarations, and macro definitions can be found in the architecture specific C header file -linux/include/asm-s390/irq.h. +linux/arch/s390/include/asm/irq.h. Overview of CDS interface concepts diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt index e0542097369..2d10053dd97 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ S390 Debug Feature ================== files: arch/s390/kernel/debug.c - include/asm-s390/debug.h + arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h Description: ------------ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 28f4d75a618e52f93d8e4a3e7bc66db8c882d679 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:43 -0800 Subject: documentation: how to use DOC: section blocks Add info on how to use DOC: sections in kernel-doc. DOC: sections enable the addition of inline source file comments that are general in nature instead of being specific to a function, struct, union, enum, or typedef. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Cc: Johannes Berg Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 29 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 4115a4a80eb..d73fbd2b2b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -287,6 +287,32 @@ struct my_struct { }; +Including documentation blocks in source files +---------------------------------------------- + +To facilitate having source code and comments close together, you can +include kernel-doc documentation blocks that are free-form comments +instead of being kernel-doc for functions, structures, unions, +enums, or typedefs. This could be used for something like a +theory of operation for a driver or library code, for example. + +This is done by using a DOC: section keyword with a section title. E.g.: + +/** + * DOC: Theory of Operation + * + * The whizbang foobar is a dilly of a gizmo. It can do whatever you + * want it to do, at any time. It reads your mind. Here's how it works. + * + * foo bar splat + * + * The only drawback to this gizmo is that is can sometimes damage + * hardware, software, or its subject(s). + */ + +DOC: sections are used in SGML templates files as indicated below. + + How to make new SGML template files ----------------------------------- @@ -307,6 +333,9 @@ exported using EXPORT_SYMBOL. !F is replaced by the documentation, in , for the functions listed. +!P
is replaced by the contents of the DOC: +section titled
from . +Spaces are allowed in
; do not quote the
. Tim. */ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7c4be253d3a01ddc92033ec3a3812fddf703ef19 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:44 -0800 Subject: docs: add more early params to kernel-parameters.txt Add some (more) early_param boot options to kernel-parameters.txt. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 7f0b694e02e..0543370e702 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1117,6 +1117,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file If there are multiple matching configurations changing the same attribute, the last one is used. + lmb=debug [KNL] Enable lmb debug messages. + load_ramdisk= [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt. @@ -1569,6 +1571,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nr_uarts= [SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered. + ohci1394_dma=early [HW] enable debugging via the ohci1394 driver. + See Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt for more + info. + olpc_ec_timeout= [OLPC] ms delay when issuing EC commands Rather than timing out after 20 ms if an EC command is not properly ACKed, override the length -- cgit v1.2.3 From ecb08d81313a3c015225236775de259d99ab47fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Randy Dunlap Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:44 -0800 Subject: doc: reformat some long lines in kernel-parameters.txt Reformat text to (mostly) stay within 80 columns of text. Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 0543370e702..3ccf1bc5aff 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1799,10 +1799,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file autoconfiguration. Ranges are in pairs (memory base and size). - dynamic_printk - Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if - CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. These can also - be switched on/off via /dynamic_printk/modules + dynamic_printk Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if + CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. + These can also be switched on/off via + /dynamic_printk/modules print-fatal-signals= [KNL] debug: print fatal signals @@ -1890,7 +1890,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file reboot= [BUGS=X86-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode Format: [,[,...]] - See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c + See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c relax_domain_level= [KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level. @@ -2438,8 +2438,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: ,,,,,[,[,[,]]] - norandmaps Don't use address space randomization - Equivalent to echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space + norandmaps Don't use address space randomization. Equivalent to + echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space ______________________________________________________________________ -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4cb0e11b15d2badad455fcd538af0cccf05dc012 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hidehiro Kawai Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 14:42:47 -0800 Subject: coredump_filter: permit changing of the default filter Introduce a new kernel parameter `coredump_filter'. Setting a value to this parameter causes the default bitmask of coredump_filter to be changed. It is useful for users to change coredump_filter settings for the whole system at boot time. Without this parameter, users have to change coredump_filter settings for each /proc// in an initializing script. Signed-off-by: Hidehiro Kawai Cc: Roland McGrath Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 3ccf1bc5aff..0b3f6711d2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -551,6 +551,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file not work reliably with all consoles, but is known to work with serial and VGA consoles. + coredump_filter= + [KNL] Change the default value for + /proc//coredump_filter. + See also Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt. + cpcihp_generic= [HW,PCI] Generic port I/O CompactPCI driver Format: ,,,[,] -- cgit v1.2.3 From 5e6d9f511e0188d34fa7a93ce2d0e6194442b0da Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Graf Yang Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 23:14:38 +0800 Subject: Blackfin arch: Add document about bfin-gpio Add document about bfin-gpio when requesting a pin both as gpio and gpio interrupt. Signed-off-by: Graf Yang Signed-off-by: Bryan Wu --- Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX | 3 ++ Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt | 71 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 74 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX b/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX index 7cb3b356b24..d6840a91e1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX @@ -9,3 +9,6 @@ cachefeatures.txt Filesystems - Requirements for mounting the root file system. + +bfin-gpio-note.txt + - Notes in developing/using bfin-gpio driver. diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9898c7ded7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + * File: Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-note.txt + * Based on: + * Author: + * + * Created: $Id: bfin-gpio-note.txt 2008-11-24 16:42 grafyang $ + * Description: This file contains the notes in developing/using bfin-gpio. + * + * + * Rev: + * + * Modified: + * Copyright 2004-2008 Analog Devices Inc. + * + * Bugs: Enter bugs at http://blackfin.uclinux.org/ + * + */ + + +1. Blackfin GPIO introduction + + There are many GPIO pins on Blackfin. Most of these pins are muxed to + multi-functions. They can be configured as peripheral, or just as GPIO, + configured to input with interrupt enabled, or output. + + For detailed information, please see "arch/blackfin/kernel/bfin_gpio.c", + or the relevant HRM. + + +2. Avoiding resource conflict + + Followed function groups are used to avoiding resource conflict, + - Use the pin as peripheral, + int peripheral_request(unsigned short per, const char *label); + int peripheral_request_list(const unsigned short per[], const char *label); + void peripheral_free(unsigned short per); + void peripheral_free_list(const unsigned short per[]); + - Use the pin as GPIO, + int bfin_gpio_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label); + void bfin_gpio_free(unsigned gpio); + - Use the pin as GPIO interrupt, + int bfin_gpio_irq_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label); + void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio); + + The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin, + the free functions will clear it's function state. + Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by + previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request + function fail. + These functions are wrapped by other functions, most of the users need not + care. + + +3. But there are some exceptions + - Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested both as GPIO and GPIO + interrut. + Some drivers, like gpio-keys, need this behavior. Kernel only print out + warning messages like, + bfin-gpio: GPIO 24 is already reserved by gpio-keys: BTN0, and you are +configuring it as IRQ! + + Note: Consider the case that, if there are two drivers need the + identical GPIO, one of them use it as GPIO, the other use it as + GPIO interrupt. This will really cause resource conflict. So if + there is any abnormal driver behavior, please check the bfin-gpio + warning messages. + + - Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested from the same driver twice. + + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3b02d332b6f15cc8f7b6a04757c86034669600e0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans de Goede Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:31 +0100 Subject: hwmon: (f71882fg) Add documentation Add some documentation about the f71882fg driver, and update the Kconfig documentation to report the new supported models. Signed-off-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg | 89 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 89 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a8321267b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +Kernel driver f71882fg +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG + Prefix: 'f71882fg' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F71862FG and F71863FG + Prefix: 'f71862fg' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website + * Fintek F8000 + Prefix: 'f8000' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Not public + +Author: Hans de Goede + + +Description +----------- + +Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring +capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and +3 temperature sensors. + +These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in +three different modes (one manual, two automatic). + +The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, which seems +reasonable. + + +Monitoring +---------- + +The Voltage, Fan and Temperature Monitoring uses the standard sysfs +interface as documented in sysfs-interface, without any exceptions. + + +Fan Control +----------- + +Both PWM (pulse-width modulation) and DC fan speed control methods are +supported. The right one to use depends on external circuitry on the +motherboard, so the driver assumes that the BIOS set the method +properly. + +There are 2 modes to specify the speed of the fan, PWM duty cycle (or DC +voltage) mode, where 0-100% duty cycle (0-100% of 12V) is specified. And RPM +mode where the actual RPM of the fan (as measured) is controlled and the speed +gets specified as 0-100% of the fan#_full_speed file. + +Since both modes work in a 0-100% (mapped to 0-255) scale, there isn't a +whole lot of a difference when modifying fan control settings. The only +important difference is that in RPM mode the 0-100% controls the fan speed +between 0-100% of fan#_full_speed. It is assumed that if the BIOS programs +RPM mode, it will also set fan#_full_speed properly, if it does not then +fan control will not work properly, unless you set a sane fan#_full_speed +value yourself. + +Switching between these modes requires re-initializing a whole bunch of +registers, so the mode which the BIOS has set is kept. The mode is +printed when loading the driver. + +Three different fan control modes are supported; the mode number is written +to the pwm#_enable file. Note that not all modes are supported on all +chips, and some modes may only be available in RPM / PWM mode on the F8000. +Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error. + +* 1: Manual mode + You ask for a specific PWM duty cycle / DC voltage or a specific % of + fan#_full_speed by writing to the pwm# file. This mode is only + available on the F8000 if the fan channel is in RPM mode. + +* 2: Normal auto mode + You can define a number of temperature/fan speed trip points, which % the + fan should run at at this temp and which temp a fan should follow using the + standard sysfs interface. The number and type of trip points is chip + depended, see which files are available in sysfs. + Fan/PWM channel 3 of the F8000 is always in this mode! + +* 3: Thermostat mode (Only available on the F8000 when in duty cycle mode) + The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between + temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp. + +Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to +fan2 and pwm3 to fan3. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6e34b187bc216fc632769fb8b906d3a29ccd8f14 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ira Snyder Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:32 +0100 Subject: hwmon: Add LTC4245 driver Add Linux support for the Linear Technology LTC4245 Multiple Supply Hot Swap controller I2C monitoring interface. Signed-off-by: Ira W. Snyder Acked-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 | 81 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 81 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bae7a3adc5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +Kernel driver ltc4245 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC4245 + Prefix: 'ltc4245' + Addresses scanned: 0x20-0x3f + Datasheet: + http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1140,P19392,D13517 + +Author: Ira W. Snyder + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC4245 controller allows a board to be safely inserted and removed +from a live backplane in multiple supply systems such as CompactPCI and +PCI Express. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for LTC4245 devices, due to the fact that some +of the possible addresses are unfriendly to probing. You will need to use +the "force" parameter to tell the driver where to find the device. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4245 at address 0x23 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe ltc4245 force=1,0x23 + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The LTC4245 has built-in limits for over and under current warnings. This +makes it very likely that the reference circuit will be used. + +This driver uses the values in the datasheet to change the register values +into the values specified in the sysfs-interface document. The current readings +rely on the sense resistors listed in Table 2: "Sense Resistor Values". + +in1_input 12v input voltage (mV) +in2_input 5v input voltage (mV) +in3_input 3v input voltage (mV) +in4_input Vee (-12v) input voltage (mV) + +in1_min_alarm 12v input undervoltage alarm +in2_min_alarm 5v input undervoltage alarm +in3_min_alarm 3v input undervoltage alarm +in4_min_alarm Vee (-12v) input undervoltage alarm + +curr1_input 12v current (mA) +curr2_input 5v current (mA) +curr3_input 3v current (mA) +curr4_input Vee (-12v) current (mA) + +curr1_max_alarm 12v overcurrent alarm +curr2_max_alarm 5v overcurrent alarm +curr3_max_alarm 3v overcurrent alarm +curr4_max_alarm Vee (-12v) overcurrent alarm + +in5_input 12v output voltage (mV) +in6_input 5v output voltage (mV) +in7_input 3v output voltage (mV) +in8_input Vee (-12v) output voltage (mV) + +in5_min_alarm 12v output undervoltage alarm +in6_min_alarm 5v output undervoltage alarm +in7_min_alarm 3v output undervoltage alarm +in8_min_alarm Vee (-12v) output undervoltage alarm + +in9_input GPIO #1 voltage data +in10_input GPIO #2 voltage data +in11_input GPIO #3 voltage data + +power1_input 12v power usage (mW) +power2_input 5v power usage (mW) +power3_input 3v power usage (mW) +power4_input Vee (-12v) power usage (mW) -- cgit v1.2.3 From b4da93e4b0ffc261c3530fe938aefd52854aa84c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean-Marc Spaggiari Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:32 +0100 Subject: hwmon: (it87) Add support for the ITE IT8720F Allow it87.c to handle IT8720 chipset like IT8718 in order to retrieve voltage, temperatures and fans speed from sensors tools. Also updating the related documentation. Signed-off-by: Jean-Marc Spaggiari Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 20 ++++++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index 042c0415140..659315d98e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -26,6 +26,10 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0.2.zip http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0%203_(for%20C%20version).zip + * IT8720F + Prefix: 'it8720' + Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Not yet publicly available. * SiS950 [clone of IT8705F] Prefix: 'it87' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) @@ -71,7 +75,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F, -IT8718F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips. +IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips. These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports, joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they @@ -84,19 +88,19 @@ the IT8716F and late IT8712F have 6. They are shared with other functions though, so the functionality may not be available on a given system. The driver dumbly assume it is there. -The IT8718F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value is -stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations, +The IT8718F and IT8720F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value +is stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations, this value can currently only be read once at initialization time, so the driver won't notice and report changes in the VID value. The two upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you can't have both on a given board. -The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for +The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and later IT8712F revisions have support for 2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver. -The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional -16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan -clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and +The IT8716F, IT8718F and IT8720F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have +optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more +fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one of the above chips is detected. @@ -122,7 +126,7 @@ zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of 0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers. -The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F) encode the core voltage value: +The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by the mainboard and/or processor itself. It is a value in volts. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0589c2de643ef71a684ba6d219532f9e2a3e554b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans de Goede Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:33 +0100 Subject: hwmon: Deprecate the fscher and fscpos drivers Now that the new merged fschmd driver has gained support for the watchdog integrated into these IC's, there is no more reason to keep the old fscher and fscpos drivers around, so mark them as deprecated. Signed-off-by: Hans de Goede Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 2193be53e77..5ddbe350487 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -318,6 +318,14 @@ Who: Jean Delvare --------------------------- +What: fscher and fscpos drivers +When: June 2009 +Why: Deprecated by the new fschmd driver. +Who: Hans de Goede + Jean Delvare + +--------------------------- + What: SELinux "compat_net" functionality When: 2.6.30 at the earliest Why: In 2.6.18 the Secmark concept was introduced to replace the "compat_net" -- cgit v1.2.3 From 2b7300513b98e05058a803de3beb8a1c0a0c61d9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Kaiwan N Billimoria Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:34 +0100 Subject: hwmon: (lm70) Code streamlining and cleanup This fixes a byteswap bug in the LM70 temperature sensor driver, which was previously covered up by a converse bug in the driver for the LM70EVAL-LLP board (which is also fixed). Other fixes: doc updates, remove an annoying msleep(), and improve three-wire protocol handling. Signed-off-by: Kaiwan N Billimoria [ dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net: doc and whitespace tweaks ] Signed-off-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/lm70 | 4 ++++ Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp | 10 ++++++++++ 2 files changed, 14 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 index 2bdd3feebf5..b8d1a521e68 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 @@ -25,6 +25,10 @@ complement digital temperature (sent via the SIO line), is available in the driver for interpretation. This driver makes use of the kernel's in-core SPI support. +As a real (in-tree) example of this "SPI protocol driver" interfacing +with a "SPI master controller driver", see drivers/spi/spi_lm70llp.c +and its associated documentation. + Thanks to --------- Jean Delvare for mentoring the hwmon-side driver diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp index 154bd02220b..34a9cfd746b 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp @@ -13,10 +13,20 @@ Description This driver provides glue code connecting a National Semiconductor LM70 LLP temperature sensor evaluation board to the kernel's SPI core subsystem. +This is a SPI master controller driver. It can be used in conjunction with +(layered under) the LM70 logical driver (a "SPI protocol driver"). In effect, this driver turns the parallel port interface on the eval board into a SPI bus with a single device, which will be driven by the generic LM70 driver (drivers/hwmon/lm70.c). + +Hardware Interfacing +-------------------- +The schematic for this particular board (the LM70EVAL-LLP) is +available (on page 4) here: + + http://www.national.com/appinfo/tempsensors/files/LM70LLPEVALmanual.pdf + The hardware interfacing on the LM70 LLP eval board is as follows: Parallel LM70 LLP -- cgit v1.2.3 From c8ac32e4711639c81e5f4d4cd78c8f21675a2bae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Manuel Lauss Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:34 +0100 Subject: hwmon: (lm70) Add TI TMP121 support The Texas Instruments TMP121 is a SPI temperature sensor very similar to the LM70, with slightly higher resolution. This patch extends the LM70 driver to support the TMP121. The TMP123 differs in pin assign- ment. Signed-off-by: Manuel Lauss Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare --- Documentation/hwmon/lm70 | 8 +++++++- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 index b8d1a521e68..0d240291e3c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 @@ -1,9 +1,11 @@ Kernel driver lm70 ================== -Supported chip: +Supported chips: * National Semiconductor LM70 Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html + * Texas Instruments TMP121/TMP123 + Information: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp121.html Author: Kaiwan N Billimoria @@ -29,6 +31,10 @@ As a real (in-tree) example of this "SPI protocol driver" interfacing with a "SPI master controller driver", see drivers/spi/spi_lm70llp.c and its associated documentation. +The TMP121/TMP123 are very similar; main differences are 4 wire SPI inter- +face (read only) and 13-bit temperature data (0.0625 degrees celsius reso- +lution). + Thanks to --------- Jean Delvare for mentoring the hwmon-side driver -- cgit v1.2.3 From 77fa49d94a75b5f9702c70b4fbe27b08b21317b9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jean Delvare Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 16:37:35 +0100 Subject: hwmon: Fix various typos Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare Acked-by: Hans de Goede Acked-by: David Hubbard --- Documentation/hwmon/lm85 | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 40062074129..a13680871bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ configured individually according to the following options. temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255) * pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature - the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at + the behaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off. NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag -- cgit v1.2.3 From d4f373e57d3916814110968c5ea1155a8d972b5a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Mon, 10 Nov 2008 14:07:45 -0500 Subject: USB: usb-storage: add "quirks=" module parameter This patch (as1163b) adds a "quirks=" module parameter to usb-storage. This will allow people to make short-term changes to their unusual_devs list without rebuilding the entire driver. Testing will become much easier, and less-sophisticated users will be able to access their buggy devices after a simple config-file change instead of having to wait for a new kernel release. The patch also adds a documentation entry for usb-storage's "delay_use" parameter, which has been around for years but but was never listed among the kernel parameters. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 29 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 0b3f6711d2f..8eb6e35405c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -91,6 +91,7 @@ parameter is applicable: SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled. FTRACE Function tracing enabled. TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled. + UMS USB Mass Storage support is enabled. USB USB support is enabled. USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled. V4L Video For Linux support is enabled. @@ -2383,6 +2384,34 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file usbhid.mousepoll= [USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at. + usb-storage.delay_use= + [UMS] The delay in seconds before a new device is + scanned for Logical Units (default 5). + + usb-storage.quirks= + [UMS] A list of quirks entries to supplement or + override the built-in unusual_devs list. List + entries are separated by commas. Each entry has + the form VID:PID:Flags where VID and PID are Vendor + and Product ID values (4-digit hex numbers) and + Flags is a set of characters, each corresponding + to a common usb-storage quirk flag as follows: + c = FIX_CAPACITY (decrease the reported + device capacity by one sector); + i = IGNORE_DEVICE (don't bind to this + device); + l = NOT_LOCKABLE (don't try to lock and + unlock ejectable media); + m = MAX_SECTORS_64 (don't transfer more + than 64 sectors = 32 KB at a time); + r = IGNORE_RESIDUE (the device reports + bogus residue values); + s = SINGLE_LUN (the device has only one + Logical Unit); + w = NO_WP_DETECT (don't test whether the + medium is write-protected). + Example: quirks=0419:aaf5:rl,0421:0433:rc + add_efi_memmap [EFI; x86-32,X86-64] Include EFI memory map in kernel's map of available physical RAM. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9ac39f28b5237a629e41ccfc1f73d3a55723045c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Wed, 12 Nov 2008 16:19:49 -0500 Subject: USB: add asynchronous autosuspend/autoresume support This patch (as1160b) adds support routines for asynchronous autosuspend and autoresume, with accompanying documentation updates. There already are several potential users of this interface, and others are likely to arise as autosuspend support becomes more widespread. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 22 +++++++++++++++++----- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index e48ea1d5101..ad642615ad4 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -313,11 +313,13 @@ three of the methods listed above. In addition, a driver indicates that it supports autosuspend by setting the .supports_autosuspend flag in its usb_driver structure. It is then responsible for informing the USB core whenever one of its interfaces becomes busy or idle. The -driver does so by calling these three functions: +driver does so by calling these five functions: int usb_autopm_get_interface(struct usb_interface *intf); void usb_autopm_put_interface(struct usb_interface *intf); int usb_autopm_set_interface(struct usb_interface *intf); + int usb_autopm_get_interface_async(struct usb_interface *intf); + void usb_autopm_put_interface_async(struct usb_interface *intf); The functions work by maintaining a counter in the usb_interface structure. When intf->pm_usage_count is > 0 then the interface is @@ -330,10 +332,12 @@ associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces. This field is used only by the USB core.) The driver owns intf->pm_usage_count; it can modify the value however -and whenever it likes. A nice aspect of the usb_autopm_* routines is -that the changes they make are protected by the usb_device structure's -PM mutex (udev->pm_mutex); however drivers may change pm_usage_count -without holding the mutex. +and whenever it likes. A nice aspect of the non-async usb_autopm_* +routines is that the changes they make are protected by the usb_device +structure's PM mutex (udev->pm_mutex); however drivers may change +pm_usage_count without holding the mutex. Drivers using the async +routines are responsible for their own synchronization and mutual +exclusion. usb_autopm_get_interface() increments pm_usage_count and attempts an autoresume if the new value is > 0 and the @@ -348,6 +352,14 @@ without holding the mutex. is suspended, and it attempts an autosuspend if the value is <= 0 and the device isn't suspended. + usb_autopm_get_interface_async() and + usb_autopm_put_interface_async() do almost the same things as + their non-async counterparts. The differences are: they do + not acquire the PM mutex, and they use a workqueue to do their + jobs. As a result they can be called in an atomic context, + such as an URB's completion handler, but when they return the + device will not generally not yet be in the desired state. + There also are a couple of utility routines drivers can use: usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls -- cgit v1.2.3 From c838ea4626d6e982489ff519f9ecf5e1649ca90b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Alan Stern Date: Mon, 15 Dec 2008 10:40:06 -0500 Subject: USB: storage: make the "quirks=" module parameter writable This patch (as1190) makes usb-storage's "quirks=" module parameter writable, so that users can add entries for their devices at runtime with no need to reboot or reload usb-storage. New codes are added for the SANE_SENSE, CAPACITY_HEURISTICS, and CAPACITY_OK flags. Signed-off-by: Alan Stern Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 8eb6e35405c..a58fc8b7339 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -2396,14 +2396,21 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file and Product ID values (4-digit hex numbers) and Flags is a set of characters, each corresponding to a common usb-storage quirk flag as follows: + a = SANE_SENSE (collect more than 18 bytes + of sense data); c = FIX_CAPACITY (decrease the reported device capacity by one sector); + h = CAPACITY_HEURISTICS (decrease the + reported device capacity by one + sector if the number is odd); i = IGNORE_DEVICE (don't bind to this device); l = NOT_LOCKABLE (don't try to lock and unlock ejectable media); m = MAX_SECTORS_64 (don't transfer more than 64 sectors = 32 KB at a time); + o = CAPACITY_OK (accept the capacity + reported by the device); r = IGNORE_RESIDUE (the device reports bogus residue values); s = SINGLE_LUN (the device has only one -- cgit v1.2.3 From 0d695913b0016b362a84a8bb6d6e28f8d90a70e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Date: Sat, 20 Dec 2008 16:57:32 -0800 Subject: wimax: documentation for the stack wimax documentation Signed-off-by: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/wimax/README.wimax | 81 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 81 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/wimax/README.wimax (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax b/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b78c4378084 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + Linux kernel WiMAX stack + + (C) 2008 Intel Corporation < linux-wimax@intel.com > + + This provides a basic Linux kernel WiMAX stack to provide a common + control API for WiMAX devices, usable from kernel and user space. + +1. Design + + The WiMAX stack is designed to provide for common WiMAX control + services to current and future WiMAX devices from any vendor. + + Because currently there is only one and we don't know what would be the + common services, the APIs it currently provides are very minimal. + However, it is done in such a way that it is easily extensible to + accommodate future requirements. + + The stack works by embedding a struct wimax_dev in your device's + control structures. This provides a set of callbacks that the WiMAX + stack will call in order to implement control operations requested by + the user. As well, the stack provides API functions that the driver + calls to notify about changes of state in the device. + + The stack exports the API calls needed to control the device to user + space using generic netlink as a marshalling mechanism. You can access + them using your own code or use the wrappers provided for your + convenience in libwimax (in the wimax-tools package). + + For detailed information on the stack, please see + include/linux/wimax.h. + +2. Usage + + For usage in a driver (registration, API, etc) please refer to the + instructions in the header file include/linux/wimax.h. + + When a device is registered with the WiMAX stack, a set of debugfs + files will appear in /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmxX can tweak for + control. + +2.1. Obtaining debug information: debugfs entries + + The WiMAX stack is compiled, by default, with debug messages that can + be used to diagnose issues. By default, said messages are disabled. + + The drivers will register debugfs entries that allow the user to tweak + debug settings. + + Each driver, when registering with the stack, will cause a debugfs + directory named wimax:DEVICENAME to be created; optionally, it might + create more subentries below it. + +2.1.1. Increasing debug output + + The files named *dl_* indicate knobs for controlling the debug output + of different submodules of the WiMAX stack: + * +# find /sys/kernel/debug/wimax\:wmx0 -name \*dl_\* +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_stack +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_rfkill +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_reset +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_msg +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_debugfs +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/.... # other driver specific files + + NOTE: Of course, if debugfs is mounted in a directory other than + /sys/kernel/debug, those paths will change. + + By reading the file you can obtain the current value of said debug + level; by writing to it, you can set it. + + To increase the debug level of, for example, the id-table submodule, + just write: + +$ echo 3 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table + + Increasing numbers yield increasing debug information; for details of + what is printed and the available levels, check the source. The code + uses 0 for disabled and increasing values until 8. -- cgit v1.2.3 From b0c83ae1de01880075955c7224e751440688ec74 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Date: Tue, 23 Dec 2008 16:18:24 -0800 Subject: wimax: Makefile, Kconfig and docbook linkage for the stack This patch provides Makefile and KConfig for the WiMAX stack, integrating them into the networking stack's Makefile, Kconfig and doc-book templates. Signed-off-by: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl | 8 ++++++++ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl index 627707a3cb9..59ad69a9d77 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl @@ -74,6 +74,14 @@ !Enet/sunrpc/rpcb_clnt.c !Enet/sunrpc/clnt.c + WiMAX +!Enet/wimax/op-msg.c +!Enet/wimax/op-reset.c +!Enet/wimax/op-rfkill.c +!Enet/wimax/stack.c +!Iinclude/net/wimax.h +!Iinclude/linux/wimax.h + -- cgit v1.2.3 From 3e91029ae049852c153da3fc355ab255ea7e2e0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Date: Sat, 20 Dec 2008 16:57:42 -0800 Subject: i2400m: documentation and instructions for usage The driver for the i2400m is a stacked driver. There is a core driver, the bus-generic driver that has no knowledge or dependencies on how the device is connected to the system; it only knows how to speak the device protocol. Then there are the bus-specific drivers (for USB and SDIO) that provide backends for the generic driver to communicate with the device. The bus generic driver connects to the network and WiMAX stacks on the top side, and on the bottom to the bus-specific drivers. Signed-off-by: Inaky Perez-Gonzalez Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman --- Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m | 260 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 260 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m b/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7dffd8919cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ + + Driver for the Intel Wireless Wimax Connection 2400m + + (C) 2008 Intel Corporation < linux-wimax@intel.com > + + This provides a driver for the Intel Wireless WiMAX Connection 2400m + and a basic Linux kernel WiMAX stack. + +1. Requirements + + * Linux installation with Linux kernel 2.6.22 or newer (if building + from a separate tree) + * Intel i2400m Echo Peak or Baxter Peak; this includes the Intel + Wireless WiMAX/WiFi Link 5x50 series. + * build tools: + + Linux kernel development package for the target kernel; to + build against your currently running kernel, you need to have + the kernel development package corresponding to the running + image installed (usually if your kernel is named + linux-VERSION, the development package is called + linux-dev-VERSION or linux-headers-VERSION). + + GNU C Compiler, make + +2. Compilation and installation + +2.1. Compilation of the drivers included in the kernel + + Configure the kernel; to enable the WiMAX drivers select Drivers > + Networking Drivers > WiMAX device support. Enable all of them as + modules (easier). + + If USB or SDIO are not enabled in the kernel configuration, the options + to build the i2400m USB or SDIO drivers will not show. Enable said + subsystems and go back to the WiMAX menu to enable the drivers. + + Compile and install your kernel as usual. + +2.2. Compilation of the drivers distributed as an standalone module + + To compile + +$ cd source/directory +$ make + + Once built you can load and unload using the provided load.sh script; + load.sh will load the modules, load.sh u will unload them. + + To install in the default kernel directories (and enable auto loading + when the device is plugged): + +$ make install +$ depmod -a + + If your kernel development files are located in a non standard + directory or if you want to build for a kernel that is not the + currently running one, set KDIR to the right location: + +$ make KDIR=/path/to/kernel/dev/tree + + For more information, please contact linux-wimax@intel.com. + +3. Installing the firmware + + The firmware can be obtained from http://linuxwimax.org or might have + been supplied with your hardware. + + It has to be installed in the target system: + * +$ cp FIRMWAREFILE.sbcf /lib/firmware/i2400m-fw-BUSTYPE-1.3.sbcf + + * NOTE: if your firmware came in an .rpm or .deb file, just install + it as normal, with the rpm (rpm -i FIRMWARE.rpm) or dpkg + (dpkg -i FIRMWARE.deb) commands. No further action is needed. + * BUSTYPE will be usb or sdio, depending on the hardware you have. + Each hardware type comes with its own firmware and will not work + with other types. + +4. Design + + This package contains two major parts: a WiMAX kernel stack and a + driver for the Intel i2400m. + + The WiMAX stack is designed to provide for common WiMAX control + services to current and future WiMAX devices from any vendor; please + see README.wimax for details. + + The i2400m kernel driver is broken up in two main parts: the bus + generic driver and the bus-specific drivers. The bus generic driver + forms the drivercore and contain no knowledge of the actual method we + use to connect to the device. The bus specific drivers are just the + glue to connect the bus-generic driver and the device. Currently only + USB and SDIO are supported. See drivers/net/wimax/i2400m/i2400m.h for + more information. + + The bus generic driver is logically broken up in two parts: OS-glue and + hardware-glue. The OS-glue interfaces with Linux. The hardware-glue + interfaces with the device on using an interface provided by the + bus-specific driver. The reason for this breakup is to be able to + easily reuse the hardware-glue to write drivers for other OSes; note + the hardware glue part is written as a native Linux driver; no + abstraction layers are used, so to port to another OS, the Linux kernel + API calls should be replaced with the target OS's. + +5. Usage + + To load the driver, follow the instructions in the install section; + once the driver is loaded, plug in the device (unless it is permanently + plugged in). The driver will enumerate the device, upload the firmware + and output messages in the kernel log (dmesg, /var/log/messages or + /var/log/kern.log) such as: + +... +i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: firmware interface version 8.0.0 +i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: WiMAX interface wmx0 (00:1d:e1:01:94:2c) ready + + At this point the device is ready to work. + + Current versions require the Intel WiMAX Network Service in userspace + to make things work. See the network service's README for instructions + on how to scan, connect and disconnect. + +5.1. Module parameters + + Module parameters can be set at kernel or module load time or by + echoing values: + +$ echo VALUE > /sys/module/MODULENAME/parameters/PARAMETERNAME + + To make changes permanent, for example, for the i2400m module, you can + also create a file named /etc/modprobe.d/i2400m containing: + +options i2400m idle_mode_disabled=1 + + To find which parameters are supported by a module, run: + +$ modinfo path/to/module.ko + + During kernel bootup (if the driver is linked in the kernel), specify + the following to the kernel command line: + +i2400m.PARAMETER=VALUE + +5.1.1. i2400m: idle_mode_disabled + + The i2400m module supports a parameter to disable idle mode. This + parameter, once set, will take effect only when the device is + reinitialized by the driver (eg: following a reset or a reconnect). + +5.2. Debug operations: debugfs entries + + The driver will register debugfs entries that allow the user to tweak + debug settings. There are three main container directories where + entries are placed, which correspond to the three blocks a i2400m WiMAX + driver has: + * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/ for the generic WiMAX stack + controls + * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/i2400m for the i2400m generic + driver controls + * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/i2400m-usb (or -sdio) for the + bus-specific i2400m-usb or i2400m-sdio controls). + + Of course, if debugfs is mounted in a directory other than + /sys/kernel/debug, those paths will change. + +5.2.1. Increasing debug output + + The files named *dl_* indicate knobs for controlling the debug output + of different submodules: + * +# find /sys/kernel/debug/wimax\:wmx0 -name \*dl_\* +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_tx +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_rx +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_notif +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_fw +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_usb +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_tx +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_rx +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_rfkill +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_netdev +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_fw +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_debugfs +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_driver +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_control +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_stack +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_rfkill +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_reset +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_msg +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table +/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_debugfs + + By reading the file you can obtain the current value of said debug + level; by writing to it, you can set it. + + To increase the debug level of, for example, the i2400m's generic TX + engine, just write: + +$ echo 3 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_tx + + Increasing numbers yield increasing debug information; for details of + what is printed and the available levels, check the source. The code + uses 0 for disabled and increasing values until 8. + +5.2.2. RX and TX statistics + + The i2400m/rx_stats and i2400m/tx_stats provide statistics about the + data reception/delivery from the device: + +$ cat /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/rx_stats +45 1 3 34 3104 48 480 + + The numbers reported are + * packets/RX-buffer: total, min, max + * RX-buffers: total RX buffers received, accumulated RX buffer size + in bytes, min size received, max size received + + Thus, to find the average buffer size received, divide accumulated + RX-buffer / total RX-buffers. + + To clear the statistics back to 0, write anything to the rx_stats file: + +$ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m_rx_stats + + Likewise for TX. + + Note the packets this debug file refers to are not network packet, but + packets in the sense of the device-specific protocol for communication + to the host. See drivers/net/wimax/i2400m/tx.c. + +5.2.3. Tracing messages received from user space + + To echo messages received from user space into the trace pipe that the + i2400m driver creates, set the debug file i2400m/trace_msg_from_user to + 1: + * +$ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/trace_msg_from_user + +5.2.4. Performing a device reset + + By writing a 0, a 1 or a 2 to the file + /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/reset, the driver performs a warm (without + disconnecting from the bus), cold (disconnecting from the bus) or bus + (bus specific) reset on the device. + +5.2.5. Asking the device to enter power saving mode + + By writing any value to the /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0 file, the + device will attempt to enter power saving mode. + +6. Troubleshooting + +6.1. Driver complains about 'i2400m-fw-usb-1.2.sbcf: request failed' + + If upon connecting the device, the following is output in the kernel + log: + +i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: fw i2400m-fw-usb-1.3.sbcf: request failed: -2 + + This means that the driver cannot locate the firmware file named + /lib/firmware/i2400m-fw-usb-1.2.sbcf. Check that the file is present in + the right location. -- cgit v1.2.3 From e8de1481fd7126ee9e93d6889da6f00c05e1e019 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Arjan van de Ven Date: Wed, 22 Oct 2008 19:55:31 -0700 Subject: resource: allow MMIO exclusivity for device drivers Device drivers that use pci_request_regions() (and similar APIs) have a reasonable expectation that they are the only ones accessing their device. As part of the e1000e hunt, we were afraid that some userland (X or some bootsplash stuff) was mapping the MMIO region that the driver thought it had exclusively via /dev/mem or via various sysfs resource mappings. This patch adds the option for device drivers to cause their reserved regions to the "banned from /dev/mem use" list, so now both kernel memory and device-exclusive MMIO regions are banned. NOTE: This is only active when CONFIG_STRICT_DEVMEM is set. In addition to the config option, a kernel parameter iomem=relaxed is provided for the cases where developers want to diagnose, in the field, drivers issues from userspace. Reviewed-by: Matthew Wilcox Signed-off-by: Arjan van de Ven Signed-off-by: Jesse Barnes --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ++++ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 0b3f6711d2f..0072fabb1dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -918,6 +918,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file inttest= [IA64] + iomem= Disable strict checking of access to MMIO memory + strict regions from userspace. + relaxed + iommu= [x86] off force -- cgit v1.2.3 From 6a479079c07211bf348ac8a79754f26bea258f26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Ben Hutchings Date: Tue, 23 Dec 2008 03:08:29 +0000 Subject: PCI: Add pci_clear_master() as opposite of pci_set_master() During an online device reset it may be useful to disable bus-mastering. pci_disable_device() does that, and far more besides, so is not suitable for an online reset. Add pci_clear_master() which does just this. Signed-off-by: Ben Hutchings Reviewed-by: Matthew Wilcox Signed-off-by: Jesse Barnes --- Documentation/PCI/pci.txt | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt index fd4907a2968..7f6de6ea5b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt @@ -294,7 +294,8 @@ NOTE: pci_enable_device() can fail! Check the return value. pci_set_master() will enable DMA by setting the bus master bit in the PCI_COMMAND register. It also fixes the latency timer value if -it's set to something bogus by the BIOS. +it's set to something bogus by the BIOS. pci_clear_master() will +disable DMA by clearing the bus master bit. If the PCI device can use the PCI Memory-Write-Invalidate transaction, call pci_set_mwi(). This enables the PCI_COMMAND bit for Mem-Wr-Inval -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4f628248a578585472e19e4cba2c604643af8c6c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jike Song Date: Mon, 5 Jan 2009 14:57:03 +0800 Subject: kbuild: reintroduce ALLSOURCE_ARCHS support for tags/cscope This patch reintroduce the ALLSOURCE_ARCHS support for tags/TAGS/ cscope targets. The Kbuild previously has this feature, but after moving the targets into scripts/tags.sh, ALLSOURCE_ARCHS disappears. It's something like this: $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS="x86 mips arm" tags cscope Signed-off-by: Jike Song Signed-off-by: Sam Ravnborg --- Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt | 7 +++++++ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index 51771847e81..923f9ddee8f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -124,3 +124,10 @@ KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS -------------------------------------------------- For modules use symbols from another modules. See more details in modules.txt. + +ALLSOURCE_ARCHS +-------------------------------------------------- +For tags/TAGS/cscope targets, you can specify more than one archs +to be included in the databases, separated by blankspace. e.g. + + $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS="x86 mips arm" tags -- cgit v1.2.3 From baa91878ab9b0f1cdb7ab03b53ee2e4389245644 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Wolfram Sang Date: Tue, 6 Jan 2009 15:12:27 +0100 Subject: kbuild: fix typos (s/bin_shipped/bin.o_shipped/) in Documentation The text always mentions ...bin.o_shipped, just the example makefiles actually use ...bin_shipped. It was corrected in one place some time ago, these ones seem to have been forgotten. Signed-off-by: Wolfram Sang Signed-off-by: Sam Ravnborg --- Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt index 1821c077b43..b1096da953c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ following files: # Module specific targets genbin: - echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped + echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped In example 2, we are down to two fairly simple files and for simple @@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ following files: # Module specific targets genbin: - echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped + echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped endif -- cgit v1.2.3 From 18e7f1f0d34be4a39f7f47324a3e26b43fddb714 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Li Zefan Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:07:32 -0800 Subject: cgroups: documentation updates - remove 'releasable' since it has been moved to the debug subsys. - update lock requirements of subsys callbacks. Signed-off-by: Li Zefan Cc: Paul Menage Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Pavel Emelyanov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index d9014aa0eb6..60287e9e9d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -227,7 +227,6 @@ Each cgroup is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system containing the following files describing that cgroup: - tasks: list of tasks (by pid) attached to that cgroup - - releasable flag: cgroup currently removeable? - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit? - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file exists in the top cgroup only) @@ -360,7 +359,7 @@ Now you want to do something with this cgroup. In this directory you can find several files: # ls -notify_on_release releasable tasks +notify_on_release tasks (plus whatever files added by the attached subsystems) Now attach your shell to this cgroup: @@ -479,7 +478,6 @@ newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this subsystem's create() method has been called for the new cgroup). void pre_destroy(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp); -(cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called before checking the reference count on each subsystem. This may be useful for subsystems which have some extra references even if @@ -498,6 +496,7 @@ remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex. void attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp, struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task) +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called after the task has been attached to the cgroup, to allow any post-attachment activity that requires memory allocations or blocking. @@ -511,6 +510,7 @@ void exit(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct task_struct *task) Called during task exit. int populate(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp) +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called after creation of a cgroup to allow a subsystem to populate the cgroup directory with file entries. The subsystem should make @@ -520,6 +520,7 @@ method can return an error code, the error code is currently not always handled well. void post_clone(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp) +(cgroup_mutex held by caller) Called at the end of cgroup_clone() to do any paramater initialization which might be required before a task could attach. For -- cgit v1.2.3 From f817ed48535ac6510ebae7c4116f24a5f9268834 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:07:53 -0800 Subject: memcg: move all acccounting to parent at rmdir() This patch provides a function to move account information of a page between mem_cgroups and rewrite force_empty to make use of this. This moving of page_cgroup is done under - lru_lock of source/destination mem_cgroup is held. - lock_page_cgroup() is held. Then, a routine which touches pc->mem_cgroup without lock_page_cgroup() should confirm pc->mem_cgroup is still valid or not. Typical code can be following. (while page is not under lock_page()) mem = pc->mem_cgroup; mz = page_cgroup_zoneinfo(pc) spin_lock_irqsave(&mz->lru_lock); if (pc->mem_cgroup == mem) ...../* some list handling */ spin_unlock_irqrestore(&mz->lru_lock); Of course, better way is lock_page_cgroup(pc); .... unlock_page_cgroup(pc); But you should confirm the nest of lock and avoid deadlock. If you treats page_cgroup from mem_cgroup's LRU under mz->lru_lock, you don't have to worry about what pc->mem_cgroup points to. moved pages are added to head of lru, not to tail. Expected users of this routine is: - force_empty (rmdir) - moving tasks between cgroup (for moving account information.) - hierarchy (maybe useful.) force_empty(rmdir) uses this move_account and move pages to its parent. This "move" will not cause OOM (I added "oom" parameter to try_charge().) If the parent is busy (not enough memory), force_empty calls try_to_free_page() and reduce usage. Purpose of this behavior is - Fix "forget all" behavior of force_empty and avoid leak of accounting. - By "moving first, free if necessary", keep pages on memory as much as possible. Adding a switch to change behavior of force_empty to - free first, move if necessary - free all, if there is mlocked/busy pages, return -EBUSY. is under consideration. (I'll add if someone requtests.) This patch also removes memory.force_empty file, a brutal debug-only interface. Reviewed-by: Daisuke Nishimura Tested-by: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Paul Menage Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 12 ++++-------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 1c07547d3f8..58f32c166fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -207,12 +207,6 @@ exceeded. The memory.stat file gives accounting information. Now, the number of caches, RSS and Active pages/Inactive pages are shown. -The memory.force_empty gives an interface to drop *all* charges by force. - -# echo 1 > memory.force_empty - -will drop all charges in cgroup. Currently, this is maintained for test. - 4. Testing Balbir posted lmbench, AIM9, LTP and vmmstress results [10] and [11]. @@ -242,8 +236,10 @@ reclaimed. A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all -tasks have migrated away from it. Such charges are automatically dropped at -rmdir() if there are no tasks. +tasks have migrated away from it. +Such charges are moved to its parent as much as possible and freed if parent +is full. Both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent. +If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. 5. TODO -- cgit v1.2.3 From c1e862c1f5ad34771b6d0a528cf681e0dcad7c86 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:07:55 -0800 Subject: memcg: new force_empty to free pages under group By memcg-move-all-accounts-to-parent-at-rmdir.patch, there is no leak of memory usage and force_empty is removed. This patch adds "force_empty" again, in reasonable manner. memory.force_empty file works when #echo 0 (or some) > memory.force_empty and have following function. 1. only works when there are no task in this cgroup. 2. free all page under this cgroup as much as possible. 3. page which cannot be freed will be moved up to parent. 4. Then, memcg will be empty after above echo returns. This is much better behavior than old "force_empty" which just forget all accounts. This patch also check signal_pending() and above "echo" can be stopped by "Ctrl-C". [akpm@linux-foundation.org: cleanup] Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Li Zefan Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Pavel Emelyanov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 27 +++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 58f32c166fa..54253b7a8db 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -237,11 +237,30 @@ reclaimed. A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all tasks have migrated away from it. -Such charges are moved to its parent as much as possible and freed if parent -is full. Both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent. -If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. +Such charges are freed(at default) or moved to its parent. When moved, +both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent. +If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. See 5.1 Also. -5. TODO +5. Misc. interfaces. + +5.1 force_empty + memory.force_empty interface is provided to make cgroup's memory usage empty. + You can use this interface only when the cgroup has no tasks. + When writing anything to this + + # echo 0 > memory.force_empty + + Almost all pages tracked by this memcg will be unmapped and freed. Some of + pages cannot be freed because it's locked or in-use. Such pages are moved + to parent and this cgroup will be empty. But this may return -EBUSY in + some too busy case. + + Typical use case of this interface is that calling this before rmdir(). + Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be + moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. + + +6. TODO 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller) 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first -- cgit v1.2.3 From d13d144309d2e5a3e6ad978b16c1d0226ddc9231 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:07:56 -0800 Subject: memcg: handle swap caches SwapCache support for memory resource controller (memcg) Before mem+swap controller, memcg itself should handle SwapCache in proper way. This is cut-out from it. In current memcg, SwapCache is just leaked and the user can create tons of SwapCache. This is a leak of account and should be handled. SwapCache accounting is done as following. charge (anon) - charged when it's mapped. (because of readahead, charge at add_to_swap_cache() is not sane) uncharge (anon) - uncharged when it's dropped from swapcache and fully unmapped. means it's not uncharged at unmap. Note: delete from swap cache at swap-in is done after rmap information is established. charge (shmem) - charged at swap-in. this prevents charge at add_to_page_cache(). uncharge (shmem) - uncharged when it's dropped from swapcache and not on shmem's radix-tree. at migration, check against 'old page' is modified to handle shmem. Comparing to the old version discussed (and caused troubles), we have advantages of - PCG_USED bit. - simple migrating handling. So, situation is much easier than several months ago, maybe. [hugh@veritas.com: memcg: handle swap caches build fix] Reviewed-by: Daisuke Nishimura Tested-by: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Hugh Dickins Cc: Li Zefan Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Pavel Emelyanov Signed-off-by: Hugh Dickins Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 5 +++++ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 54253b7a8db..9fe2d0eabe0 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -137,6 +137,11 @@ behind this approach is that a cgroup that aggressively uses a shared page will eventually get charged for it (once it is uncharged from the cgroup that brought it in -- this will happen on memory pressure). +Exception: When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to +be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the +caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem. + + 2.4 Reclaim Each cgroup maintains a per cgroup LRU that consists of an active -- cgit v1.2.3 From c077719be8e9e6b55702117513d1b5f41d80404a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:07:57 -0800 Subject: memcg: mem+swap controller Kconfig Config and control variable for mem+swap controller. This patch adds CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP (memory resource controller swap extension.) For accounting swap, it's obvious that we have to use additional memory to remember "who uses swap". This adds more overhead. So, it's better to offer "choice" to users. This patch adds 2 choices. This patch adds 2 parameters to enable swap extension or not. - CONFIG - boot option Reviewed-by: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Li Zefan Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Pavel Emelyanov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 532eacbbed6..fb849020aea 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1562,6 +1562,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nosoftlockup [KNL] Disable the soft-lockup detector. + noswapaccount [KNL] Disable accounting of swap in memory resource + controller. (See Documentation/controllers/memory.txt) + nosync [HW,M68K] Disables sync negotiation for all devices. notsc [BUGS=X86-32] Disable Time Stamp Counter -- cgit v1.2.3 From 8c7c6e34a1256a5082d38c8e9bd1474476912715 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:00 -0800 Subject: memcg: mem+swap controller core This patch implements per cgroup limit for usage of memory+swap. However there are SwapCache, double counting of swap-cache and swap-entry is avoided. Mem+Swap controller works as following. - memory usage is limited by memory.limit_in_bytes. - memory + swap usage is limited by memory.memsw_limit_in_bytes. This has following benefits. - A user can limit total resource usage of mem+swap. Without this, because memory resource controller doesn't take care of usage of swap, a process can exhaust all the swap (by memory leak.) We can avoid this case. And Swap is shared resource but it cannot be reclaimed (goes back to memory) until it's used. This characteristic can be trouble when the memory is divided into some parts by cpuset or memcg. Assume group A and group B. After some application executes, the system can be.. Group A -- very large free memory space but occupy 99% of swap. Group B -- under memory shortage but cannot use swap...it's nearly full. Ability to set appropriate swap limit for each group is required. Maybe someone wonder "why not swap but mem+swap ?" - The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of mem+swap. In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without affecting global LRU, mem+swap limit is better than just limiting swap. Accounting target information is stored in swap_cgroup which is per swap entry record. Charge is done as following. map - charge page and memsw. unmap - uncharge page/memsw if not SwapCache. swap-out (__delete_from_swap_cache) - uncharge page - record mem_cgroup information to swap_cgroup. swap-in (do_swap_page) - charged as page and memsw. record in swap_cgroup is cleared. memsw accounting is decremented. swap-free (swap_free()) - if swap entry is freed, memsw is uncharged by PAGE_SIZE. There are people work under never-swap environments and consider swap as something bad. For such people, this mem+swap controller extension is just an overhead. This overhead is avoided by config or boot option. (see Kconfig. detail is not in this patch.) TODO: - maybe more optimization can be don in swap-in path. (but not very safe.) But we just do simple accounting at this stage. [nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp: make resize limit hold mutex] [hugh@veritas.com: memswap controller core swapcache fixes] Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Li Zefan Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Pavel Emelyanov Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: Hugh Dickins Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++-- 1 file changed, 27 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 9fe2d0eabe0..05fe29ab1e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -137,12 +137,32 @@ behind this approach is that a cgroup that aggressively uses a shared page will eventually get charged for it (once it is uncharged from the cgroup that brought it in -- this will happen on memory pressure). -Exception: When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to +Exception: If CONFIG_CGROUP_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP is not used.. +When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem. -2.4 Reclaim +2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP) +Swap Extension allows you to record charge for swap. A swapped-in page is +charged back to original page allocator if possible. + +When swap is accounted, following files are added. + - memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes. + - memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes. + +usage of mem+swap is limited by memsw.limit_in_bytes. + +Note: why 'mem+swap' rather than swap. +The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means +to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of +mem+swap. + +In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without affecting +global LRU, mem+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from OS point +of view. + +2.5 Reclaim Each cgroup maintains a per cgroup LRU that consists of an active and inactive list. When a cgroup goes over its limit, we first try @@ -246,6 +266,11 @@ Such charges are freed(at default) or moved to its parent. When moved, both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent. If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. See 5.1 Also. +Charges recorded in swap information is not updated at removal of cgroup. +Recorded information is discarded and a cgroup which uses swap (swapcache) +will be charged as a new owner of it. + + 5. Misc. interfaces. 5.1 force_empty -- cgit v1.2.3 From 52bc0d82100cd896213a9a25ec01c1ba87b939db Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Balbir Singh Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:03 -0800 Subject: memcg: memory cgroup hierarchy documentation Documentation updates for hierarchy support Signed-off-by: Balbir Singh Cc: YAMAMOTO Takashi Cc: Paul Menage Cc: Li Zefan Cc: David Rientjes Cc: Pavel Emelianov Cc: Dhaval Giani Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 38 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++- 1 file changed, 37 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 05fe29ab1e5..09e1c737d28 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -289,8 +289,44 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it. Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. +6. Hierarchy support -6. TODO +The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting. +The hierarchy is created by creating the appropriate cgroups in the +cgroup filesystem. Consider for example, the following cgroup filesystem +hierarchy + + root + / | \ + / | \ + a b c + | \ + | \ + d e + +In the diagram above, with hierarchical accounting enabled, all memory +usage of e, is accounted to its ancestors up until the root (i.e, c and root), +that has memory.use_hierarchy enabled. If one of the ancestors goes over its +limit, the reclaim algorithm reclaims from the tasks in the ancestor and the +children of the ancestor. + +6.1 Enabling hierarchical accounting and reclaim + +The memory controller by default disables the hierarchy feature. Support +can be enabled by writing 1 to memory.use_hierarchy file of the root cgroup + +# echo 1 > memory.use_hierarchy + +The feature can be disabled by + +# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy + +NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other +cgroups created below it. + +NOTE2: This feature can be enabled/disabled per subtree. + +7. TODO 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller) 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7f016ee8b6a9a43f768e6252021f169abec4fa1f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KOSAKI Motohiro Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:22 -0800 Subject: memcg: show reclaim stat Add the following four fields to memory.stat file: - inactive_ratio - recent_rotated_anon - recent_rotated_file - recent_scanned_anon - recent_scanned_file Acked-by: Rik van Riel Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Signed-off-by: KOSAKI Motohiro Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Cc: Hugh Dickins Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 25 +++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 09e1c737d28..d71745cc2f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -289,6 +289,31 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it. Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful. +5.2 stat file + memory.stat file includes following statistics (now) + cache - # of pages from page-cache and shmem. + rss - # of pages from anonymous memory. + pgpgin - # of event of charging + pgpgout - # of event of uncharging + active_anon - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem. + inactive_anon - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem + active_file - # of pages on active lru of file-cache + inactive_file - # of pages on inactive lru of file cache + unevictable - # of pages cannot be reclaimed.(mlocked etc) + + Below is depend on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM. + inactive_ratio - VM inernal parameter. (see mm/page_alloc.c) + recent_rotated_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) + recent_rotated_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) + recent_scanned_anon - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) + recent_scanned_file - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c) + + Memo: + recent_rotated means recent frequency of lru rotation. + recent_scanned means recent # of scans to lru. + showing for better debug please see the code for meanings. + + 6. Hierarchy support The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting. -- cgit v1.2.3 From a7885eb8ad465ec9db99ac5b5e6680f0ca8e11c8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KOSAKI Motohiro Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:24 -0800 Subject: memcg: swappiness Currently, /proc/sys/vm/swappiness can change swappiness ratio for global reclaim. However, memcg reclaim doesn't have tuning parameter for itself. In general, the optimal swappiness depend on workload. (e.g. hpc workload need to low swappiness than the others.) Then, per cgroup swappiness improve administrator tunability. Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Signed-off-by: KOSAKI Motohiro Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Cc: Hugh Dickins Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memory.txt | 9 +++++++++ 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index d71745cc2f0..e1501964df1 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -314,6 +314,15 @@ will be charged as a new owner of it. showing for better debug please see the code for meanings. +5.3 swappiness + Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only. + + Following cgroup's swapiness can't be changed. + - root cgroup (uses /proc/sys/vm/swappiness). + - a cgroup which uses hierarchy and it has child cgroup. + - a cgroup which uses hierarchy and not the root of hierarchy. + + 6. Hierarchy support The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9836d89191edd4887ed026a9ce53d9dfac62ec1c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:27 -0800 Subject: memcg: explain details and test document Documentation for implementation details and how to test. Just an example. feel free to modify, add, remove lines. Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Balbir Singh Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Cc: Hugh Dickins Cc: KOSAKI Motohiro Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt | 311 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 311 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c91f69b0b54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +Memory Resource Controller(Memcg) Implementation Memo. +Last Updated: 2008/12/10 +Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.28-rc7-mm. + +Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior +is complex. This is a document for memcg's internal behavior. +Please note that implementation details can be changed. + +(*) Topics on API should be in Documentation/controllers/memory.txt) + +0. How to record usage ? + 2 objects are used. + + page_cgroup ....an object per page. + Allocated at boot or memory hotplug. Freed at memory hot removal. + + swap_cgroup ... an entry per swp_entry. + Allocated at swapon(). Freed at swapoff(). + + The page_cgroup has USED bit and double count against a page_cgroup never + occurs. swap_cgroup is used only when a charged page is swapped-out. + +1. Charge + + a page/swp_entry may be charged (usage += PAGE_SIZE) at + + mem_cgroup_newpage_charge() + Called at new page fault and Copy-On-Write. + + mem_cgroup_try_charge_swapin() + Called at do_swap_page() (page fault on swap entry) and swapoff. + Followed by charge-commit-cancel protocol. (With swap accounting) + At commit, a charge recorded in swap_cgroup is removed. + + mem_cgroup_cache_charge() + Called at add_to_page_cache() + + mem_cgroup_cache_charge_swapin() + Called at shmem's swapin. + + mem_cgroup_prepare_migration() + Called before migration. "extra" charge is done and followed by + charge-commit-cancel protocol. + At commit, charge against oldpage or newpage will be committed. + +2. Uncharge + a page/swp_entry may be uncharged (usage -= PAGE_SIZE) by + + mem_cgroup_uncharge_page() + Called when an anonymous page is fully unmapped. I.e., mapcount goes + to 0. If the page is SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until + mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache(). + + mem_cgroup_uncharge_cache_page() + Called when a page-cache is deleted from radix-tree. If the page is + SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache(). + + mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache() + Called when SwapCache is removed from radix-tree. The charge itself + is moved to swap_cgroup. (If mem+swap controller is disabled, no + charge to swap occurs.) + + mem_cgroup_uncharge_swap() + Called when swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0. A charge against swap + disappears. + + mem_cgroup_end_migration(old, new) + At success of migration old is uncharged (if necessary), a charge + to new page is committed. At failure, charge to old page is committed. + +3. charge-commit-cancel + In some case, we can't know this "charge" is valid or not at charging + (because of races). + To handle such case, there are charge-commit-cancel functions. + mem_cgroup_try_charge_XXX + mem_cgroup_commit_charge_XXX + mem_cgroup_cancel_charge_XXX + these are used in swap-in and migration. + + At try_charge(), there are no flags to say "this page is charged". + at this point, usage += PAGE_SIZE. + + At commit(), the function checks the page should be charged or not + and set flags or avoid charging.(usage -= PAGE_SIZE) + + At cancel(), simply usage -= PAGE_SIZE. + +Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y. + +4. Anonymous + Anonymous page is newly allocated at + - page fault into MAP_ANONYMOUS mapping. + - Copy-On-Write. + It is charged right after it's allocated before doing any page table + related operations. Of course, it's uncharged when another page is used + for the fault address. + + At freeing anonymous page (by exit() or munmap()), zap_pte() is called + and pages for ptes are freed one by one.(see mm/memory.c). Uncharges + are done at page_remove_rmap() when page_mapcount() goes down to 0. + + Another page freeing is by page-reclaim (vmscan.c) and anonymous + pages are swapped out. In this case, the page is marked as + PageSwapCache(). uncharge() routine doesn't uncharge the page marked + as SwapCache(). It's delayed until __delete_from_swap_cache(). + + 4.1 Swap-in. + At swap-in, the page is taken from swap-cache. There are 2 cases. + + (a) If the SwapCache is newly allocated and read, it has no charges. + (b) If the SwapCache has been mapped by processes, it has been + charged already. + + In case (a), we charge it. In case (b), we don't charge it. + (But racy state between (a) and (b) exists. We do check it.) + At charging, a charge recorded in swap_cgroup is moved to page_cgroup. + + 4.2 Swap-out. + At swap-out, typical state transition is below. + + (a) add to swap cache. (marked as SwapCache) + swp_entry's refcnt += 1. + (b) fully unmapped. + swp_entry's refcnt += # of ptes. + (c) write back to swap. + (d) delete from swap cache. (remove from SwapCache) + swp_entry's refcnt -= 1. + + + At (b), the page is marked as SwapCache and not uncharged. + At (d), the page is removed from SwapCache and a charge in page_cgroup + is moved to swap_cgroup. + + Finally, at task exit, + (e) zap_pte() is called and swp_entry's refcnt -=1 -> 0. + Here, a charge in swap_cgroup disappears. + +5. Page Cache + Page Cache is charged at + - add_to_page_cache_locked(). + + uncharged at + - __remove_from_page_cache(). + + The logic is very clear. (About migration, see below) + Note: __remove_from_page_cache() is called by remove_from_page_cache() + and __remove_mapping(). + +6. Shmem(tmpfs) Page Cache + Memcg's charge/uncharge have special handlers of shmem. The best way + to understand shmem's page state transition is to read mm/shmem.c. + But brief explanation of the behavior of memcg around shmem will be + helpful to understand the logic. + + Shmem's page (just leaf page, not direct/indirect block) can be on + - radix-tree of shmem's inode. + - SwapCache. + - Both on radix-tree and SwapCache. This happens at swap-in + and swap-out, + + It's charged when... + - A new page is added to shmem's radix-tree. + - A swp page is read. (move a charge from swap_cgroup to page_cgroup) + It's uncharged when + - A page is removed from radix-tree and not SwapCache. + - When SwapCache is removed, a charge is moved to swap_cgroup. + - When swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0, a charge in swap_cgroup + disappears. + +7. Page Migration + One of the most complicated functions is page-migration-handler. + Memcg has 2 routines. Assume that we are migrating a page's contents + from OLDPAGE to NEWPAGE. + + Usual migration logic is.. + (a) remove the page from LRU. + (b) allocate NEWPAGE (migration target) + (c) lock by lock_page(). + (d) unmap all mappings. + (e-1) If necessary, replace entry in radix-tree. + (e-2) move contents of a page. + (f) map all mappings again. + (g) pushback the page to LRU. + (-) OLDPAGE will be freed. + + Before (g), memcg should complete all necessary charge/uncharge to + NEWPAGE/OLDPAGE. + + The point is.... + - If OLDPAGE is anonymous, all charges will be dropped at (d) because + try_to_unmap() drops all mapcount and the page will not be + SwapCache. + + - If OLDPAGE is SwapCache, charges will be kept at (g) because + __delete_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1) + + - If OLDPAGE is page-cache, charges will be kept at (g) because + remove_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1) + + memcg provides following hooks. + + - mem_cgroup_prepare_migration(OLDPAGE) + Called after (b) to account a charge (usage += PAGE_SIZE) against + memcg which OLDPAGE belongs to. + + - mem_cgroup_end_migration(OLDPAGE, NEWPAGE) + Called after (f) before (g). + If OLDPAGE is used, commit OLDPAGE again. If OLDPAGE is already + charged, a charge by prepare_migration() is automatically canceled. + If NEWPAGE is used, commit NEWPAGE and uncharge OLDPAGE. + + But zap_pte() (by exit or munmap) can be called while migration, + we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit(). + +8. LRU + Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, it's handling is under global + VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock). + Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's + list management functions under zone->lru_lock(). + + A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans + memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page + from LRU. + (By __isolate_lru_page(), the page is removed from both of global and + private LRU.) + + +9. Typical Tests. + + Tests for racy cases. + + 9.1 Small limit to memcg. + When you do test to do racy case, it's good test to set memcg's limit + to be very small rather than GB. Many races found in the test under + xKB or xxMB limits. + (Memory behavior under GB and Memory behavior under MB shows very + different situation.) + + 9.2 Shmem + Historically, memcg's shmem handling was poor and we saw some amount + of troubles here. This is because shmem is page-cache but can be + SwapCache. Test with shmem/tmpfs is always good test. + + 9.3 Migration + For NUMA, migration is an another special case. To do easy test, cpuset + is useful. Following is a sample script to do migration. + + mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /opt/cpuset + + mkdir /opt/cpuset/01 + echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.cpus + echo 0 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.mems + echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.memory_migrate + mkdir /opt/cpuset/02 + echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.cpus + echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.mems + echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.memory_migrate + + In above set, when you moves a task from 01 to 02, page migration to + node 0 to node 1 will occur. Following is a script to migrate all + under cpuset. + -- + move_task() + { + for pid in $1 + do + /bin/echo $pid >$2/tasks 2>/dev/null + echo -n $pid + echo -n " " + done + echo END + } + + G1_TASK=`cat ${G1}/tasks` + G2_TASK=`cat ${G2}/tasks` + move_task "${G1_TASK}" ${G2} & + -- + 9.4 Memory hotplug. + memory hotplug test is one of good test. + to offline memory, do following. + # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state + (XXX is the place of memory) + This is an easy way to test page migration, too. + + 9.5 mkdir/rmdir + When using hierarchy, mkdir/rmdir test should be done. + Use tests like the following. + + echo 1 >/opt/cgroup/01/memory/use_hierarchy + mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_a + mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_b + + set limit to 01. + add limit to 01/child_b + run jobs under child_a and child_b + + create/delete following groups at random while jobs are running. + /opt/cgroup/01/child_a/child_aa + /opt/cgroup/01/child_b/child_bb + /opt/cgroup/01/child_c + + running new jobs in new group is also good. + + 9.6 Mount with other subsystems. + Mounting with other subsystems is a good test because there is a + race and lock dependency with other cgroup subsystems. + + example) + # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t cpuset,memory,cpu,devices + + and do task move, mkdir, rmdir etc...under this. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 03f3c433648a97ae7c86be789edba67690f6ea60 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:31 -0800 Subject: memcg: fix swap accounting leak Fix swapin charge operation of memcg. Now, memcg has hooks to swap-out operation and checks SwapCache is really unused or not. That check depends on contents of struct page. I.e. If PageAnon(page) && page_mapped(page), the page is recoginized as still-in-use. Now, reuse_swap_page() calles delete_from_swap_cache() before establishment of any rmap. Then, in followinig sequence (Page fault with WRITE) try_charge() (charge += PAGESIZE) commit_charge() (Check page_cgroup is used or not..) reuse_swap_page() -> delete_from_swapcache() -> mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache() (charge -= PAGESIZE) ...... New charge is uncharged soon.... To avoid this, move commit_charge() after page_mapcount() goes up to 1. By this, try_charge() (usage += PAGESIZE) reuse_swap_page() (may usage -= PAGESIZE if PCG_USED is set) commit_charge() (If page_cgroup is not marked as PCG_USED, add new charge.) Accounting will be correct. Changelog (v2) -> (v3) - fixed invalid charge to swp_entry==0. - updated documentation. Changelog (v1) -> (v2) - fixed comment. [nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp: swap accounting leak doc fix] Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Acked-by: Balbir Singh Tested-by: Balbir Singh Cc: Hugh Dickins Cc: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt | 41 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---- 1 file changed, 36 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt index c91f69b0b54..08d4d3ea0d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memcg_test.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Memory Resource Controller(Memcg) Implementation Memo. -Last Updated: 2008/12/10 -Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.28-rc7-mm. +Last Updated: 2008/12/15 +Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.28-rc8-mm. Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior is complex. This is a document for memcg's internal behavior. @@ -111,9 +111,40 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y. (b) If the SwapCache has been mapped by processes, it has been charged already. - In case (a), we charge it. In case (b), we don't charge it. - (But racy state between (a) and (b) exists. We do check it.) - At charging, a charge recorded in swap_cgroup is moved to page_cgroup. + This swap-in is one of the most complicated work. In do_swap_page(), + following events occur when pte is unchanged. + + (1) the page (SwapCache) is looked up. + (2) lock_page() + (3) try_charge_swapin() + (4) reuse_swap_page() (may call delete_swap_cache()) + (5) commit_charge_swapin() + (6) swap_free(). + + Considering following situation for example. + + (A) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() + doesn't call delete_from_swap_cache(). + (B) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() + calls delete_from_swap_cache(). + (C) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() doesn't + call delete_from_swap_cache(). + (D) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() calls + delete_from_swap_cache(). + + memory.usage/memsw.usage changes to this page/swp_entry will be + Case (A) (B) (C) (D) + Event + Before (2) 0/ 1 0/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1 + =========================================== + (3) +1/+1 +1/+1 +1/+1 +1/+1 + (4) - 0/ 0 - -1/ 0 + (5) 0/-1 0/ 0 -1/-1 0/ 0 + (6) - 0/-1 - 0/-1 + =========================================== + Result 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1 1/ 1 + + In any cases, charges to this page should be 1/ 1. 4.2 Swap-out. At swap-out, typical state transition is below. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 999cd8a450f8f93701669a61cac4d3b19eca07e8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Paul Menage Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:36 -0800 Subject: cgroups: add a per-subsystem hierarchy_mutex These patches introduce new locking/refcount support for cgroups to reduce the need for subsystems to call cgroup_lock(). This will ultimately allow the atomicity of cgroup_rmdir() (which was removed recently) to be restored. These three patches give: 1/3 - introduce a per-subsystem hierarchy_mutex which a subsystem can use to prevent changes to its own cgroup tree 2/3 - use hierarchy_mutex in place of calling cgroup_lock() in the memory controller 3/3 - introduce a css_tryget() function similar to the one recently proposed by Kamezawa, but avoiding spurious refcount failures in the event of a race between a css_tryget() and an unsuccessful cgroup_rmdir() Future patches will likely involve: - using hierarchy mutex in place of cgroup_lock() in more subsystems where appropriate - restoring the atomicity of cgroup_rmdir() with respect to cgroup_create() This patch: Add a hierarchy_mutex to the cgroup_subsys object that protects changes to the hierarchy observed by that subsystem. It is taken by the cgroup subsystem (in addition to cgroup_mutex) for the following operations: - linking a cgroup into that subsystem's cgroup tree - unlinking a cgroup from that subsystem's cgroup tree - moving the subsystem to/from a hierarchy (including across the bind() callback) Thus if the subsystem holds its own hierarchy_mutex, it can safely traverse its own hierarchy. Signed-off-by: Paul Menage Tested-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki Cc: Li Zefan Cc: Balbir Singh Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 60287e9e9d2..e33ee74eee7 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ example in cpusets, no task may attach before 'cpus' and 'mems' are set up. void bind(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *root) -(cgroup_mutex held by caller) +(cgroup_mutex and ss->hierarchy_mutex held by caller) Called when a cgroup subsystem is rebound to a different hierarchy and root cgroup. Currently this will only involve movement between -- cgit v1.2.3 From a5fd9139f74c722a190b3bd69bbd611a8d91b388 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Sascha Hauer Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:08:58 -0800 Subject: w1: add 1-wire master driver for i.MX27 / i.MX31 This patch adds support for the 1-wire master interface for i.MX27 and i.MX31. Signed-off-by: Luotao Fu Signed-off-by: Sascha Hauer Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Cc: Russell King Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX | 2 ++ Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 | 11 +++++++++++ 2 files changed, 13 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX index 7b0ceaaad7a..d63fa024ac0 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX @@ -4,5 +4,7 @@ ds2482 - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor DS2482 provides 1-wire busses. ds2490 - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor DS2490 builds USB <-> W1 bridges. +mxc_w1 + - W1 master controller driver found on Freescale MX2/MX3 SoCs w1-gpio - GPIO 1-wire bus master driver. diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 b/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97f6199a7f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +Kernel driver mxc_w1 +==================== + +Supported chips: + * Freescale MX27, MX31 and probably other i.MX SoCs + Datasheets: + http://www.freescale.com/files/32bit/doc/data_sheet/MCIMX31.pdf?fpsp=1 + http://www.freescale.com/files/dsp/MCIMX27.pdf?fpsp=1 + +Author: Originally based on Freescale code, prepared for mainline by + Sascha Hauer -- cgit v1.2.3 From e4e056aa3518197830c884b85268799b1868e8e3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Evgeniy Polyakov Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:09:02 -0800 Subject: w1: documentation update Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/w1.netlink | 129 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 91 insertions(+), 38 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index 3640c7c87d4..d596d406e0a 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -5,69 +5,122 @@ Message types. ============= There are three types of messages between w1 core and userspace: -1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device found - either due to automatic or requested search. -2. Userspace commands. Includes read/write and search/alarm search comamnds. +1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device + found either due to automatic or requested search. +2. Userspace commands. 3. Replies to userspace commands. Protocol. ======== -[struct cn_msg] - connector header. It's length field is equal to size of the attached data. +[struct cn_msg] - connector header. + Its length field is equal to size of the attached data [struct w1_netlink_msg] - w1 netlink header. __u8 type - message type. - W1_SLAVE_ADD/W1_SLAVE_REMOVE - slave add/remove events. - W1_MASTER_ADD/W1_MASTER_REMOVE - master add/remove events. - W1_MASTER_CMD - userspace command for bus master device (search/alarm search). - W1_SLAVE_CMD - userspace command for slave device (read/write/ search/alarm search - for bus master device where given slave device found). + W1_LIST_MASTERS + list current bus masters + W1_SLAVE_ADD/W1_SLAVE_REMOVE + slave add/remove events + W1_MASTER_ADD/W1_MASTER_REMOVE + master add/remove events + W1_MASTER_CMD + userspace command for bus master + device (search/alarm search) + W1_SLAVE_CMD + userspace command for slave device + (read/write/touch) __u8 res - reserved - __u16 len - size of attached to this header data. + __u16 len - size of data attached to this header data union { - __u8 id; - slave unique device id + __u8 id[8]; - slave unique device id struct w1_mst { - __u32 id; - master's id. + __u32 id; - master's id __u32 res; - reserved } mst; } id; -[strucrt w1_netlink_cmd] - command for gived master or slave device. +[struct w1_netlink_cmd] - command for given master or slave device. __u8 cmd - command opcode. - W1_CMD_READ - read command. - W1_CMD_WRITE - write command. - W1_CMD_SEARCH - search command. - W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command. + W1_CMD_READ - read command + W1_CMD_WRITE - write command + W1_CMD_TOUCH - touch command + (write and sample data back to userspace) + W1_CMD_SEARCH - search command + W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command __u8 res - reserved - __u16 len - length of data for this command. - For read command data must be allocated like for write command. - __u8 data[0] - data for this command. + __u16 len - length of data for this command + For read command data must be allocated like for write command + __u8 data[0] - data for this command -Each connector message can include one or more w1_netlink_msg with zero of more attached w1_netlink_cmd messages. +Each connector message can include one or more w1_netlink_msg with +zero or more attached w1_netlink_cmd messages. -For event messages there are no w1_netlink_cmd embedded structures, only connector header -and w1_netlink_msg strucutre with "len" field being zero and filled type (one of event types) -and id - either 8 bytes of slave unique id in host order, or master's id, which is assigned -to bus master device when it is added to w1 core. +For event messages there are no w1_netlink_cmd embedded structures, +only connector header and w1_netlink_msg strucutre with "len" field +being zero and filled type (one of event types) and id: +either 8 bytes of slave unique id in host order, +or master's id, which is assigned to bus master device +when it is added to w1 core. + +Currently replies to userspace commands are only generated for read +command request. One reply is generated exactly for one w1_netlink_cmd +read request. Replies are not combined when sent - i.e. typical reply +messages looks like the following: -Currently replies to userspace commands are only generated for read command request. -One reply is generated exactly for one w1_netlink_cmd read request. -Replies are not combined when sent - i.e. typical reply messages looks like the following: [cn_msg][w1_netlink_msg][w1_netlink_cmd] -cn_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len; +cn_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + + cmd->len; w1_netlink_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len; w1_netlink_cmd.len = cmd->len; +Replies to W1_LIST_MASTERS should send a message back to the userspace +which will contain list of all registered master ids in the following +format: + + cn_msg (CN_W1_IDX.CN_W1_VAL as id, len is equal to sizeof(struct + w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multipled by 4) + w1_netlink_msg (type: W1_LIST_MASTERS, len is equal to + number of masters multiplied by 4 (u32 size)) + id0 ... idN + + Each message is at most 4k in size, so if number of master devices + exceeds this, it will be split into several messages, + cn.seq will be increased for each one. + +W1 search and alarm search commands. +request: +[cn_msg] + [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD + id is equal to the bus master id to use for searching] + [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_SEARCH or W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH] + +reply: + [cn_msg, ack = 1 and increasing, 0 means the last message, + seq is equal to the request seq] + [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD] + [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_SEARCH or W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH + len is equal to number of IDs multiplied by 8] + [64bit-id0 ... 64bit-idN] +Length in each header corresponds to the size of the data behind it, so +w1_netlink_cmd->len = N * 8; where N is number of IDs in this message. + Can be zero. +w1_netlink_msg->len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + N * 8; +cn_msg->len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + + N*8; Operation steps in w1 core when new command is received. ======================================================= -When new message (w1_netlink_msg) is received w1 core detects if it is master of slave request, -according to w1_netlink_msg.type field. +When new message (w1_netlink_msg) is received w1 core detects if it is +master or slave request, according to w1_netlink_msg.type field. Then master or slave device is searched for. -When found, master device (requested or those one on where slave device is found) is locked. -If slave command is requested, then reset/select procedure is started to select given device. +When found, master device (requested or those one on where slave device +is found) is locked. If slave command is requested, then reset/select +procedure is started to select given device. Then all requested in w1_netlink_msg operations are performed one by one. If command requires reply (like read command) it is sent on command completion. @@ -82,8 +135,8 @@ Connector [1] specific documentation. Each connector message includes two u32 fields as "address". w1 uses CN_W1_IDX and CN_W1_VAL defined in include/linux/connector.h header. Each message also includes sequence and acknowledge numbers. -Sequence number for event messages is appropriate bus master sequence number increased with -each event message sent "through" this master. +Sequence number for event messages is appropriate bus master sequence number +increased with each event message sent "through" this master. Sequence number for userspace requests is set by userspace application. Sequence number for reply is the same as was in request, and acknowledge number is set to seq+1. @@ -93,6 +146,6 @@ Additional documantion, source code examples. ============================================ 1. Documentation/connector -2. http://tservice.net.ru/~s0mbre/archive/w1 -This archive includes userspace application w1d.c which -uses read/write/search commands for all master/slave devices found on the bus. +2. http://www.ioremap.net/archive/w1 +This archive includes userspace application w1d.c which uses +read/write/search commands for all master/slave devices found on the bus. -- cgit v1.2.3 From f89735c4e281e8642907b38640c076ae5048f3a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Evgeniy Polyakov Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:09:04 -0800 Subject: w1: added w1 reset command Command which allows to reset the bus. Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Cc: Paul Alfille Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/w1.netlink | 6 ++++++ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index d596d406e0a..2756681b6ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -112,6 +112,12 @@ cn_msg->len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + N*8; +W1 reset command. +[cn_msg] + [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD + id is equal to the bus master id to use for searching] + [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_RESET] + Operation steps in w1 core when new command is received. ======================================================= -- cgit v1.2.3 From 4037014e3fb71e998189374e19ca141c59d15323 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Evgeniy Polyakov Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:09:05 -0800 Subject: w1: send status messages after command processing Send completion status of the commands to the userspace. Message and protocol are described in the documentation. Signed-off-by: Evgeniy Polyakov Cc: Paul Alfille Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/w1/w1.netlink | 29 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 1 file changed, 29 insertions(+) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index 2756681b6ef..804445f745e 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -118,6 +118,35 @@ W1 reset command. id is equal to the bus master id to use for searching] [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_RESET] + +Command status replies. +====================== + +Each command (either root, master or slave with or without w1_netlink_cmd +structure) will be 'acked' by the w1 core. Format of the reply is the same +as request message except that length parameters do not account for data +requested by the user, i.e. read/write/touch IO requests will not contain +data, so w1_netlink_cmd.len will be 0, w1_netlink_msg.len will be size +of the w1_netlink_cmd structure and cn_msg.len will be equal to the sum +of the sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) and sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd). +If reply is generated for master or root command (which do not have +w1_netlink_cmd attached), reply will contain only cn_msg and w1_netlink_msg +structires. + +w1_netlink_msg.status field will carry positive error value +(EINVAL for example) or zero in case of success. + +All other fields in every structure will mirror the same parameters in the +request message (except lengths as described above). + +Status reply is generated for every w1_netlink_cmd embedded in the +w1_netlink_msg, if there are no w1_netlink_cmd structures, +reply will be generated for the w1_netlink_msg. + +All w1_netlink_cmd command structures are handled in every w1_netlink_msg, +even if there were errors, only length mismatch interrupts message processing. + + Operation steps in w1 core when new command is received. ======================================================= -- cgit v1.2.3 From 73ac36ea14fd18ea3dc057e41b16ff31a3c0bd5a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Coly Li Date: Wed, 7 Jan 2009 18:09:16 -0800 Subject: fix similar typos to successfull When I review ocfs2 code, find there are 2 typos to "successfull". After doing grep "successfull " in kernel tree, 22 typos found totally -- great minds always think alike :) This patch fixes all the similar typos. Thanks for Randy's ack and comments. Signed-off-by: Coly Li Acked-by: Randy Dunlap Acked-by: Roland Dreier Cc: Jeremy Kerr Cc: Jeff Garzik Cc: Heiko Carstens Cc: Martin Schwidefsky Cc: Theodore Ts'o Cc: Mark Fasheh Cc: Vlad Yasevich Cc: Sridhar Samudrala Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds --- Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet | 4 ++-- Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt | 4 ++-- 2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet index 4d184f2db0e..d9251efdcec 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Once all bytes have been read data will hold 0x09, but there is no reason to test for this. Notice that the number of bytes is bank address dependent see above and below. -After completing a successfull read it is advised to put the uGuru back in +After completing a successful read it is advised to put the uGuru back in ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection algorithm described above will still work. @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ don't ask why this is the way it is. Once DATA holds 0x01 read CMD it should hold 0xAC now. -After completing a successfull write it is advised to put the uGuru back in +After completing a successful write it is advised to put the uGuru back in ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection algorithm described above will still work. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index 38d324d62b2..e5b071d4661 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Vport States: This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is independent of the adapter's link state. - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. - This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization. + This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization. Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for Vport Creation. @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Vport Creation: This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is independent of the adapter's link state. - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. - This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization. + This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization. The LLDD's vport_create() function will not synchronously wait for both parts to be fully completed before returning. It must validate that the -- cgit v1.2.3 From 7ad68e2f970fd84d15ad67ce3216aed05f944a9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: David Brownell Date: Tue, 11 Nov 2008 17:39:02 -0800 Subject: regulator: sysfs attribute reduction (v2) Clean up the sysfs interface to regulators by only exposing the attributes that can be properly displayed. For example: when a particular regulator method is needed to display the value, only create that attribute when that method exists. This cleaned-up interface is much more comprehensible. Most regulators only support a subset of the possible methods, so often more than half the attributes would be meaningless. Many "not defined" values are no longer necessary. (But handling of out-of-range values still looks a bit iffy.) Documentation is updated to reflect that few of the attributes are *always* present, and to briefly explain why a regulator may not have a given attribute. This adds object code, about a dozen bytes more than was removed by the preceding patch, but saves a bunch of per-regulator data associated with the now-removed attributes. So there's a net reduction in memory footprint. Signed-off-by: David Brownell Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator | 136 +++++++++++------------- 1 file changed, 60 insertions(+), 76 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator index 3731f6f29bc..873ef1fc156 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -3,8 +3,9 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called - state. This holds the regulator output state. + Some regulator directories will contain a field called + state. This reports the regulator enable status, for + regulators which can report that value. This will be one of the following strings: @@ -18,7 +19,8 @@ Description: 'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not supplying power to the system.. - 'unknown' means software cannot determine the state. + 'unknown' means software cannot determine the state, or + the reported state is invalid. NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts and microamps to determine regulator output levels. @@ -53,9 +55,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting - measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts). + measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts), for regulators + which can report that voltage. NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of @@ -67,9 +70,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit - setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps). + setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps), for regulators + which can report that current. NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator output current level as this value is the same regardless of @@ -81,8 +85,9 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called - opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. + Some regulator directories will contain a field called + opmode. This holds the current regulator operating mode, + for regulators which can report it. The opmode value can be one of the following strings: @@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ Description: 'standby' 'unknown' - The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h + The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/consumer.h NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of @@ -104,9 +109,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator - output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts, + for regulators which support voltage constraints. NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by @@ -118,9 +124,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator - output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts, + for regulators which support voltage constraints. NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by @@ -132,10 +139,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator output current limit setting for this domain measured in - microamps. + microamps, for regulators which support current constraints. NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by @@ -147,10 +154,10 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator output current limit setting for this domain measured in - microamps. + microamps, for regulators which support current constraints. NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by @@ -185,7 +192,7 @@ Date: April 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer devices. @@ -204,125 +211,102 @@ Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when - the system is suspended to memory. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by - platform code. + the system is suspended to memory, for voltage regulators + implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when - the system is suspended to disk. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by - platform code. + the system is suspended to disk, for voltage regulators + implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when - the system is suspended to standby. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by - platform code. + the system is suspended to standby, for voltage regulators + implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting for this domain when the system is suspended to - memory. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by - platform code. + memory, for regulators implementing suspend mode + configuration constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode - setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by - platform code. + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk, + for regulators implementing suspend mode configuration + constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting for this domain when the system is suspended to - standby. - - NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if - the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by - platform code. + standby, for regulators implementing suspend mode + configuration constraints. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state - when suspended to memory. - - This will be one of the following strings: + when suspended to memory, for regulators implementing suspend + configuration constraints. - 'enabled' - 'disabled' - 'not defined' + This will be one of the same strings reported by + the "state" attribute. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state - when suspended to disk. - - This will be one of the following strings: + when suspended to disk, for regulators implementing + suspend configuration constraints. - 'enabled' - 'disabled' - 'not defined' + This will be one of the same strings reported by + the "state" attribute. What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state Date: May 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.26 Contact: Liam Girdwood Description: - Each regulator directory will contain a field called + Some regulator directories will contain a field called suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating - state when suspended to standby. - - This will be one of the following strings: + state when suspended to standby, for regulators implementing + suspend configuration constraints. - 'enabled' - 'disabled' - 'not defined' + This will be one of the same strings reported by + the "state" attribute. -- cgit v1.2.3 From 9fe5817f196054142b9a13ed78c73b76a29f2ea3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Mark Brown Date: Wed, 31 Dec 2008 12:52:44 +0000 Subject: regulator: Add basic DocBook manual Add a basic DocBook manual for the regulator API. This is much more skeletal than the existing text documentation, the main benefit is to provide a skeleton for automatic generation of a manual based on the kerneldoc for the API. Since large portions of the text are lifted from the existing text format documentation written by Liam Girdwood much of the credit belongs to him. Signed-off-by: Mark Brown Signed-off-by: Liam Girdwood --- Documentation/DocBook/Makefile | 2 +- Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl | 304 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ 2 files changed, 305 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) create mode 100644 Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 0a08126d309..dc3154e4927 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \ genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \ - mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml + mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml ### # The build process is as follows (targets): diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..53f4f8d3b81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl @@ -0,0 +1,304 @@ + + + + + + Voltage and current regulator API + + + + Liam + Girdwood + +
+ lrg@slimlogic.co.uk +
+ + + + Mark + Brown + + Wolfson Microelectronics +
+ broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com +
+ + + + + + 2007-2008 + Wolfson Microelectronics + + + 2008 + Liam Girdwood + + + + + This documentation is free software; you can redistribute + it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. + + + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + See the GNU General Public License for more details. + + + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this program; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, + MA 02111-1307 USA + + + + For more details see the file COPYING in the source + distribution of Linux. + + + + + + + + Introduction + + This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel + interface to control voltage and current regulators. + + + The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control + regulator power output in order to save power and prolong + battery life. This applies to both voltage regulators (where + voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where current + limit is controllable). + + + Note that additional (and currently more complete) documentation + is available in the Linux kernel source under + Documentation/power/regulator. + + + + Glossary + + The regulator API uses a number of terms which may not be + familiar: + + + + + Regulator + + + Electronic device that supplies power to other devices. Most + regulators can enable and disable their output and some can also + control their output voltage or current. + + + + + + Consumer + + + Electronic device which consumes power provided by a regulator. + These may either be static, requiring only a fixed supply, or + dynamic, requiring active management of the regulator at + runtime. + + + + + + Power Domain + + + The electronic circuit supplied by a given regulator, including + the regulator and all consumer devices. The configuration of + the regulator is shared between all the components in the + circuit. + + + + + + Power Management Integrated Circuit + PMIC + + + An IC which contains numerous regulators and often also other + subsystems. In an embedded system the primary PMIC is often + equivalent to a combination of the PSU and southbridge in a + desktop system. + + + + + + + + + Consumer driver interface + + This offers a similar API to the kernel clock framework. + Consumer drivers use get and put operations to acquire and + release regulators. Functions are + provided to enable + and disable the + reguator and to get and set the runtime parameters of the + regulator. + + + When requesting regulators consumers use symbolic names for their + supplies, such as "Vcc", which are mapped into actual regulator + devices by the machine interface. + + + A stub version of this API is provided when the regulator + framework is not in use in order to minimise the need to use + ifdefs. + + + + Enabling and disabling + + The regulator API provides reference counted enabling and + disabling of regulators. Consumer devices use the regulator_enable + and regulator_disable + functions to enable and disable regulators. Calls + to the two functions must be balanced. + + + Note that since multiple consumers may be using a regulator and + machine constraints may not allow the regulator to be disabled + there is no guarantee that calling + regulator_disable will actually cause the + supply provided by the regulator to be disabled. Consumer + drivers should assume that the regulator may be enabled at all + times. + + + + + Configuration + + Some consumer devices may need to be able to dynamically + configure their supplies. For example, MMC drivers may need to + select the correct operating voltage for their cards. This may + be done while the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + + The regulator_set_voltage + and regulator_set_current_limit + functions provide the primary interface for this. + Both take ranges of voltages and currents, supporting drivers + that do not require a specific value (eg, CPU frequency scaling + normally permits the CPU to use a wider range of supply + voltages at lower frequencies but does not require that the + supply voltage be lowered). Where an exact value is required + both minimum and maximum values should be identical. + + + + + Callbacks + + Callbacks may also be registered + for events such as regulation failures. + + + + + + Regulator driver interface + + Drivers for regulator chips register the regulators + with the regulator core, providing operations structures to the + core. A notifier interface + allows error conditions to be reported to the core. + + + Registration should be triggered by explicit setup done by the + platform, supplying a struct + regulator_init_data for the regulator containing + constraint and + supply information. + + + + + Machine interface + + This interface provides a way to define how regulators are + connected to consumers on a given system and what the valid + operating parameters are for the system. + + + + Supplies + + Regulator supplies are specified using struct + regulator_consumer_supply. This is done at + driver registration + time as part of the machine constraints. + + + + + Constraints + + As well as definining the connections the machine interface + also provides constraints definining the operations that + clients are allowed to perform and the parameters that may be + set. This is required since generally regulator devices will + offer more flexibility than it is safe to use on a given + system, for example supporting higher supply voltages than the + consumers are rated for. + + + This is done at driver + registration time by providing a struct + regulation_constraints. + + + The constraints may also specify an initial configuration for the + regulator in the constraints, which is particularly useful for + use with static consumers. + + + + + + API reference + + Due to limitations of the kernel documentation framework and the + existing layout of the source code the entire regulator API is + documented here. + +!Iinclude/linux/regulator/consumer.h +!Iinclude/linux/regulator/machine.h +!Iinclude/linux/regulator/driver.h +!Edrivers/regulator/core.c + + -- cgit v1.2.3 From d5b524327b2a482dddae3839ced8f8825074730d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jonathan Corbet Date: Thu, 8 Jan 2009 16:32:13 -0700 Subject: Fix a typo in the development process document. MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit Reported-by: Aníbal Monsalve Salazar Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet --- Documentation/development-process/4.Coding | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'Documentation') diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding index 014aca8f14e..a5a3450faaa 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding +++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding @@ -375,10 +375,10 @@ say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the justification is solid. When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible, -ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler. +ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler. This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that interface. It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is a change that they need to respond to. Supporting out-of-tree code is not something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do -not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to -be. +not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it needs to +be. -- cgit v1.2.3